Karel PBX DS200 Technical Guide

TECHNICAL GUIDE VERSION AAA.25.12.2003

CONTENTS

¾ DS200 TECHNICAL REFERENCE GUIDE ¾ DS200 INSTALLATION GUIDE ¾ DS200 PROGRAMMING GUIDE ¾ ADMIN200 USER’S GUIDE ¾ KNEE PROGRAMMING GUIDE

KAREL reserves the right to make modifications in product features mentioned in this document for development and improvement purposes, without prior notice. Individual products may possess characteristics different from those mentioned in this document, according to their software and hardware versions.

CAUTION

Since DS200 is an electronic-based product, the requirements below should be fulfilled in order to utilize it with desired performance:

The system covers must not be opened by unauthorized persons in any way.

The cover of the exchange cabinet should always be kept closed. All the ground connections on the covers must be fixed and checked before closing all the covers of the system. Prior to mounting the exchange cabinet on the wall, it should be made sure that the screws are not defective. Precautions must be taken in order to prevent any harmful substances from leaking or spilling into the exchange in any way.

Serious hazards may occur unless the conditions above are matched completely!

Attention!

For the proper operation of the system, please make sure that the following criteria are satisfied.

♦ Check the performance of the earth line connected to the system. If this line is not safe enough, make a new and proper earth connection to the system to avoid possible hazards that may occur due to the high voltages which may affect the system. ♦ For the wall type systems, the rack holder metal part must be 100 cm above from the floor level. ♦ It must not be permitted to install the system into the places: -

Exposed to direct sunlight,

-

Extremely hot and cold places,

-

Where the temperature is out of the range of 0 C° to +45 C° and the relative humidity is above 80%,

-

Where vibrations or shocks are frequent or strong,

-

Close to radio broadcast antennas,

-

Where the system may be in contact with water , oil or dust,

-

Close to Sulfuric gas producing areas like thermal springs, etc. that may damage the system,

-

Near high frequency sewing machines or electric welders.

♦ The frequent power cut-off may affect the performance of the system. Therefore, make sure the system has an uninterrupted power source specific to the system. ♦ Anything, which may prevent proper ventilation of the system may be risky and affect the performance of the system.

Preface The five chapters in this guide is prepared to supply detailed information for the people who may need detailed technical information about the structure, installation and the programming of the system. Thus, the methods to configure the system to meet the customer requirements can be learned from this guide. The first chapter – “Technical Reference Guide” - gives detailed information about the hardware and the software structure of the DS200 system. The information in this chapter may require some background on mechanics, electric and electronics. The information flow goes from the whole to the pieces forming up the whole. At the end a table of summary can be found. The second chapter – “Installation Guide” – explains the methods to configure the system in a proper way and to meet all the customer requirements. Also the steps to run the system and the items to be inspected at the first run time are explained in this chapter. This chapter must be read carefully by the personnel who will make the installation of the system. The third chapter – “Programming Guide” – explains the program codes, which are used to define the working principles of the system. These codes are to be entered from the telephone of the system supervisor. However, programming a big capacity system like DS200 from the telephone may be difficult. Therefore, after understanding the programming logic of the system by reading this guide, the PC program ADMIN200 that is an affective tool to program the system may be used for an easier programming. The fourth chapter – “ADMIN200 Programming Guide” – explains how to setup and run the ADMIN200 program on a PC and the way of using this software for programming different parameters of the DS200 system. The fifth chapter – “KNEE Programming Guide” – explains how to setup and run the KNEE program on a PC and the way of using this software for programming the IP (Internet Protocol) parameters of IP based modules of the DS200 system.

Best regards, KAREL

TECHNICAL REFERENCE GUIDE

The products may have some differences from the functionality written in this guide according to the hardware revision or software version.

TABLE OF CONTENTS SYSTEM CAPABILITIES .............................................................................................................. 1 SYSTEM ACCESSORIES.............................................................................................................. 4 I. SYSTEM DEFINITION ............................................................................................................... 6 I.1. FUNDAMENTAL HARDWARE STRUCTURE....................................................................................... 8 I.1.A. WALL-TYPE RACKS:......................................................................................................................................8 I.1.B. CABINET-TYPE RACKS ............................................................................................................................... 11 I.1.C. AUXILIARY PARTS FOR CABINET-TYPE FOURTH RACK ........................................................................... 13 I.1.D. CABINET ...................................................................................................................................................... 14 I.1.D.1. THREE-RACK CABINET: ......................................................................................................................................... 14 I.1.D.2. FOUR-RACK CABINET: ........................................................................................................................................... 16

I.2. BACKPLANES ................................................................................................................................... 17 I.2.A. BACKPLANE OF THE MAIN RACK – BPL200-MAIN................................................................................... 17 I.2.B. BACKPLANE OF THE AUXILIARY RACK – BPL200-AUX ............................................................................18 I.2.C. BACKPLANE OF THE POWER SUPPLIES– BPL200-SPS........................................................................... 18

I.3. POWER SUPPLIES ............................................................................................................................ 19 I.3.A. AC/DC POWER SUPPLY - SPS200 .............................................................................................................. 19 I.3.B. DC/DC POWER SUPPLY- SPS248 ............................................................................................................... 22

I.4. CENTRAL PROCESSING MODULE - CPU200 & CPU CONNECTION CARD - DS200 CPUKON............................................................................................................................................. 23 I.4.A. CPU200 MODULE......................................................................................................................................... 23 I.4.B. REDUNDANT CPU200 MODULE ................................................................................................................. 25 I.4.C. DS200 CPUKON CARD: ............................................................................................................................... 26 I.4.C.1. EXTERNAL MUSIC CONNECTOR ............................................................................................................................ 27 I.4.C.2. EXTERNAL RELAY CONNECTOR ............................................................................................................................ 27 I.4.C.3. SERIAL DATA CONNECTORS.................................................................................................................................. 27 I.4.C.4. PC OR SERIAL PRINTER CONNECTORS (RS232)................................................................................................... 27 I.4.C.5. LAN ADAPTOR CARD .............................................................................................................................................. 28 I.4.C.6. RS485 CONNECTOR ................................................................................................................................................ 29 I.4.C.7. HR08 POWER FAILURE TRANSFER RELAY MODULE CONNECTOR ..................................................................... 29

I.5. UTILITY MODULE – UTIL200 ............................................................................................................ 29 I.6. EXTENSION / LINE MODULES - EX200 ........................................................................................... 31 I.6.A. CONNECTION CARDS AND CABLES .......................................................................................................... 32 I.6.B. EX200 EXPANSION MODULES .................................................................................................................... 34 I.6.B.1. EX200 (0/16) ANALOG EXTENSION MODULE ......................................................................................................... 36 I.6.B.2. EX200 (0/16R) ANALOG EXTENSION MODULE ...................................................................................................... 36 I.6.B.3. EX200 (8/0) LINE MODULE...................................................................................................................................... 36 I.6.B.4. EX200 (8+8/0) EXTENDIBLE LINE MODULE ........................................................................................................... 37 I.6.B.5. EX200 (0/8S0) ISDN BRI EXTENSION MODULE...................................................................................................... 37 I.6.B.6. EX200 (1S2/0) ISDN PRI LINE MODULE ................................................................................................................. 37 1.6.B.7. EX200 (1R2/0) R2 DIGITAL LINE MODULE............................................................................................................. 38 1.6.B.8. EX200 (1VF/0) 1VF DIGITAL LINE MODULE ........................................................................................................... 38 1.6.B.9. EX200 (7CAS2B-RX/0) CAS2B ANALOG LINE MODULE ........................................................................................ 38 1.6.B.10. EX200 (8CAS2B-TX/0) CAS2B ANALOG LINE MODULE ...................................................................................... 39 1.6.B.11. EX200 (SS7 C) SS7 CONTROL MODULE............................................................................................................... 39 1.6.B.12. EX200 (SS7 L) SS7 LINK MODULE ....................................................................................................................... 39 I.6.B.13. EX200 (0/8U) DIGITAL EXTENSION MODULE ....................................................................................................... 39 1.6.B.14. EX200 (0/16U) DIGITAL EXTENSION MODULE .................................................................................................... 39 I.6.B.15. EX200 (8 T0/S0) ISDN BRI LINE/ EXTENSION MODULE ...................................................................................... 40 1.6.B.16. EX200 (0/8LB) LOCAL-BATTERY EXTENSION MODULE ..................................................................................... 40 I.6.B.17. EX200 (4 VOIP) VOICE OVER IP MODULE.............................................................................................................. 40 I.6.B.18. EX200 (4TWT) SPECIAL DUPLEX LINE MODULE ................................................................................................. 41 I.6.B.19. EX200 (4E&M/0) E&M LINE MODULE................................................................................................................... 41 I.6.B.20. EX200 (8E&M/0) E&M LINE MODULE................................................................................................................... 45 I.6.B.21. EX200 (ALARM) ALARM MODULE......................................................................................................................... 46

I.7. AUTO ATTENDANT AND VOICE MAIL MODULE – EVM200L........................................................... 46 I.8. INTER-CABINET CONNECTION UNITS ........................................................................................... 48 I.8.A. CCU CARD.................................................................................................................................................... 48 I.8.B. CLOCK MASTER & CLOCK SLAVE CARDS ................................................................................................. 48

II. SOFTWARE ........................................................................................................................... 49 III. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................ 50

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

SYSTEM CAPABILITIES •

Large-Capacity, Digital/Modular Telephone Branch Exchange

•

Maximum 672 Lines For Three-Rack, And 1344 Lines For Six-Rack Structures

•

Reliable And High-Quality Audio, Data And Video Transmission

•

224 Inner-Rack And 256 Inter-Rack Simultaneous Speech Channels

•

Busy Hour Traffic Of 10000 Calls/Hour

HARDWARE CHARACTERISTICS: •

Distributed Microprocessor Structure That Provides Utmost Flexibility For A Digital System

•

Open Architecture Design

•

Flexible And Hybrid Structure

•

DSP / ICP / SMPS Technologies

•

Cards That Have Been Manufactured Through The SMD Technology

•

General-Purpose Capacity Expansion Modules ¾ Ex200 (0/16) Analog Extension Module ¾ Ex200 (8/0) Analog Line Module ¾ Ex200 (0/8S0) ISDN BRI Extension Module ¾ Ex200 (1S2/0) ISDN PRI Line Module ¾ Ex200 (1R2/0) R2 Digital Line Module ¾ Ex200 (0/8U) Digital Extension Module ¾ Ex200 (0/16U) Digital Extension Module ¾ Ex200 (8 T0/S0) ISDN BRI Line/Extension Selective Module ¾ Ex200 (0/8LB) Local Battery Extension Module ¾ Ex200 (4E&M/0) E&M Line Module ¾ EX200 (ALARM) Alarm Module

•

EVM200L Auto Attendant And Voice Mail Module

SOFTWARE CHARACTERISTICS •

System-Embedded Self Testing/Troubleshooting Ability

•

VRTX Real-Time Operating System

•

The SDL Programming Language For The Main System Software And The C Language For The Software Of Modules

•

Computer Aided Software Engineering (CASE)

•

Programmability Of The Exchange Locally Or Remotely

•

Programmability Over PC, Through A User Friendly Interface (ADMIN200) That Is Special For The Exchange

1

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS •

Modular Structure With Slots For Easy Installation/Maintenance

•

Wall Or Cabinet Type Mounting Possibility

COMPATIBILITY CHARACTERISTICS •

Configurable For Rural Applications

•

Configurable For Group EPABX Applications

•

Direct Use Of Fully Digital / ISDN Telephone Sets

•

Supports Connection Of Peripheral Devices Like Answering Machine, Wireless Telephone, Facsimile And Modem

•

Euro-ISDN BRI / Euro-ISDN PRI Compatible

•

DDI / MSN Numbering

•

PP / PMP Configuration

•

1000 Different Telephone Numbers On PRI Lines

•

Possibility Of Configuring PRI Lines Both In TE And NT Modes

•

Opportunity To Take Advantage Of All ISDN Services

•

Interface Operating With The R2 Protocol That Contains 30 Digital Channels

•

Support For Videoconferencing And Fast Network Applications

•

Serial Computer / Serial Printer Output

•

Easy And Flexible Connection To Any Router

•

Support For Various Connections Among Exchanges

•

Interface For Local Battery Telephone Connection

•

Compatibility With Hotel Software

•

External Music Connection

•

Door Opener Activation

RELIABILITY CHARACTERISTICS •

Power Supply Back Up For Uninterrupted Operation

•

Automatically Activated Redundant CPU Card For Uninterrupted Operation

•

Module Replacement Through Programming Without Shutting Down The System

•

Low Battery Power Cut-Off / Automatic Charging

•

Three-Level Extreme Voltage Protection

•

Possibility Of Transferring Exchange / User Parameters To Printer Over ADMIN200

•

Through Special Maintenance Programs, -

Transfer Of Data To A File, Which Is Related To Communication Between The CPU200 Communication Controller And Peripheral Devices 2

DS200 Technical Reference Guide -

Transfer Of The Software Version Information Of The CPU200 Communication Controller To A File

-

Transfer Of The Software Version Information Of Modules And Cards To A File

-

Transfer Of Extension Parameters To A File

-

Transfer Of Status Information To A File Upon An Error Has Occurred In The System

•

Accessing Call Record Data Over PC Or Printer

•

Ability To Filter Call Records

•

4000 Call Record Capacity

•

Flexible Numbering / Automatic Numbering Plan

OPTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS •

Power Back Up By Battery

•

Feature Of Conferencing With 16 Participants

•

Ability To Leave Message Between Extension-Extension / Line-Extension ¾ Voice Mail Message Capacity Of Up To 1360 Minutes ¾

Operation Capacity of 32 for recording / 32 for listening simultaneously

•

Informing Users About States Of Their Telephones By Voice Messages

•

Possibility Of Accessing GSM Lines Through A GSM External Line For Economical Calls (By The GT02 Accessory)

•

Digital Wireless Telephone Compatible (By DT04 DECT Module Accessory)

•

Pager Compatible (By The PG100 Accessory)

•

Direct Connections Of Lines To Pre-Determined Extensions In Case Of Power Failure (By The HR08 Accessory)

•

Extra Protection Against Thunderbolt, AM Interference And Leaking Signals From Power Lines (By The FP04 And SP04 Accessories)

•

NET-CONSOLE That Provides Telephone-Computer Integration.

3

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

SYSTEM ACCESSORIES FT20 Feature Telephone Set: The multi-functional telephone set, which is connected to analog extensions over the special data line of the exchange, with the following features: -LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) display with two or four-line options -Smart display control keys -16 LEDs (lights) in two colors with two functions -Handsfree (Conversation without handset) -Special output for earphone. It is connected to the exchange by the four-wire KTS line.

ST20 Digital Feature Telephone Set: The multi-functional telephone set, which is connected to digital extensions, with the following features: -LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) display with two or four-line options -Smart display control keys -16 LEDs (lights) in two colors with two functions -Handsfree (Conversation without handset) -Special output for earphone. It is connected to the exchange over a two-wire connection. It can be connected to the EX200 (0/8U) and EX200 (0/16U) Digital Extension modules.

Iris ISDN Feature Telephone Set: The multi-functional telephone set, which is connected to ISDN extensions, with the following features: -LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) display with two or four-line options -Smart display control keys -16 LEDs (lights) in two colors with two functions -Handsfree (Conversation without handset) -Special output for earphone. It can be connected to the EX200 (0/8S0) ISDN BRI module.

DSS20 Direct Access Units: The fast access units that consist of programmable keys and busy display panels, which can be used together with FT20 telephones.

LT200 (-H) Feature Telephone Set: The multi-functional telephone set, which is connected to analog extensions over the special data line of the exchange, with the following features: -LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) display with two lines -10 LEDs (with light) in single color with two functions -Handsfree (Conversation without handset)

DSS200E Direct Access Unit: The fast access unit that consists of programmable keys and busy display panels, which can be used together with LT200 telephones.

EVM200L Auto Attendant System and Voice Mail Box: The module that provides the exchange with the features of automatic call distribution, the system messages and the voice mail boxes. 4

DS200 Technical Reference Guide ADMIN200 (System Administrator Software): The windows-based software that is used for programming the exchange through computer.

Net-Console Software: The computer-telephone integration software that provides the extensions of the exchange with the advantage that they can use their computers in order to perform operations through PC monitors visually, which they normally do through their telephone sets and even more.

Net-CM Software: The windows-based software that is used for taking, processing and archiving records of the entire calls made over the exchange.

PG100 Local Pager: The system that provides the extensions of the exchange with mobility, such that it conveys all incoming calls to the extensions over pagers.

HR08 Power Failure Transfer Station Relay: The module that directly connects the desired lines to the desired extensions in case of power failure in the systems without battery backup.

SF04 Protection and Filtering Module: The module that protects remote extensions and lines of the exchange from high voltage and signals in AM radio frequency, which may exist in the environment.

SP04 Protection Module: The module that protects remote extensions and lines of the exchange from high voltages and currents.

5

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

I. SYSTEM DEFINITION DS200 is a large-capacity telephone branch exchange, whose capacity can be expanded to 672 lines for three-rack, and 1344 lines for six-rack structures. Due to its distributed CPU structure, it is a very reliable and flexible communication system, which is open to development. DS200 can be configured in two different mechanical structures, namely wall or cabinet type: The wall-type DS200 can be configured in two structures: single-rack (with cover) which can expand to maximum 224 lines, and two-rack (with cover) which can expand to maximum 448 lines. On the other hand, the cabinet-type DS200 can be configured in the following structures: -

Single-rack (maximum 224 lines),

-

Two-rack (maximum 448 lines),

-

Three-rack (maximum 672 lines),

-

Four-rack (maximum 896 lines),

-

Five-rack (maximum 1120 lines)

-

Six-rack (maximum 1344 lines)

In this structure, the system can reach a capacity of six racks by the use of two cabinets. The figures below illustrate general appearances of the wall-type DS200 system and the cabinet:

Figure-1 6

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

Figure - 2 Racks constitute the basis of mechanical structure of DS200. There are two types of rack structure within the body of DS200, namely Main Rack and Auxiliary Rack. Both racks have 14 general-purpose slots for the same EX200 interfaces; however, the CPU200 and DS200 CPUKON cards are situated only in the main rack. Therefore, there are special slots for these cards in the main rack and these slots are not present in auxiliary racks. As a result, backplanes of the main rack and auxiliary racks are different (BPL200MAIN and BPL200-AUX) and they cannot be used interchangeably. Fourteen general-purpose slots are located in each rack of DS200 for the Expansion Modules and EVM200L listed below. The modules that can be installed in these generalpurpose slots are:

7

DS200 Technical Reference Guide •

EX200 (0/16) Analog Extension Module

•

EX200 (8/0) Line Card

•

EX200 (0/8S0) ISDN BRI Extension Module

•

EX200 (1S2/0) ISDN PRI Line Module

•

EX200 (1R2/0) R2 Line Module

•

EX200 (0/8U) Digital Extension Module

•

EX200 (0/16U) Digital Extension Module

•

EX200 (8T0/S0) ISDN BRI Line/Extension Module

•

EX200 (0/8LB) Magneto-telephone Extension Module

•

EX200 (4E&M/0) Line Module

•

EX200 (ALARM) Alarm Module

•

EVM200L Auto Attendant and Voice Mail Module

The system can be configured so as to include any combination of the modules above. The table below shows the maximum number of each module that can be installed in the system: Maximum number of lines

Maximum number of modules

EX200 (0/16)

1200

75

EX200 (0/8S0) + EX200 (0/8U) + EX200 (0/16U)

320

20

EX200 (8/0) + EX200 (1S2/0) + EX200 (1R2/0) + EX200 (8T0/S0) + EX200 (4E&M/0) + EX200 (0/8LB)

512

-

EX200 (8/0) + EX200 (4E&M/0) + EX200 (0/8LB)

256

32

EX200 (1S2/0) + EX200 (1R2/0)

240

8

32 / 32

8

Module

EVM200L

I.1.

FUNDAMENTAL HARDWARE STRUCTURE

The fundamental hardware structure can be considered as to four main headings:

I.1.A. WALL-TYPE RACKS: The wall-type racks provide the small-size exchanges with the hardware to mount them by hanging them on walls. They are equipped with covers for the sake of safety. Main rack of the wall-type DS200 system is composed of the parts listed below: •

RACK200 basic metal rack structure

•

CS200 metal casing

•

SPS200 AC/DC Power Supply

•

SPS 248 DC/DC Power Supply

•

BPL200-MAIN Backplane

8

DS200 Technical Reference Guide •

BPL200-SPS Backplane

•

The CPU200 Central Processing Unit, the redundant CPU200 Central Processing Unit (optional), the DS200 CPUCON CPU Connection Card and the DS200 CPU-FC CPU Flat Cable

•

The UTIL200 Utility Card

•

The EX200 Expansion Modules (Maximum 14 modules)

The figures below show major mechanical and electronic parts of the main rack of the walltype DS200 exchange:

A- DS200 Rack (With cover)

B- SPS200

C- SPS248

D- CPU200

E- DS200 CPUKON

F- UTIL200

G- BPL200

Figure – 3

9

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

Covers 1a- Front Cover

1b- Top Cover

1d- Back Cover

1e- Front Cover Bolts

1c- Bottom Cover

Parts of a Rack 2a- Lower Front Part of the Rack

2b- Upper Front Part of the Rack

2c- Lower Back Part of the Rack

2d- Upper Back Part of the Rack

2e- Left Side Cover

2f- Right Side Cover

2g- Rack Partitioning Piece

2h- Protection Piece During Shipment

2i- Bottom Cover Support Piece

3- SPS Fixing Screws

4- Grounding Screw

5- Bottom / Top Cover Grounding Cables

6- Card Slot

7- Wall Mount Bar

8- Cable Guide

Other

Figure – 4 Auxiliary rack of the wall-type DS200 system is composed of the parts listed below: •

RACK200 basic metal rack structure 10

DS200 Technical Reference Guide •

SPS200 AC/DC Power Supply

•

SPS 248 DC/DC Power Supply

•

BPL200-AUX Backplane

•

BPL200-SPS Backplane

•

UTIL200 Utility Card

•

EX200 Expansion Modules (Maximum 14 modules)

Note that structures of the first rack (the main rack) and structures of the second, third, fourth and fifth racks are different (There are no CPU200 and DS200 CPUKON cards in the auxiliary racks.)

I.1.B. CABINET-TYPE RACKS Racks (the main rack and the auxiliary rack) of the cabinet-type DS200 system include the entire modules that have already been specified for the wall-type DS200, except the CS200 covers. This system is presented for use in a metal cabinet that contains three or four racks, instead of CS200. The figures below show the details of major mechanical and electronic parts of the main rack of the cabinet-type DS200 exchange:

A- DS200 Rack (Without Cover)

B- SPS200

C- SPS248

D- CPU200

E- DS200 CPUKON

F- UTIL200

G- BPL200

Figure – 5

11

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

Parts of a Rack 1a- Lower Front Part of the Rack

1b- Upper Front Part of the Rack

1c- Lower Back Part of the Rack

1d- Upper Back Part of the Rack

1e- Left Side Cover

1f- Right Side Cover

1g- Rack Partitioning Piece

1h- Protection piece during shipment

Other 2- SPS Fixing Screws

3- Grounding Screw

Figure – 6 In addition to those, there are some cables that are used for inter-rack connections, whose details will be explained in later sections. These are: •

BPL200-FC, connection cable between the BPL200-MAIN and BPL200-AUX backplanes

•

BPLSPS-FC, connection cable among BPL200-SPS backplanes

12

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

1 – Auxiliary Rack

C – BPL200-SPS (Main rack)

2 – Main Rack

D – BPL200-SPS (Auxiliary rack)

A – BPL200-MAIN

E – BPL200-FC

B – BPL200-AUX

F – BPLSPS-FC

Figure – 7

I.1.C. AUXILIARY PARTS FOR CABINET-TYPE FOURTH RACK Mechanical structure of the fourth rack, which has been designed to be used in two-cabinet configurations, is the same as that of the main rack; however, it does not include CPU200 and DS200 CPUKON cards. Instead, it contains the additional units listed below: •

Clock Master card

•

CCU card

•

Clock Slave card

•

BPLSPS-FCX, inter-cabinet power connection cord

•

PCM carrier cables

•

BPL200-FC Flat connection cable

CCU card

13

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

Clock Master Card

Clock Slave Card

PCM Carrier Cable

BPLSPS-FCX

BPL200-FC Figure – 8

Related units shall be mentioned with these names in the remaining part of this guide.

I.1.D. CABINET Cabinet is a metal closet, which encloses racks in systems with two or more racks, which facilitates mounting operation, which includes special compartments for batteries and distribution frame (MDF), which is self-lit and ventilated by fan. It is manufactured in sizes capable enough to contain three and four racks, in order to meet different capacity demands.

I.1.D.1. THREE-RACK CABINET: It includes three rack slots to install a system of at most three racks. In systems with five or six racks, two such cabinets are used. Details of the parts in a three-rack cabinet have been illustrated in the figure below:

14

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

1. Back cover 2. Outlet group 3. Grounding metal 4. Side cover (left) 5. Metal strut 6. Rack slot (left) 7. MDF panel

8. Grounding terminal 9. Shelf 10. Wheel 11. Wheel cover 12. Side cover (right) 13. Main framework 14. Fan unit

15. Fan 16. Rack fixing screw 17. Rack slot (right) 18. DS200 logo sticker 19. Front cover 20. Halogen lamp 21. Perpendicular cable holder

Figure – 9

15

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

I.1.D.2. FOUR-RACK CABINET: There are four rack slots in this cabinet that are necessary to install a system with up to four racks. This type of cabinets are used for systems with four racks. Details of the parts in a four-rack cabinet have been illustrated in the figure below:

1. Back cover 2. Outlet group 3. Grounding metal 4. Side cover (left) 5. Metal strut 6. Rack slot (left) 7. MDF panel

8. Grounding terminal 9. Shelf 10. Wheel 11. Wheel cover 12. Side cover (right) 13. Main framework 14. Fan unit

15. Fan 16. Rack fixing screw 17. Rack slot (right) 18. DS200 logo sticker 19. Front cover 20. Halogen lamp 21. Perpendicular cable holder

Figure – 10

16

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

I.2.

BACKPLANES

I.2.A. BACKPLANE OF THE MAIN RACK – BPL200-MAIN Definition: BPL200-MAIN constitutes framework of the main rack. It is the card that provides the fundamental communication of the system, as well as the connection to the other racks, on which CPU200, UTIL200, EX200 modules and BPL200-SPS backplane (backplane of the power supplies) are all installed. There are 14 EX200, 2 CPU200 and 1 UTIL200 card connection slots on the backplane. Besides, there are connectors located on this card for the auxiliary rack and SPS backplane. The figure below shows structure of the BPL200-MAIN backplane and connectors located on it:

1.

DS200 CPUKON Card Slot

3. SPS Backplane – BPL200-SPS

2.

Main Rack Backplane - BPL200-MAIN

f. SPS248 Connector

a.

UTIL200 Module Connector

g. SPS200 Connector

b.

CPU200 Module Connector

h. Inter-rack SPS Connector

c.

General-purpose Connectors

4. Grounding Screw

d.

SPS Backplane Connector

5. Upper Cover Ground Connection

e.

Inter-rack Backplane Connector

6. Lower Cover Ground Connection

Figure – 11 BPL200-MAIN has been mounted between the upper and lower back parts in the metal rack. The connectors on BPL200-MAIN completely fit the card slots in order to facilitate plugging of modules. Dimensions of the BPL200-MAIN backplane are 50 cm. x 14.8 cm and it weighs 0.4 kg.

17

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

I.2.B. BACKPLANE OF THE AUXILIARY RACK – BPL200-AUX Definition: Framework of the auxiliary racks is the BPL200-AUX backplane. The UTIL200, EX200 and BPL200-SPS backplane modules are connected over this backplane. The BPL200-AUX backplane differs from the BPL200-MAIN backplane in some ways. There are no CPU200 and DS200 CPUKON connection slots on this card. The figure below shows the BPL200- AUX Backplane and connectors located on it:

1. Auxiliary Rack Backplane – BPL200-AUX

2. SPS Backplane – BPL200-SPS

a. UTIL200 Module Connector

c. Auxiliary Rack Backplane Connector

b. General-purpose Connectors

e. Inter-rack SPS Connector

c. SPS Backplane Connector

f. SPS248 Connector

d.Inter-rack Backplane Connector

3. Grounding screw 4. Lower Cover Ground Connection 5. Upper Cover Ground Connection

Figure – 12 BPL200- AUX has been mounted between the upper and lower back parts in the metal rack. The connectors on BPL200- AUX completely fit the card slots in order to facilitate plugging of modules. Dimensions of the BPL200- AUX backplane are 46 cm. x 14.8 cm, and it weighs 0.4 kg.

I.2.C. BACKPLANE OF THE POWER SUPPLIES– BPL200-SPS Definition: The SPS200 and SPS248 power supply modules are connected to the BPL200-SPS backplane. The BPL200-SPS cards in the main rack and the auxiliary racks are the same except a slight difference. The BLP200-SPS backplane end of the cable, which provides connection between the BPL200-SPS backplane and BPL200-MAIN in the main rack, has been fixed to the 18

DS200 Technical Reference Guide backplane. On the other, that end has not been fixed to the backplane in the auxiliary rack; it is connected to the card by a connector. The connectors on BPL200-SPS have been shown together with their explanations in Figure - 11 and Figure – 12. List of those connectors have been repeated below for the sake of completeness: •

Cable connection point for BPL200-MAIN

•

A 10-pin male connector for BPL200-AUX connection

•

A 64-pin male connector for SPS248 connection

•

A 5-pin male connector for SPS200 connection

•

A 5-pin male connector (Inter-rack SPS Connector) at the upper left corner for the upper rack BPL200-SPS connection

•

A 5-pin male connector at the lower left corner for the lower rack connection of auxiliary racks and for the main rack connection of the HR08 Transfer Relay Unit

BPL200-SPS has been mounted between the upper and lower back parts in the metal rack. The connectors on BPL200-SPS completely fit the module slots in order to facilitate plugging of the SPS200 and SPS248 modules. Dimensions of the BPL200-SPS backplane are 12 cm. x 9 cm., and it weighs 0.1 kg.

I.3.

POWER SUPPLIES

The system operates with 230 VAC / 50 Hz mains input that is processed by SPS200 and SPS248 Power Supply modules.

I.3.A. AC/DC POWER SUPPLY - SPS200 Definition: SPS200 is a Switched Mode Power Supply that operates with mains voltage (SMPS). Appearance of the SPS200 AC/DC Power Supply is in Figure - 13.

19

DS200 Technical Reference Guide A. Mains Side D. Control & Monitor Plane 3. Mains On/Off Switch 6. Mains Sockets

B. Battery Side 1. Power Status LEDs 4. Battery Fuse 7. Battery Connectors

C. Connection Plane 2. Battery On/Off Switch 5. Mains Fuse Compartment

Figure – 13 The SPS200 AC/DC Power Supply converts 230 V AC voltage to -56V DC, which is the input value for the SPS 248 DC/DC Power Supply. SPS200 can also feed the system through batteries and it can charge the batteries while being fed from the mains supply. In addition to that, it protects the exchange against adverse factors that may affect through the electric system.

Technical Information: SPS200 operates with 230 VAC from the mains input. Its alternative current input has been designed so as it is not affected by variations within the range +/- %10. There are two T-Type 2A / 250 VAC fuses in the main fuse compartment as the preliminary protection for the phase and neuter lines. The SPS200 AC/DC Power Supply has been connected to the 5-pin connector on the BPL200SPS Backplane (See Figure - 11) and it has been screwed to the upper front part of the rack. (See Figure - 4 and Figure - 6). The SPS fixing screw must be loosened before the SPS casing is removed from the exchange. It is not obligatory to use this screw after mounting, which has been included to provide safety during transportation. The SPS200 AC/DC Power Supply contains a metal casing to which the SPS200CR Power Card is connected. The mains transformer is located on the SPS200CR Power Card. SPS200CR, which gets 230 VAC over mains, generates –56 VDC, which is the input voltage of SPS248. Pin assignments of the SPS200 connector on BPL200-SPS backplane are as follows: SPS200 – BPL200-SPS Connector Pin No

Signal

1

- 54 VDC

2

ISOGND

3

-56 VDC

4

ISOGND

5

- VOUTREL

The DS200 system could be backed up with 48 VDC batteries in order to maintain operation in case of power failures. Hence, there is the necessary battery back up circuitry on SPS200CR. Since the system does not have embedded power failure transfer stations, battery backup is essentially important for maintaining connection of the system to the outer world. Considering the battery connection in this regard, use of dry-type batteries is strongly recommended in order to maintain proper operation of the system. A battery connection of 48V/24 Ah is recommended for a full capacity, three-rack system with a traffic rate of 35 % in average. There is also an F-Type 8A/48VDC fuse on SPS200 for the battery input. SPS200CR has the ability to charge the batteries even when the system power is on and the system is operating with a low traffic rate. In addition to that, there is also a low current cutoff circuit that turns itself off when the system voltage drops below 34 VDC, and which does

20

DS200 Technical Reference Guide not turn on until the voltage goes above 46 VDC. Thanks to this circuit, SPS200 would prolong life of the batteries by preventing their full discharge.

Operational Information: Three LEDs that are on the front panel of the SPS200 Power Supply Module help figuring out the power supply that is on use at that moment. First of those is for 230 VAC (with the “Mains Power” tag), the second one is for –56 VDC (with “VOUT” tag) and the third one is for fault detection (with “Fault” tag). When the system is being fed from the mains supply during normal operation, the “Mains Power” and “VOUT” LEDs light up. The “Mains Power” LED is turned off when there is no mains voltage. In that case, if battery backup is on line, then the “VOUT” LED remains on. In the even that a problem with the system power occurs, the FAULT LED lights up. In that case, the system must be shut down. In a multi-rack system, several SPS200 Modules are connected in parallel over inter-rack SPS connections. Therefore, under normal conditions, i.e., if the system traffic load is not extreme, one or two of the SPS200 modules operate, while the other(s) is (are) in standby mode. LEDs of SPS200 that is in standby mode are off. Once SPS200 is in operation, its LEDs begin lighting up. There are also mains and battery On/Off switches on SPS200. In a wall-type system, one could reach those switches even when the front cover is closed. (See Figure - 14).

Figure – 14 In a cabinet-type system, in addition to the on/off switches on SPS200, a primary mains switch for mains input, which has been protected by a 10 A / 250 VAC, T-type fuse, is situated in the lower front section of the cabinet. Similarly, the primary battery switch, which has been protected by a 10 A / 250 VAC, T-type fuse, has been placed right under the primary mains switch. (See Figure - 15). It is required to open the front cover of the cabinet in order to reach primary mains and battery switches.

Figure – 15 The mains On/Off switch is supposed to be set to “1” position for normal operation. Moreover, in order to put the battery on line in the systems with battery connection in case of power failures, the battery switch is supposed to be set to “1” position. While the system 21

DS200 Technical Reference Guide is being put on line, even in cases when battery connection exists, the mains switch is supposed to be set to “1” and then the battery switch is supposed to be set to “1” after the system starts to operate.

*

IN ORDER TO TURN ON/OFF CABINET-TYPE SYSTEMS, PRIMARY MAINS AND PRIMARY BATTERY SWITCHES MUST BE TURNED ON/OFF, RESPECTIVELY. THE BATTERY AND MAINS SWITCHES ON SPS200 ARE FOR SECONDARY CONTROL ONLY. SWITCHING SPS200 ON AND OFF BEFORE TURNING THE PRIMARY MAINS AND THE PRIMARY BATTERY SWITCHES OFF MAY DAMAGE SPS200.

Dimensions of SPS200 are 8 cm. x 22.5 cm. x 20 cm. and it weighs 2.8 kg.

I.3.B. DC/DC POWER SUPPLY- SPS248 Definition: It is the power supply that generates voltages and the ringer signal, which are necessary for the system, from - 56 VDC it receives from SPS200. The figure below shows the appearance of the SPS248 DC/DC Power Supply:

Figure –16 The SPS248 DC/DC Power Supply converts the -56 V output of the SPS200 AC/DC Power Supply to the voltage levels of +5VDC, -5VDC and -48 VDC that are required for system operation. Besides, there is a ring transformer on SPS248 for generating ring signal (67 Vrms.)

Technical Information:

22

DS200 Technical Reference Guide The SPS248 DC/DC Power Supply is attached to the 64-pin power connector that is on the BPL200-SPS backplane (See Figure-11 and Figure-12) and it is fixed to the upper front part of the metal rack with a screw. (See Figure – 4 and Figure – 6). The SPS248 DC/DC Power Supply contains a metal power rack onto which the SPS248CR Power Card and the ring transformer are attached. Outputs of SPS248CR and the ring transformer are transferred to the BPL200-SPS backplane over the 64-pin power connector. The backplane carries these outputs to the BPL200-MAIN/BPL200-AUX sections. Pin assignments of the SPS248 connector on the BPL200-SPS backplane are as follows: SPS248 – BPL200-SPS Connector Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

64, 32

ACK-5 V

43-48,11-16

ISOGND

63, 31

ACK-48 V

42, 10

RING

59-62, 27-30

ISOGND

38-41, 6-9

ISOGND

55-58, 23-26

- 48 VDC

34-37, 2-5

+ 5 VDC

49-54,17-22

- 56 VDC

1, 33

- 5 VDC

Operational Information: There are three Power Status LEDs on the front panel of the SPS248 Power Supply. The first, second and third LEDs are for -5 VDC, +5 VDC and -48 VDC, respectively. Normally, all three LEDS are supposed to light up upon the system is turned on. If there is problem with one of the DC voltages, then the related LED goes off. Dimensions of SPS248 are 8.2 cm. x 22.5 cm. x 20 cm. and it weighs 3.15 kg.

I.4. CENTRAL PROCESSING MODULE - CPU200 & CPU CONNECTION CARD - DS200 CPUKON I.4.A. CPU200 MODULE Definition: The CPU200 Central Processing Module is the brain of the system. It includes microprocessor and memory circuitry on it. CPU200 is present only in the main rack and it is plugged only into the card slot that is third from the left. (See Figure - 3, Figure - 5)

23

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

Figure – 17

Technical Information: The CPU200 module consists of two cards. One is the motherboard for carring the signals to the bacplane and the other one is the one carring all the memory elements and the microprocessor. The CPU200 Module is connected to the related 64-pin connector on the BPL200-MAIN backplane. (See Figure –11) and it is fixed to the upper and lower front sections of the metal rack through the fixing latches that are on the front card cover. CPU200 contains memory elements such as FLASH ROM, DRAM and EEPROM, as well as ICP (Inner-rack Communication Protocol). In addition to that, CPU200 is responsible for generation of system clock. CPU200 generates address and data signals, which are necessary for the UTIL200 and EX200 Modules. It transmits those signals to the BPL200-MAIN over a 64-pin connector, and to the BPL200-AUX backplane over the two 34-pin connectors that provide the BPL200-MAIN - BPL200-AUX connection, and to the second cabinet over a 34-pin connector, when necessary. Data signals necessary for the entire accessories are generated on CPU200 and then they are transmitted to DS200 CPUKON over DS200 CPU-FC.

24

DS200 Technical Reference Guide Functional block diagram of the CPU200 module is shown below:

Figure – 18

Operational Information: A LED is situated on the front panel of CPU200. This LED continuously blinks during normal operation. On the other hand, it remains on during a reset or parameter transfer. By this way, status of the system can be monitored through this LED.

*

CPU200 MUST NOT BE REMOVED WHILE THE SYSTEM IS OPERATING.

Dimensions of CPU200 are 20 cm. x 22.5 cm. and it weighs 0.3 kg.

I.4.B. REDUNDANT CPU200 MODULE Definition: The redundant CPU200 module structurally has no difference compared to the CPU200 module; it is just an optional one that could be applied for backing up the CPU200 module of the system against possible problems.

Technical Information: In the systems with redundant CPU200 module, two CPU200 cards are installed in the main rack. Thanks to an intelligent circuit on the BPL200-MAIN backplane, the system begins using one of those CPU200s actively. In the mean time, the same intelligent circuit continuously controls the processes of the active CPU200. In the event that any problem with the CPU200 card, which is actively being used, occurs, that intelligent circuit automatically puts the redundant CPU200 card on line and takes the problematic card off line. This operation takes place so fast as users would not realize it.

25

DS200 Technical Reference Guide Operational Information: LED of the redundant CPU200 card continuously blinks, however its frequency is higher than that of the LED used with the normal CPU200 card. By this way, one can know which of the modules in the system is actively in use and which one stands by as redundant CPU200. Dimensions of CPU200 are 20 cm. x 22.5 cm. and it weighs 0.3 kg.

I.4.C. DS200 CPUKON CARD: Definition: The DS200 CPUKON CPU Connection Card constitutes the interface between accessories and the system. There are connectors on it in order to connect accessories to the system. The DS200 CPUKON card is present only in the main rack. It is installed in the leftmost slot in the backplane. (See Figure – 11).

Technical Information: The DS200 CPUKON CPU Connection Card is located in the leftmost slot of the main rack, without being connected to the BPL200-MAIN backplane. (See Figure - 11). The card is fixed to the front lower and upper parts on the metal rack through the fixing latches on front card cover. It is connected to the CPU200 card over a 26-pin flat cable (DS200 CPU-FC). In addition to that, there are sockets on the card for the LAN Adaptor card, which is optional. By this way, programming of the exchange over RS232 or Ethernet ports is provided for. Besides, thanks to the LAN Adaptor card, it is also possible to program the exchange over the Internet. Appearance of the DS200 CPUKON card and the connectors on it are shown in the illustration below.

1: CPU200 flat cable connector 2: Redundant CPU200 flat cable connector 26

DS200 Technical Reference Guide 3: PC or Serial Printer Connector (RS232) - 2 4: RS485 Connector 5: PC or Serial Printer Connector (RS232) – 1 6: LAN Adaptor Card Connectors 7: Serial Data Connectors -1 8: Serial Data Connectors –2 (reserved for future use) 9: HR08 Line Drop relay module connector 10: External Music Connector 11: Door Opener Connectors - 1 12: Door Opener Connectors - 2 13: RS232 –1 or LAN Adaptor selection dip switch Figure – 19

I.4.C.1. EXTERNAL MUSIC CONNECTOR Any music source (radio, tape or CD player) can be connected to the system in order to emit to the parties that are parked or calling back, or in order to be used as background music. That connection is done over the 2-pin connector that is on the DS200 CPUKON CPU connection card. (See Figure -19)

I.4.C.2. EXTERNAL RELAY CONNECTOR There are two external relays on the DS200 CPUKON CPU Connection Card, with the rating 250 VAC/-24 VDC at maximum 2 Amperes. (See Figure - 19). These relays can be utilized for door opening control action.

I.4.C.3. SERIAL DATA CONNECTORS There are two identical Serial Data connectors (KTS) on the DS200 CPUKON card. Accessories such as feature telephone sets, DSS modules and local pager can be connected to these. Pin-signal assignments of the two Serial Data connectors (KTS) on the DS200 CPUKON card are as in the table below: Connector

Pin

Signal

K3

1 (Lower pin)

GND+Data

K3

2 (Upper pin)

-48 VDC

K4

1 (Lower pin)

GND+Data

K4

2 (Upper pin)

-48 VDC

I.4.C.4. PC OR SERIAL PRINTER CONNECTORS (RS232) There is an RS232 port on the DS200 CPUKON card, through which connection to computers or serial printers can be provided. This port is a 9-pin, D-type connector. The signalling parameters of the connector are: 27

DS200 Technical Reference Guide 9600 bps 1 stop bit No parity 8 data bits Pin-signal assignments of the RS232 connector on the DS200 CPUKON card are as in the table below: Pin

Signal

2

TX (Transmitting)

3

RX (Receiving)

5

GND

I.4.C.5. LAN ADAPTOR CARD A LAN adaptor card can be installed on the DS200 CPUKON card, which will provide connection to a computer network. Selection to program the exchange over LAN or RS232 is made through jumpers on the card: Jumper

Status

1, 2

ON

3, 4

OFF

1, 2

OFF

3, 4

ON

Selected Output RS232 LAN Adaptor

28

DS200 Technical Reference Guide Signals on the Ethernet port of the LAN adaptor card are as in the table below: RJ45 pin no

Signal

1

RX-1

2

RX-2

3

TX-1

6

TX-2

I.4.C.6. RS485 CONNECTOR The DECT interface connection to DS200 system is made through the RS485 connector. The pin-out of the connector is given in the table below: RJ11 pin no

Signal

1

GND

4

L485

6

L485

I.4.C.7. HR08 CONNECTOR

POWER

FAILURE

TRANSFER

RELAY

MODULE

In case of prolonged power failures, when the batteries approach exhaustion, connection of the DS200 exchange to the outer world may completely cease. In order to prevent that, the HR08 module can be installed and desired extensions can be connected to desired lines in the event that the DS200 exchange has become completely off line. The HR08 connector on the DS200 CPUKON card is used for putting HR08 on line when the exchange batteries get into the low current cut-off mode (i.e., when the exchange has been shut down). Pin-signal assignments of the HR08 connector are as in the table below:

Pin no

Signal

1

Shut

2

-

3

Ground

Dimensions of CPUKON are 8.4 cm. x 22.5 cm., and it weighs 0.15 kg.

I.5.

UTILITY MODULE – UTIL200

Definition: The UTIL200 Utility Module is an auxiliary processor card, which exists in every rack, and that fulfills switching within its own rack, as well as among other racks, and that provides for tone generation and receiving.

29

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

Figure –20

Technical Information: UTIL200 can be placed in the card slot within the rack that has been specially designed for it. (See Figure - 11, Figure - 12). The module is connected to the appropriate 64-pin connector on BPL200-MAIN or BPL200-AUX and then it is fixed to the front lower and upper parts on the metal rack through the fixing latches on front card cover. There is a DSP module on UTIL200 that carries out the entire ton generation and receiving actions. UTIL200 has TDM/PCM switching circuits that provide the entire inter-rack switching. In addition to that, inner-rack switching is also carried out by the UTIL200 module of each individual rack in coordination with CPU200 control. In each UTIL200 module, there are 16 PCM channels for inter-rack switching and 14 for inner-rack switching. By this way, a two-rack system operates totally without blocking. Moreover, each UTIL200 module has 19 DTMF receivers in order to provide DTMF dialing possibility for 19 extensions simultaneously. The UTIL200 card also includes a special socket for the conferencing chip, which is optional and that adds to the system the feature of conferencing with 16 participants. If the system is desired to be enriched with the conferencing feature with 16 participants, then the conferencing chip, which is provided by Karel, should be plugged in the appropriate socket on the UTIL200 card that exists only in the main rack. A single conferencing chip must be used even in multi-rack systems. Below is the functional block diagram of UTIL200.

30

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

Figure – 21

UTIL200 MUST NOT BE REMOVED WHILE THE SYSTEM IS RUNNING.

*

Operational Information: There are two LEDs on the front panel of the UTIL200 module. The upper one signifies that the card is operational and the lower one displays status of communication with the CPU. During normal operation, while the first LED lights continuously, the other blinks. Dimensions of UTIL200 are 20 cm. x 22.5 cm., and it weighs 0.3 kg.

I.6.

EXTENSION / LINE MODULES - EX200

The DS200 includes the EX200 Extension / Line Modules below: Module

Number of structures

lines

and

their Connection interfaces

EX200 (0/16)

16 analog extensions

CON2 card and CBL-16 MDF cable

EX200 (0/16R)

16 special analog extensions

CON5 card and CBL-16 MDF cable

EX200 (8/0)

8 analog lines

CON3 card and CBL-8 MDF cable

EX200 (8+8/0)

16 analog lines

CON6 card and CBL-16 MDF cable

EX200 (0/8S0)

8 ISDN BRI (S0) extensions

CON2 card and CBL-16 MDF cable

EX200 (1S2/0)

1 ISDN PRI (S2) line

An MDF cable with RJ45 connection

EX200 (1R2/0)

1 R2 digital line

An MDF cable with RJ45 connection

EX200 (1VF/0)

1 1VF digital line

An MDF cable with RJ45 connection

EX200 (7CAS2B-RX/0)

7 CAS2B analog incoming lines

CON2 card and CBL-16 MDF cable

EX200 (8CAS2B-TX/0)

8 CAS2B analog outgoing lines

CON4 card and CBL-16 MDF cable

EX200 (SS7 L)

1 SS7 digital line

An MDF cable with RJ45 connection 31

DS200 Technical Reference Guide EX200 (0/8U)

8 special digital extensions

CON3 card and CBL-8 MDF cable

EX200 (0/16U)

16 special digital extensions

CON2 card and CBL-16 MDF cable

EX200 (8T0/S0)

8 ISDN BRI (S0) line or extensions

CON2 card and CBL-16 MDF cable

EX200 (0/8LB)

8 extensions with local battery

CON3 card and CBL-8 MDF cable

EX200 (4VoIP)

4 VoIP channels

An Ethernet cable with RJ45 connection

EX200 (4TWT)

4 TWT lines

CON3 card and CBL-8 MDF cable

EX200 (8E&M/0)

8 E&M lines

CON2 card and CBL-16 MDF cable

EX200 (4E&M/0)

4 E&M lines

CON2 card and CBL-16 MDF cable

EX200 (ALARM)

4 Outputs / 28 Inputs

2 pieces CBL-16 MDF Cable

At its maximum capacity, a six-rack system has 1344 lines (extension + external line) in 6*14=84 interface modules. The EX200 modules are installed in the general-purpose slots in the main or auxiliary racks. (See Figure – 11, Figure – 12). In other words, the modules are connected to the appropriate 64-pin connector on the BPL200-MAIN or BPL200-AUX backplanes and then they are fixed to the front lower and upper parts on the metal rack through the fixing latches on front card cover. DS200 has a factory default numbering plan starting from 1110 for extension and lines. After all of the modules have been installed and the system has been powered, the system automatically checks the entire modules and recognizes them and then it automatically arranges the numbering plan accordingly. There are 16 numbers that have been assigned to each slot in the numbering plan. Therefore:

•

For instance, when an EX200 (8/0) module is installed in one of the slots, while the first 8 numbers are assigned to lines, the other 8 numbers remain as unused.

•

When an EX200 (4E&M/0) module is installed in one of the slots, while the first 4 numbers are assigned to E&M lines, the other 12 numbers remain as unused.

•

When an EX200 (1S2/0) module is installed in one of the slots, in addition to the entire 16 numbers in that slot, the first 14 numbers of the next slot are also assigned to the channels of the ISDN PRI line. The last two numbers of the next slot remain as unused.

I.6.A. CONNECTION CARDS AND CABLES Definition: CON2, CON3, CON4, CON5 and CON6 connection cards constitute the connection point between the extension phones / CO lines and extension / line circuits of the system. In fact, the cables CBL-16 and CBL-8, which will be used together with those connection cards, have been developed in order to provide facility for connections.

Technical Information: CON cards include some common high voltage protection components in order to protect the circuits on the EX200B card against effects of high voltage that could be present in the environment. There are 4 RJ45 female connectors on the CON2, CON4, CON5 and CON6 cards. The MDF cable, called CBL-16, with 16 pairs has been prepared specially for those cards. The male 32

DS200 Technical Reference Guide RJ45’s that are at one end of the CBL-16 cable are attached to the corresponding female connectors that are on the CON card. The cable lengths have been adjusted so as to facilitate installation. The structure of the card and the cabling has been shown in the figure below:

1. RJ45 Jack

2. 4 x 8 cable, multi core, φ 0.45mm

3. Black cable tie

Figure - 22 There are 2 RJ45 female connectors on the CON3 card. The 8-pair MDF cable, which is named as CBL-8, has been designed specially for CON3. Male RJ45s at one end of the CBL-8 cable are attached to the corresponding female connectors on CON3. The cable lengths have been adjusted to facilitate installation. The card and cable structures have been illustrated below:

33

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

1&2. RJ45 Jack

3. Black cable tie

4. 2 x 8 cable, multi core, φ 0.45mm

Figure - 23 The CON2 and CON3 cards have been attached to the component side of the relevant EX200B card. The two 20-pin connectors on the component-side of the CON2 and CON3 cards are attached to the corresponding connectors on the component side of the EX200B card.

Operational Information: There are two LEDs on the front part of the CON2 and CON3 cards. While the lower one continuously lights to display that the card is operational, the upper one goes off whenever a line on the card has been put in use; hence it signifies whether there is a busy line on the card. Dimensions of the CON2 / CON3 cards are 21 cm. x 5 cm., and they weigh 0.1 kg.

I.6.B. EX200 EXPANSION MODULES Definition: The EX200 module is one that consists of extension or line card (EX200B), appropriate connection card (CON2 or CON3) and cable (CBL-16 or CBL-8). The figure below illustrates the structure of the EX200B Expansion Module Card.

34

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

1. EX200B Card

4. Front Card Cover

2. CON2 / CON3 Card Connectors

5. Card Fixing Click

3. CON2 / CON3 Card Fixing Clicks

6. Card Removing Latch

7.Backplane Connector

Figure - 24

Technical Information: Each EX200B card includes some circuitry such as PCM frame signal buffers, microcontroller and ICC (Inner-rack Communication Controller). Each EX200B card also has high current protection circuits against currents on itself. For example: Since the analog extension module makes use of the –48 VDC, -5VDC and +5VDC feeds of the system, there are three different high current protection circuits on it. ICC is also an important piece of EX200B cards. Distributed CPU structure is maintained by the Inner-rack Communication Protocol (ICP), which is an ISDN-like protocol. ICC is the structure that actualizes communication between the main CPU of the system and the modules. There are 14 PCM for each rack (7 PCM for receiving, 7 PCM for transmitting - 32 frames for each PCM.) Hence, each general-purpose slot uses 16 PCM frame pairs of a PCM channel pair. These 16 PCM frame pairs have been connected to each slot on the backplane via special paths so that a static structure has been formed. Since there are 16 PCM frame pairs in each slot, each extension or line module can use at most 16 PCM frame pairs in a single slot. As explained in section “I.6.B”, every other module except the modules EX200 (1S2/0) and EX200 (1R2/0) make use of 16 PCM frame pairs; therefore, they can be installed in any vacant slot. (Note that an extension should be

35

DS200 Technical Reference Guide installed in the first slot, because the first number of the first expansion slot has been assigned to the operator, through which programming will be done.)

IN CASE IT IS NECESSARY, THE EX200 EXPANSION MODULES CAN BE REMOVED FROM THE SYSTEM THROUGH PROGRAMMING WHILE THE SYSTEM IS STILL RUNNING.

*

Dimensions of DS200 EX200B are 20 cm. x 22.5 cm., and it weighs 0.3 kg. Details about the entire EX200 Extension / Line Module types are as follows:

I.6.B.1. EX200 (0/16) ANALOG EXTENSION MODULE In addition to the common circuits mentioned above, there are 16 identical analog extension circuits (SLIC) on the EX200B (0/16) card. Each SLIC has a CODEC for analog to digital and digital to analog conversions and a transformer, as well as the standard circuitry such as -48 VDC feed, handset status detection and 2-4 / 4-2 wire conversion. Cadences of tones and ringers of telephones are controlled by the card’s own microcontroller. Connections to the EX200B (0/16) card are made over the CON2 line connection card.

I.6.B.2. EX200 (0/16R) ANALOG EXTENSION MODULE In addition to the common circuits explained above, there are 16 analog extension (subscriber) circuits (SLIC) that are identical on the EX200B (0/16R) card. Each SLIC includes a CODEC for analog to digital and digital to analog conversions and a transformer, as well as the standard circuits such as – 48 VDC feed, handset status detection, 2-4 / 4-2 wire conversion. Those extensions possess some extra features in addition to the standard extension features: •

12 or 16 KHz pulse price signal generation

•

Polarity reversal

•

Caller ID

•

Automatic test

The connections to the EX200B (0/16R) card are made over the CON5 line connection card.

I.6.B.3. EX200 (8/0) LINE MODULE In addition to the common circuits mentioned above, there are 8 identical line circuits on the EX200B (8/0) card. Each line has a CODEC that performs analog to digital and digital to analog conversions and a transformer, as well as the standard circuitry such as DC current driver, ringer detector, 2-4 / 4-2 wire conversion, pulse price signal filter and polarity reversal detection. Receiving and transmitting signal gain levels can be set by the CPU200 card, as well as by some gain control elements on the EX200B (8/0) card. Connections to the EX200B (8/0) card are made over the CON3 line connection card. 36

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

I.6.B.4. EX200 (8+8/0) EXTENDIBLE LINE MODULE In addition to the common circuits mentioned above, there are 8 line circuits on the EX200B (8+8/0) card that are exactly identical and special connectors to put an extra card with 8 line circuits on line. Capacity of the card can be increased up to 16 lines upon wish, by an auxiliary card that can be attached onto those connectors. Each four lines include one CODEC for analog to digital and digital to analog conversions and each line includes a transformer, as well as the DC current driver, ringer detector, 2-4 / 4-2 wire conversion, pulse price signal filter and polarity reversal detection circuits as standard. Thanks to the structure of the CODECs on the module, transmission and reception levels for the transmitted voice can be adjusted separately in 8 levels. The most important facility of this card is the possibility to increase the capacity or the functionality by adding the Caller ID detection function to the system. The card has two extra connectors to install one more card. One of the following cards can be installed on the base card: a) A card with 8 analog lines > Together with this card the total capacity of the card becomes 16 analog lines. b) FSK Caller ID Card > The 8 lines on the base card can detect FSK formatted Called ID information. c) DTMF Caller ID Card > The 8 lines on the base card can detect DTMF formatted Called ID information. The connections to the EX200B (8+8/0) card are made over the CON6 line connection card.

I.6.B.5. EX200 (0/8S0) ISDN BRI EXTENSION MODULE In addition to the common circuits mentioned above, there are 8 identical ISDN BRI extension circuits on the EX200B (0/8S0) card. Since ISDN is a digital protocol, there is no need for an extra circuit; except each extension has a standard ISDN BRI driver. Connections to the EX200B (0/8S0) card are made over the CON2 line connection card.

I.6.B.6. EX200 (1S2/0) ISDN PRI LINE MODULE The EX200 (1S2/0) module does not have a line connection card, however it has an MDF cable that has an RJ45-type male connector at the end. In addition to the common circuits mentioned above, there is only a single ISDN PRI line (30-channels) on the module. Connection to that line is carried out through RJ45 connector, which is at the end of the MDF cable. Since ISDN is a digital protocol, no extra circuit is needed; however, an ISDN PRI driver has been located on the EX200B (1S2/0) card. Since ISDN PRI has 30 channels, the 16 PCM frames in each slot do not suffice for the 30 channels of a line. Therefore, the EX200B (1S2/0) card should be installed in a slot with even number (the leftmost general-purpose slot has been numbered as 0) and the next slot with an odd number should remain as vacant. By this way, the EX200B (1S2/0) card can make use of 32 PCM frames in total, which belong to both of the slots. In addition to the RJ45 socket, there is a 9-pin, D-type connector on the EX200B (1S2/0) card, which is for the PRI ISDN line connection. 37

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

1.6.B.7. EX200 (1R2/0) R2 DIGITAL LINE MODULE The EX200 (1R2/0) module has no line connection card, however, it has a MDF cable with an RJ45-type male connector at the end. In addition to the circuits that are common with other expansion cards, there are components on the module that provides interface to 30 digital lines. Connection to the R2 line with 30 channels is carried out through RJ45 connector that is at the end of the MDF cable. The EX200 (1R2/0) module has an E1-based structure. It provides high speed and quality in network applications. Thanks to the DSP module located on it, it generates or detects the MFC signals, which are specific to the R2 protocol, simultaneously for 30 channels. Since the EX200 (1R2/0) module can be connected to 30 separate channels, the 16 PCM frames in each slot do not suffice. Therefore, the EX200B (1R2/0) card should be installed in a slot with even number (the leftmost general-purpose slot has been numbered as 0) and the next slot with an odd number should remain as vacant. By this way, the EX200B (1R2/0) card can make use of 32 PCM frames in total, which belong to both of the slots.

1.6.B.8. EX200 (1VF/0) 1VF DIGITAL LINE MODULE The EX200 (1VF/0) module does not have a line connection card, however, it has an MDF cable with an RJ45-type male connector at the end. In addition to the other expansion cards and common circuits, there are components on the module, which provides interface with 30 digital lines. The connection to the 30-channel 1VF line is realized directly by using the RJ45 connector at the end of the MDF cable. The structure of the EX200 (1VF/0) module is based on E1. Thanks to the DSP module on it, it generates or detects the 2600 Hz. signal that is specific to the 1VF protocol simultaneously for 30 channels. Since the EX200 (1VF/0) module can be connected to 30 separate channels, 16 PCM frames in each slot are not sufficient. Therefore, the EX200B (1VF/0) card should be placed into an even-numbered slot (the leftmost general-purpose slot has been numbered as 0,) and the next odd-numbered slot should be left vacant, so that the EX200B (1VF/0) card can make use of the 32 PCM frames in total, which belong to both slots. The EX200 (1VF/0) module supports Pulse Packet 1, Pulse Packet 2, Pulse Packet 3, MF Shuttle and Decadic signalling protocol, thanks to its flexible software structure. In order for the 1VF signalling to be supported, an interface module is used, as well. That module consists of a DS200 main rack that includes special software on the CPU200 card, as well as eight EX200 (4E&M/0) modules and one EX200 (1S2/0) module.

1.6.B.9. EX200 (7CAS2B-RX/0) CAS2B ANALOG LINE MODULE Besides the common circuits explained above, there are 7 identical CAS2B-RX circuits on the EX200B (7CAS2B-RX/0) card. On each CAS2B-RX circuit, there are 4 wires that carry analog signals and components that control connections. These 4 wires are named as wires “a”, “b”, “c” and “d”. A and B wires are used for signalling as well as the speech transmission, where as the C and D wires are used to contol the line from both sides. The cards that are to be used for local and long-distance calls have the same hardware, but different software.

38

DS200 Technical Reference Guide The connections to the EX200B (7CAS2B-RX/0) card are made over the CON2 line connection card.

1.6.B.10. EX200 (8CAS2B-TX/0) CAS2B ANALOG LINE MODULE Besides the common circuits explained above, there are 8 identical CAS2B-TX circuits on the EX200B (8CAS2B-TX/0) card. On each CAS2B-TX circuit, there are 4 wires that carry analog signals and components that control connections. These 4 wires are named as wires “a”, “b”, “c” and “d”. A and B wires are used for signalling as well as the speech transmission, where as the C and D wires are used to contol the line from both sides. The connections to the EX200B (8CAS2B-TX/0) card are made over the CON4 line connection card.

1.6.B.11. EX200 (SS7 C) SS7 CONTROL MODULE Thanks to the EX200 (SS7 C) SS7 Control card, the DS200 exchange can be connected to the SS7 lines directly. No connection is made on the SS7 Control card. However, the signalling action occurring on SS7 Channel cards are directly controlled by this card. The SS7 Control card makes connection of 8 signalling channel possible over the same exchange.

1.6.B.12. EX200 (SS7 L) SS7 LINK MODULE The EX200 (SS7 L) module does not have a line connection card, however, it has an MDF cable with an RJ45-type male connector at the end. In addition to the other expansion cards and common circuits, there are components on the module, which provides interface with 30 digital lines. The connection to the 30-channel SS7 line is realized directly by using the RJ45 connector at the end of the MDF cable. The structure of the EX200 (SS7 L) module is based on E1. Signalling of the EX200 (SS7 L) module is made by the SS7 Control card. In a system, more than one SS7 Channel card can be marked as signalling channel or just as speech channel. Since the EX200 (SS7 L) module can be connected to 30 separate channels, 16 PCM frames in each slot are not sufficient. Therefore, the EX200B (SS7 L) card should be placed into an even-numbered slot (the leftmost general-purpose slot has been numbered as 0,) and the next odd-numbered slot should be left vacant, so that the EX200B (MFS/0) card can make use of the 32 PCM frames in total, which belong to both slots.

I.6.B.13. EX200 (0/8U) DIGITAL EXTENSION MODULE In addition to the common circuits mentioned above, there are 8 identical special digital extension circuits on the EX200B (0/8U) card. Since the card has a digital protocol due to its structure, no extra circuit is needed; however, each extension has a special digital driver. Connections to the EX200B (0/8U) card are made over the CON3 line connection card.

1.6.B.14. EX200 (0/16U) DIGITAL EXTENSION MODULE 39

DS200 Technical Reference Guide In addition to the common circuits mentioned above, there are 16 identical special digital extension interface circuits on the EX200B (0/16U) card. Since the card has a digital protocol due to its structure, no extra circuit is needed; however, each extension has a special digital driver. Connections to the EX200B (0/16U) card are made over the CON2 line connection card.

I.6.B.15. EX200 (8 T0/S0) ISDN BRI LINE/ EXTENSION MODULE In addition to the common circuits mentioned above, there are 8 identical ISDN/BRI line / extension adjustable circuits on the EX200B (8 T0/S0) card. Since ISDN is a digital protocol, no extra circuit is needed; however, each line has a standard ISDN BRI driver. Besides, the adjustable lines have configuration blocks that contain jumpers to select between a line and an extension. Connections to the EX200B (8 T0/S0) card are made over the CON2 line connection card

1.6.B.16. EX200 (0/8LB) LOCAL-BATTERY EXTENSION MODULE In addition to the common circuits mentioned above, there are 8 identical LB line circuits on the EX200B (0/8LB) card. The EX200 (0/8LB) Module has been designed in order to provide the interface necessary for the connection of field telephones to the DS200 exchange. Thanks to that interface, eight local-battery telephones can be connected to the exchange. Each local-battery telephone can be directly forwarded to a specific telephone on the exchange side, as well as the entire eight telephones can be forwarded to a single telephone. The connection to the field telephones shall be two-wire. Since that type of telephones are not fed with DC voltage and since the EX200 (0/8LB) module provides the user with the possibility of changing incoming-outgoing voice gain, cables extending to long distances can be installed. The EX200 (0/8LB) module provides two methods for gain control. First of them is to determine a permanent gain level for a specific line at the beginning and to set it on the module. The second method, on the other hand, is to set the gain level temporarily by using hook flash and keypad during each conversation. This operation can be carried out by the extension with hook flash authorization on the exchange side only, for a local-battery telephone does not possess hook flash function. The EX200 (0/8LB) Module, like E&M module, can also be used for inter-exchange connections. There is a transformer on the EX200B (0/8LB) card in order to isolate the speech circuit, and a varistor against the case that a ring is received while the line is active. The ringer signal coming over from the power supply is directly transferred to the extension through relay protection. Connections to the EX200B (0/8LB) card are made over the CON3 line connection card.

I.6.B.17. EX200 (4 VoIP) VOICE OVER IP MODULE Besides the common circuits explained above, there are 4 VoIP channels on the EX200B (4VoIP) card. Thanks to the EX200 (4VoIP) card, the institutions possessing more than one DS200 exchanges can establish the infrastructure that will enable phone calls over IP lines by connecting their exchanges to each other over lines of IP network. 40

DS200 Technical Reference Guide In this type applications, usually “Frame Relay” or “Leased Line” type of lines are utilized for data transfer among remote offices. Making phone calls as well, over these very lines would provide advantage towards cutting communication expenses. The EX200 (4VoIP) card works as a gateway that establishes connection between the exchange and the IP network. Thanks to the EX200 (4VoIP) card, direct voice communication can be established without the need for interfaces like FXO, FXS for routers present in the IP networks. Since the VoIP applications are software-based ones, the basic functions are fulfilled by the DSP on the card. Connections to the EX200B (4VoIP) card are made over the RJ45 Ethernet connection on the front face of the card.

I.6.B.18. EX200 (4TWT) SPECIAL DUPLEX LINE MODULE In addition to the circuits explained above, there are 4 identical TWT line circuits on the EX200B (4TWT) card. Each line has 2-4 / 4-2 wire conversion circuits, a CODEC for digital-analog and analogdigital conversions and a transformer, as well as DC current detectors on signalling channels and relays. TWT is an aged, but widely used interface that is utilized in some networks for Interexchange Connection Line applications. Connections to the EX200B (4TWT) card are made over the CON3 line connection card.

I.6.B.19. EX200 (4E&M/0) E&M LINE MODULE In addition to the circuits mentioned above, there are 4 identical E&M line circuits on the EX200B (4E&M/0) card. Each line has 2-4 / 4-2 wire conversion circuits, a CODEC for analog to digital and digital to analog conversions on speech channels and a transformer, as well as standard DC current detectors for E wire on the signaling channels and relays for M wire. Since E&M is an aged but widespread interface for inter-exchange connection line applications and since several different configurations are applied on the field, the EX200B (4E&M/0) card has been designed in a flexible structure so as to fulfill all configuration needs. Each line has configuration blocks that contain jumpers for setting different configurations. Connections to the EX200B (4E&M/0) card are made over the CON2 line connection card. The EX200 (4E&M/0) module is capable of fulfilling the entire configurations below: * According to the signaling channel hardware configuration: •

Type 1

41

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

Figure - 25.a •

Type 2

Figure - 25.b •

Type 3

Figure - 25.c

•

Type 4

42

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

Figure - 25.d •

Type 5

Figure - 25.e * According to the position (See the illustrations above for each type.): •

Upper PABX

•

Lower PABX

* According to the signaling: •

Immediate Start

Outgoing Call Signaling Scenario

43

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

Incoming Call Signaling Scenario Figure - 26.a •

Wink Start

Outgoing Call Signaling Scenario

Inco ming Call Signaling Scenario Figure - 26.b

44

DS200 Technical Reference Guide •

Delayed Start

Outgoing Call Signaling Scenario

Incoming Call Signaling Scenario Figure - 26.c * According to dialing: •

DTMF

•

DP

* According to number of wires used for the speech channel: •

2 wires

•

4 wires

Each E&M line can be connected with 4, 6 or 8 wires according to the selected configuration. Therefore, cabling that was done over the CON2 card is arranged in order to fulfill need for any configuration.

I.6.B.20. EX200 (8E&M/0) E&M LINE MODULE In addition to the circuits explained above, there are 8 identical E&M line circuits on the EX200B (8E&M/0) card. Each line has 2-4 / 4-2 wire conversion circuits, a CODEC for digital-analog and analogdigital conversions and a transformer, as well as standard DC current detectors for the E wire and relays for the M wire on signalling channels. Since E&M is an aged, but widely used interface that is utilized for Inter-exchange Connection Line applications and since it is employed in the field in several different configurations, the EX200B (8E&M/0) card has been designed in a flexible structure in order to meet the most widespread configuration needs. Each line has a configuration block that includes jumpers in order to be adjusted to different configurations. Connections to the EX200B (8E&M/0) card are made over the CON2 line connection card.

45

DS200 Technical Reference Guide It supports R1 signalling feature, ANI detection and transmission features and CAS1B signalling protocol. The EX200 (8E&M/0) module supports the Type-1 and Type-5 connection types that have been specified for the EX200 (4E&M/0) module and it provides two-wire speech channel possibility.

I.6.B.21. EX200 (ALARM) ALARM MODULE DS200 Alarm card is a card with 4 channel outputs and 28 channel inputs which is using the serial communication slots of the system instead of the PCM channels. Therefore, this card can be inserted into any empty general-purpose slots on the system (including the empty slots after PRI, SS7 L or R2 cards). The card has 8 RJ45 connectors directly on board. The first one is used to output some alarm signals to a specific alarm panel. The rest is used to input different alarm signals from 28 different sources. The four alarm outputs are used for: 1) SS7 link blocked or missed. 2) A card is powered down. 3) There is an error on the extension tests (for rural slic cards only) 4) An alarm is received from alarm inputs. The outlook of the alarm panel, which is used to visualize these alarm signals, is as follows:

Figure - 27 The alarm panel required a feed of 12 VDC. In order to provide the 12 VDC feed, a power module is available to convert the 48 VDC output (battery connectors) of the system to 12 VDC.

I.7. AUTO ATTENDANT AND VOICE MAIL MODULE – EVM200L Definition: EVM200L is an integrated Auto Attendant and Voice Mail module for DS200. Since it has been designed as an interface module, it can be installed in any general-purpose slot of the system. At most 8 EVM200L modules can be employed in a DS200 system. EVM200L has three main functions:

46

DS200 Technical Reference Guide 1) Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (Message announcement in two languages is possible.), 2) System Messages (Message announcement in two languages is optionally possible.), 3) Voice Mail Service

Technical Information: The Auto Attendant provides for more effective operation of the operator especially during heavy traffic, by guiding external calling parties through pre-recorded messages. The system messages, on the other hand, inform extensions through pre-recorded messages about statuses of their telephones. By this way, extensions could always know about features that are already active at their telephones. Thanks to the voice mail service, extensions can exploit private message boxes to receive or leave messages to each other. In order to actualize all those functions, EVM200L has been equipped with memory elements in different types. FLASH ROM memories are employed as non-volatile memory elements for ACD and system messages; hence, those messages are not cleared even when the system power is cut off. On-board memory capacity is 4 minutes for ACD messages and 2 minutes for system messages. There are two expansion slots for optional EVM-FL cards in every EVM200L module. An EVM-FL card, which has been installed in one of these slots, can be employed upon wish as a two-minute FLASH ROM memory for ACD messages, or it can increase the system message memory by 2 minutes upon wish in order to enable the use of a second language for system messages. However, the second EVM-FL card can be employed for increasing ACD message capacity only. DRAM memories are used as volatile memory elements for the voice mail service. Messages of that type are not saved in case of power failure. On-board capacity for voice mail is 34 minutes. Every EVM200L module has four expansion slots for the optional EVM-DL cards. A 34-minute DRAM memory field is present on each EVM-DL card, in order to be used for voice mail. Each EVM200L has 8 voice channels in total, 4 for message recording and 4 for listening to recorded messages. The 4 recording channels are used for recording ACD or system messages, or they are used while recording messages left by extensions to each other. The 4 announcement channels, on the other hand, are used during announcement of ACD or system messages to users, or they are used by extensions to listen to messages left for them. While increasing number of the EVM200L modules in a system increases number of channels, as well as the voice mail capacity, system and ACD message capacities remain unchanged. The reason for that is the idea of servicing more external calls simultaneously. In order to achieve this, ACD and the system messages in each module must be the same. By this way, every incoming call can be serviced through the same messages. Therefore, for the case that the expansion slots of the entire 8 EVM200L modules are completely occupied, the resulting capacities are as follows: 1) Number of channels employed for message recording is 32, 2) Number of channels employed for listening to messages is 32, 3) Capacity for the ACD messages is 8 minutes (for the case when system messages are announced in a single language),

47

DS200 Technical Reference Guide 4) Capacity for the system messages is 2 minutes (for the case when system messages are announced in a single language), 5) Capacity for the voice mails is 1360 minutes.

Operational Information: There are two LEDs on the front panel of the EVM200L module. While the lower one continuously blinks to display that the card is operational, the other one goes off whenever any voice channel is being used, so that it displays busyness status of the card. External callers can make use of the opportunities offered by EVM200L only if they possess DTMF telephone sets, because the ACD application would require the caller party to use some of the keys. Results of that dialing action would reach the exchange as significant signals only if the dialing method is DTMF. Dimensions of EVM200L are 20 cm. x 22.5. cm. and it weighs 0.3 kg. Dimensions of EVM-FL and EVM-DL are 6.5 cm. x 3.5 cm.

I.8.

INTER-CABINET CONNECTION UNITS

In case the DS200 capacity requires a configuration with four or more racks, such a structure is accomplished by some intelligent units of the racks located in both cabinets, which connect the two cabinets to each other. In order for the inter-cabinet connections to be made, revision of the CPU200 card must be R01C.01 or higher and revision of the BPL200-MAIN backplane must be R03B.02 or higher. Information about the cards used for that purpose is as follows:

I.8.A. CCU CARD The CCU card is a card that is employed in the second three-rack cabinet and which receives signals from the CPU200 card, which is included in the first three-rack block, and distributes these signals to the second block after amplifying them. Due to its structure, it is attached to the special slot reserved for CPU200 in the main rack of the second block and it transmits the signals to the second block over the 64-pin female connector at its back. The LED on the front face of the CCU card blinks during normal operation.

I.8.B. CLOCK MASTER & CLOCK SLAVE CARDS Clock Master is installed in the block in which the CPU200 card is located and Clock Slave is installed in the block in which the CCU card has been installed. Since there is no connector at the back of these cards that will provide connection to the backplane, they can be installed in any vacant slot in the system, which is easily reachable in order to facilitate mounting. These two cards function as a bridge carrying the PCM channels between the cabinets. The necessary connections between the cards are made through special cables provided by Karel. Five identical eight-wire cables with RJ45 connectors at both ends are used for those connections. As can be deduced from that fact, number of signals carried between the two cards is (8 x 5) 40. Indeed, number of signals that will actively be used is 20, however, a ground line is carried with each signal in order to increase the reliability of the carried signals. That prevents the signals to be affected by external factors.

48

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

II. SOFTWARE The DS200 system is a Stored Program Controlled one (SPC). In the system, there is a microprocessor that controls the operation and there are FLASH ROM memory modules that store the system software. The entire start-up system and line parameters are stored in the FLASH ROM. VRTX, the operating system, is a real-time one. The software of the DS200 system has been designed so as to meet customer demands in a wide range. There are three categories as the system software features are concerned: 1- User features, 2- Operator features, 3- Programs. The user features are software facilities which any user can take advantage of through any type of phone. The operator features, on the other hand, are software facilities that can be used by the system operator only. The operator, whose start-up access code is assigned as “1110” is the first extension of the system. Programs are the codes, which can be entered by the system supervisor only after the system has been set to the programming mode. By default, the operator has been assigned as the system supervisor. Several parameters that control the operation of the system can be changed by programming. ADMIN200 program, which is presented with the DS200 system as a standard, provides control of the system through a PC by controlling the entire system parameters, as well as making changes on them. In addition to that, the ADMIN200 program has superior features that also provides for entering parameters that could not otherwise be entered through telephones. Detailed information can be found in the guide of the ADMIN200 program. Possibilities presented by the software have been explained in detail in the relevant guides.

49

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

III. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 1. 2.

Capacity Control – CPU200

3.

Control – EX200

4. 5.

Switching Power

6.

Dialing Method

7. 8. 9. 10.

Dialing Conversions Speech Channels MF Receiver Capacity CRL (Call Record Listing) CRL Capacity EVM200L

11. 12.

: 1344 lines in total SPC 80C386 Processor Flash ROM (2 Mbytes), DRAM (2 Mbytes) 80C51 – 8 bit micro controller family 80C188 – 16 bit micro controller family TDM / PCM (A-law) 230 VAC / 50 Hz. Power consumption: 20 – 140 W (for each rack) Max. 400W (for completely full cabinet) 48 VDC Battery Back-up Dial Pulse (DP) 10 PPS Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) 140 msec. DP - DTMF - E&M - DSS1- MFR2 224 for each rack, 256 inter-rack 19 (for each rack) PC Interface (LAN or a single PC) Serial Printer Interface Approximately 2000 Calls Min. ACD message capacity: 260 sec. Max. ACD message capacity: 520 sec. System message capacity: 130 sec. Min. Voice mail message capacity: 34 min. Max. voice mail message capacity: 1360 min. Min. number of channels: 4 recording/ 4 listening Max. number of channels: 32 recording / 32 listening

50

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

CHARACTERISTICS 1. 2.

Analog Extension Interface Station Loop Resistance Extension Feed Voltages

3. 4. 5.

Max. Line Loop Resistance PRI ISDN / R2 Line Resistance Loop Start Line Interface

6. 7. 8. 9.

BRI ISDN Interface PRI ISDN Interface R2 Digital Interface E&M Line Interface

10. 11.

Busy Hour Traffic Number Of Telephones That Can Ring Simultaneously DP Dialing Make-Break Ratio Wait Time between Two Consecutive Dials for Auto-dialer

12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

Cross-Talk Attenuation Maximum Number of Telephone Sets per Extension Ringer Voltage Minimum Detectable Ringer Level Environmental Conditions Hook Flash Duration Dimensions

21.

Weight

22.

Maintenance

Max 3000 Ohm -48 VDC for analog extensions -40VDC for ISDN/digital extensions 2.2 Kohm 120 Ohm DP and DTMF Signaling 12/16 KHz Pulse Price Signal Detection * Polarity Reversal Detection Euro-ISDN BRI compatible Euro-ISDN PRI compatible DC Loop or Pulse type signaling It supports type 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. * Signaling *: - Immediate Start - Wink Start - Delayed Start Number dialing method: DP or DTMF * Speech channel: 2 wires or 4 wires * ANI support with R1 signaling 10000 calls / hour 40 analog telephones / rack 33 msec. make / 67 msec. break * 720 ± 20 msec. for DP. * 175 ± 5 msec. for DTMF. * Better than 70 dB 2 Telephone sets 67 Vrms, 25-30 Hz 35 Vrms, 25-30 Hz 0 C0 / +45 C0 temperature, 20% - 80% humidity 100-600 msec. * 70 cm. x 32 cm. x 28 cm. (for one rack) 78 cm. x 155 cm. x 60 cm. (for cabinet) 20 – 31 Kg (per rack) 115 – 175 Kg (per cabinet) Embedded Self Test / Solution Local / Remote Programming Programming over PC through the ADMIN200 program

* These parameters can be changed through programming.

51

DS200 Technical Reference Guide

CONNECTIONS 1.

Connectors

2.

External Connections

Line and extensions: RJ Type External relay and external music: 623K4 Type External unit interfaces: Pin type (2-pin, Tunik) RS232 interface: D-Type (9-pin) Standard Telephones: 2-wire KAREL Feature Telephone Sets (LT200 (-H), FT200): 4-wire KAREL DSS Modules (DSS200E, DSS200F): 2-wire Karel Handsfree Digital Telephone (ST200): 2-wire KAREL Local Pager (PG100): 2-wire ISDN devices (Iris): 4-wire PC / Serial printer: 3-wire Alarm : 2-wire

TONE CADENCE & FREQUENCIES (The factory default values)* 1. 2.

6. 7.

Dial Tone (500 Hz.) Dial Tone, Follow Me or Auto dialer Active (350 Hz+440 Hz.) Special dial tone (250 Hz.) Ring back Tone (500 Hz.) Ring back Tone, Follow Me or Auto Dialer Active (350 Hz+ 440 Hz.) Busy Tone (500 Hz.) DISA Dial Tone (500 Hz.)

7.

Error Tone (500 Hz.)

8. 9.

Overflow Tone (2000 Hz.) Warning Tone (250 Hz)

3. 4. 5.

Continuous Continuous Continuous 1500 msec. on, 3000 msec. off 1500 msec. on, 3000 msec. off 500 msec. on, 500 msec. off 300 msec. on, 300 msec. off, 300 msec. on, 300 msec. off, 300 msec. on, 2000 msec. off 300 msec. on, 300 msec. off, 300 msec. on, 300 msec. off, 300 msec. on, 300 msec. off, 600 msec. on, 600 msec. off 700 msec. on, 200 msec. off 20 msec. on, 1500 msec. off

RING CADENCES (The factory default values)* 1. 2.

External Call Internal Call

3. 4. 5.

Reminder or Wake-up Call Call Returning From Park Call Coming From An Extension With Higher Authorization

1500 msec. on, 3000 msec. off 600 msec. on, 300 msec. off, 600 msec. on, 3000 msec. off 3000 msec. on, 1500 msec. off 1500 msec. on, 1500 msec. off 600 msec. on, 300 msec. off, 600 msec. on, 300 msec. off, 600 msec. on, 3000 msec. off

* Tone and Ring Cadences can be changed through programming.

DTMF TONES: High Frequency Group (- 7 dBm) 1209 Hz 1336 Hz 1477 Hz Low 697 Hz 1 2 3 Frequency 770 Hz 4 5 6 Group 852 Hz 7 8 9 (- 9 dBm) 941 Hz * 0 # Nominal Frequencies of DS200 may deviate from the values above in the range ± 2.5 %. 52

INSTALLATION GUIDE

The products may have some differences from the functionality written in this guide according to the hardware revision or software version.

TABLE OF CONTENTS I. SETTING UP THE SYSTEM ........................................................................................... 1 I.1.THE WALL TYPE DS200 SYSTEM INSTALLATION.............................................................. 1

I.1.A. PREPARATION............................................................................................................................... 1 I.1.B. APPLICATION ................................................................................................................................ 1 I.1.C. GROUNDING .................................................................................................................................. 5 I.1.D. BATTERY CONNECTION ............................................................................................................... 6

I.2.THE CABINET-TYPE DS200 SYSTEM INSTALLATION........................................................ 6

I.2.A. PREPARATION............................................................................................................................... 6 I.2.B. APPLICATION ................................................................................................................................ 7 I.2.C. INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS WITH FOUR OR MORE RACKS ..................................................... 9 I.2.C.1. CONNECTIONS IN THE MAIN RACK, TO WHICH THE CPU200 CARD HAS BEEN ATTACHED: ......... 10 I.2.C.1.1. INTEGRATION OF THE CLOCK MASTER CARD TO THE MAIN RACK:.............................................................. 10 I.2.C.1.2. CONNECTING THE BPLSPS-FCX CABLE: ........................................................................................................ 11

I.2.C.2. CONNECTIONS ON THE FOURTH RACK:............................................................................................. 12 I.2.C.2.1. INTEGRATION OF THE CLOCK SLAVE CARD TO THE MAIN RACK .................................................................. 12 I.2.C.2.2. ATTACHING THE CC ENABLE CARD TO THE MAIN RACK: .............................................................................. 12 I.2.C.2.3. CONNECTING THE BPLSPS-FCX CABLE: ........................................................................................................ 12

I.2.D. GROUNDING................................................................................................................................ 12 I.2.E. BATTERY CONNECTION.............................................................................................................. 14

I.3.

INSTALLING POWER SUPPLIES IN THE SYSTEM ...................................................... 16

I.4.

INTEGRATING MODULES TO THE SYSTEM ................................................................ 16

I.3.A. SPS200 AC/DC POWER SUPPLY................................................................................................. 16 I.3.B. SPS248 DC/DC POWER SUPPLY ................................................................................................ 16 I.4.A.CPU200, REDUNDANT CPU200 & DS200 CPUKON CARDS ...................................................... 16 I.4.A.1. THE LAN ADAPTOR CARD: ................................................................................................................... 17

I.4.B. THE UTIL200 UTILITY MODULE.................................................................................................. 18 I.4.B.1. INSTALLING THE CONFERENCE CHIP ON UTIL200 ........................................................................... 18

I.4.C. CON2/CON3 LINE CONNECTION CARDS .................................................................................. 19 I.4.D. INSTALLING EXPANSION MODULES......................................................................................... 21 I.4.D.1. ATTACHING EX200 MODULES:............................................................................................................. 21 I.4.D.2. CABLING OF EX200 MODULES:............................................................................................................ 22 I.4.D.2.1. EX200 (0/16) ANALOG EXTENSION MODULE: .................................................................................................. 22 1.4.D.2.2. EX200 (0/16R) ANALOG EXTENSION MODULE:............................................................................................... 23 I.4.D.2.3. EX200 (8/0) ANALOG LINE MODULE:................................................................................................................ 24 I.4.D.2.4. EX200 (8+8/0) ANALOG LINE MODULE:............................................................................................................ 24 I.4.D.2.5. EX200 (0/8S0) ISDN BRI EXTENSION MODULE:............................................................................................... 24 I.4.D.2.6. EX200 (1S2/0) ISDN PRI MODULE: ................................................................................................................... 25 I.4.D.2.7. EX200 (1R2/0) R2 DIGITAL LINE MODULE:....................................................................................................... 26 I.4.D.2.8. EX200 (1VF/0) MODULE:.................................................................................................................................... 26 I.4.D.2.9. EX200 (7CAS2B-RX/0) CAS2B MODULE: .......................................................................................................... 27 I.4.D.2.10. EX200 (8CAS2B-TRX/0) CAS2B MODULE: ...................................................................................................... 27 I.4.D.2.11. EX200 (SS7 L) SS7 LINK MODULE: ................................................................................................................. 28 I.4.D.2.12. EX200 (0/8U) DIGITAL EXTENSION MODULE: ................................................................................................ 28 I.4.D.2.13. EX200 (0/16U) DIGITAL EXTENSION MODULE: .............................................................................................. 29 I.4.D.2.14. EX200 (8 T0/S0) ISDN BRI LINE/EXTENSION MODULE:................................................................................. 29 I.4.D.2.15. EX200 (0/8LB) LOCAL BATTERY EXTENSION MODULE: ................................................................................ 30 I.4.D.2.16. EX200 (4VOIP) VOICE OVER IP MODULE: ........................................................................................................ 30 I.4.D.2.17. EX200 (4TWT) SPECIAL BI-DIRECTIONAL LINE MODULE: ............................................................................ 31 I.4.D.2.18. EX200 (4E&M/0) E&M LINE MODULE:............................................................................................................ 31 I.4.D.2.19. EX200 (8E&M/0) E&M LINE MODULE:............................................................................................................ 32 I.4.D.2.20. EX200 (SS7 CONTROL) SS7 CONTROL CARD: ................................................................................................ 33 I.4.D.2.21. EX200 (ALARM) ALARM CARD: ....................................................................................................................... 33

I.4.E. JUMPER SETTINGS ON THE EX200 (8T0/S0) MODULE............................................................. 35 I.4.F. JUMPER SETTINGS ON THE EX200 (4E&M/0) MODULE........................................................... 36 I.4.G. JUMPER ADJUSTMENTS ON THE EX200 (8E&M/0) MODULE.................................................. 38 I.4.H. INSTALLATION OF THE EVM200L MODULE.............................................................................. 39

I.5. THE FINAL PREPARATIONS............................................................................................ 39

II. PUTTING THE SYSTEM ON LINE .............................................................................. 41 II.1. SINGLE-RACK, WALL-TYPE SYSTEM ............................................................................ 41 II.2. TWO-RACK WALL-TYPE SYSTEM .................................................................................. 41 II.3. CABINET-TYPE SYSTEM ................................................................................................ 41 II.4. TWO-CABINET SYSTEM ................................................................................................. 42

III. TESTING THE SYSTEM AND TROUBLESHOOTING BASIC PROBLEMS .................. 44

DS200 Installation Guide

I. SETTING UP THE SYSTEM The DS200 system can be set up in two different structures, namely as wall type and cabinet type.

I.1.THE WALL TYPE DS200 SYSTEM INSTALLATION If the DS200 system consists of one or two racks at most, then it can be mounted as wall type. As for the systems with three or more racks, they definitely have to be mounted as cabinet type.

I.1.A. PREPARATION The following requirements should be fulfilled prior to the installation of the exchange: 1- The wall on which the DS200 exchange will be mounted should be firm enough to carry the weight and it should have a smooth surface. 2- The exchange should be installed in places that are not exposed to direct sunlight, that are not humid, but that are ventilated, well lit, with an environmental temperature of 045oC. It should not be exposed to effects of dust, vibration, oil and water. 3- Devices that generate high frequency waves (such as welding machines, office equipment such as computers and telex machines, air conditioners, TV sets) should not be in the same room if possible, and they should be at least 3 meters away from the exchange, otherwise. 4- The mains supply should be reserved for the exchange only. The power supply of the system should be uninterrupted and, if possible, the system should be powered from an independent and well-grounded source from which no other device is powered.

*

POWER SUPPLY THAT IS INTERRUPTED FREQUENTLY MAY AFFECT NORMAL OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM!

5- The spot where the exchange is to be mounted should be at a distance to the main distribution frame (MDF), so that the MDF can be reached through three-meter line connection cables. While the distance is being determined, the flexibility of the cables and the way they will be fixed to the wall should also be considered. 6- A location that can be reached easily should be chosen, considering the installation work and later maintenance work. 7- Place requirement for the batteries should be considered, as well.

*

THE AIR VENTS AT THE TOP AND BOTTOM OF THE EXCHANGE MUST NOT BE BLOCKED BY ANY MEANS. PREVENTING VENTILATION MAY DAMAGE THE EXCHANGE!

I.1.B. APPLICATION 1- Plot a location that complies with the requirements indicated in the Preparation step above.

1

DS200 Installation Guide 2- By making use of the installation template that comes with the racks, mark the locations for the wall mount bars carefully that are to be used for hanging the racks on the wall. The lower hole of the wall mount bars should be approximately 130 cm. above the floor. It is essential to check whether the height of both holes are the same, in order to make sure the exchange is parallel to the floor. 3- If there are two DS200 racks to be installed, then the lower hole of the wall mount bars, for the first rack to be installed (That will be the lower rack.), should be 100 cm. above the floor. 4- Drill the lower wall mount bar hole of the second rack 140 cm. above the floor, vertically on the same line with the first one. When the installation is over, there will be a 10-cm gap between the two racks.

Figure – 1 5- Drive the anchor plugs into the holes, whose locations have already been checked, and then screw the wall mount bars. Note that the right and the left side of the wall mount bars differ. The screws must be fixed enough to burry their heads completely into the wall. 6- After removing the front cover of the exchange by unscrewing the Allen screws, remove the bottom cover by sliding it to the front. 7- While removing the bottom cover, watch out for the grounding cables that are between the cover and the main frame, so that they will not break off. Remove the cables from the covers together with their tags and keep them safe from any damage during the installation.

2

DS200 Installation Guide 8- Slide the SPS200 to the front and remove it, after loosening its screws. (This is just for facilitating the installation and not obligatory.) 9- Hold the exchange so that the wall mount bar holes at the back of the exchange correspond to the wall mount bar holders, then push the exchange towards the wall, so that the holders would carry it. Make sure the holders of both wall mount bars have been inserted into the holes, and then lower the exchange cautiously. The exchange is fixed 5 mm. below. If it is still not fixed, even though it has been lowered for about one centimeter, that indicates the holders do not carry it. In that case, try to hang the exchange once again. In order to make sure that the exchange has been fixed, gently shake it to check whether the wall mount bars really carry it. 10- In case it is necessary to displace the exchange, just lift it upwards cautiously and pull it out.

*

IT IS ESSENTIAL TO MOUNT AND DISMOUNT THE WALL MOUNT BARS SIMULTANEOUSLY; OR THEY MAY GET DISTORTED.

11- If the second rack will be installed, then remove the top cover of the lower rack and the bottom cover of the upper rack, in order to attach the cables that will connect the racks to each other (Caution is needed for the grounding cables, as explained in the seventh step.) The BPL200 main boards are connected to each other by the BPL200-FC and BPLSPS-FC connection cables that come with the shipped hardware of the auxiliary rack. There are three such cables. Two BPL200-FC's (34-pin flat cable) are used for connecting the BPL200 backplanes and the single BPLSPS-FC (5-wire cable) is used for combining BPL200-SPS backplanes.

3

DS200 Installation Guide

1. BPL200-FC connections

2. BPLSPS-FC connection

a) BPL200-AUX

d) BPL200-SPS

b) BPL200-FC

e) BPLSPS-FC

c) BPL200-MAIN

f) BPL200-SPS

Figure – 2 12- Replace the covers by coinciding the cables with the corresponding cable slots that are at the back of the covers. 13- If SPS200 has been removed in order to facilitate the installation, then replace it as will be explained in detail later. 14- Connect the 230 VAC cable to the corresponding input on SPS200. Before plugging the other end of the cable in, check the position of the on/off switches and whether the fuses are defective. The mains on/off switch must be off. Keep in mind that the battery on/off switch must be set to “on” after the mains supply is on and it must be set to “off” before the power is shut off. (Putting the System on Line is described in Section II.) Two 2A T-type fuses that are necessary for 230 VAC are in the drawer-type compartment next to the 230 VAC input.

4

DS200 Installation Guide

I.1.C. GROUNDING Grounding is required for protecting the DS200 exchange from lightning and other sources of high voltage that may affect through lines or peripheral devices. The 230 VAC power cable of the exchange has grounding feature, so there is no need for an extra grounding if the electrical installation of the building has sound grounding. Although special tools are required for measuring the sufficiency of grounding of the electric installation of the building precisely, voltages between Neuter-Phase and Neuter-Ground can be measured for getting a rough idea. The Neuter-Phase voltage should be 180-260 VAC and the Neuter-Ground voltage should be 1-2 VAC. Those values must be consistent. Possible voltage leakage in grounding installation may damage your exchange, just like all other devices that require grounding.

*

ADDITIONAL GROUNDING MUST BE PROVIDED, IF SOUNDNESS OF THE GROUNDING OF THE ELECTRIC SYSTEM CANNOT BE GUARANTEED.

Water installation of the building can be used for grounding, provided that the pipes are of metal and no insulation material has been used at junctions. Indeed, the most secure grounding method is inserting a copper rod that is 1.5 cm in diameter with 1.5 m of length, or inserting a copper plate with 1 m2 of area to the ground and connecting it to the exchange through a copper grounding cable. The cable should be fastened tightly to the rod or to the plate and precautions should be taken against corrosion. The cable coming from the grounding plate or grounding installation must be connected to the ground connection point of the exchange. If the second rack is to be installed as well, then the ground connection points of the two racks must be connected to each other tightly with the ground connection cable that comes with the auxiliary rack.

*

THE GROUND CONNECTIONS OF THE LOWER AND UPPER COVERS OF THE EXCHANGE MUST DEFINITELY BE DONE AGAIN WHEN THE COVERS ARE REMOVED AND THEN REPLACED.

5

DS200 Installation Guide

A- DS200 Main Rack

B- DS200 Auxiliary Rack

C- The grounding cable

D- The copper grounding plate or rod Figure – 3

I.1.D. BATTERY CONNECTION Since power failure will impede your exchange to fulfill its normal functions, a battery must be connected to it, if there is such a possibility. Battery connection is made after SPS200 has been fixed. The battery switch must be “0” during the connection. There are two clips on SPS200 for the battery connection. (See The Technical Reference GuideFigure – 13). It is strictly recommended that a 48V 24Ah dry battery group (12V, 24Ah X 4) should be connected to those clips. The red end must be connected to the “+” pole of the battery group, and the black end to the “-“ pole. In order to make the connection, press the springed latch of the clips, insert the corresponding end of the battery cable into the hole in front, deep enough so that no naked portion of the cable is left outside, and then release the latch. Battery connection is provided only for the SPS200 of the main rack, in two-rack systems. There is no battery connection for the second SPS200.

*

REVERSE BATTERY CONNECTION MAY DAMAGE YOUR EXCHANGE!

I.2.THE CABINET-TYPE DS200 SYSTEM INSTALLATION I.2.A. PREPARATION The following requirements should be fulfilled prior to the installation of the exchange: 1- The DS200 exchange cabinet should be installed in places that are not exposed to direct sunlight, that are not humid, but that are ventilated, well lit, with an environmental temperature of 0-45oC. 2- It should not be exposed to the effects of dust, vibration, oil and water. 3- Devices that generate high frequency waves (such as welding machines, office equipment such as computers and telex machines, air conditioners, TV sets) should not be in the 6

DS200 Installation Guide same room if possible, and they should be at least 3 meters away from the exchange, otherwise. 4- The mains supply should be reserved for the exchange only. The power supply of the system should be uninterrupted and, if possible, the system should be powered from a well-grounded source from which no other device is powered.

*

FREQUENT POWER FAILURES MAY AFFECT NORMAL OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM!

5- The spot where the exchange is to be mounted should be chosen considering its position relative to the main distribution frame (MDF) and length of the cables. The installation work and later maintenance work should also be considered, so that the covers can be removed and replaced easily. 6- Since the installation connections will be made at the back of the cabinet, the position of the cabinet should be arranged accordingly. The lighting at the back has been placed for facilitating the work.

I.2.B. APPLICATION 1- Take the cabinet to a location as defined in the preparation step. 2- Lock the wheels by pressing the latches so that the exchange will not move. 3- Remove the front cover and the rack stopper screws that prevent the racks to slide.

Figure – 4 4- Remove the back and side covers, after unlocking them, by lifting them for approximately 10 cm in a manner so that their paint is not scratched. 5- While removing the covers, watch out for the grounding cables that are between the main frame and the covers so that they do not break off. Detach the cables, together with their tags, from the covers and keep them so as to make sure they would not get damaged during the placement of the exchange into the cabinet. 6- Push the main rack and auxiliary racks one by one until the holes of the removed stopping screws appear. Then replace the stopping screws so that the racks would not slide along the slots.

7

DS200 Installation Guide

Figure – 5 7- Open the cable panels from rear in order to facilitate the access. 8- In order to connect the main rack and the auxiliary racks, as well as to make inter-rack ground connection: First, use the BPL200-FC and BPLSPS-FC connection cables that come with the auxiliary rack. There are three such cables. Two BPL200-FC's (34-pin flat cable) are used for connecting the BPL200 backplanes and BPLSPS-FC (5-wire cable) is used for connecting BPL200-SPS backplanes. In order to connect the backplanes: a) Primarily, attach one end of each BPL200-FC to the BPL200-MAIN backplane of the main rack that has been placed to the bottom. b) Extend the free ends of the BPL200-FC cables to the second rack through the cable holes corresponding to the upper panel at the back of the first rack and the lower panel at the back of the second rack. Attach the ends of those two cables to the BPL200-AUX backplane connector. The cables should be parallel to each other. Repeat the same procedure to connect the second rack to the third, later. See Figure – 2.

8

DS200 Installation Guide 9) Each rack comes as the power card-backplane connection has been made as factory default. There are special cables that are used for this purpose. In case it is necessary, those cables can be detached and the two cards can be separated or they can be combined again, with those cables. 10) Then, you are supposed to make the power connection among the racks. In order to connect the BPL200-SPS backplanes: a) For the connection of the BPL200-SPS backplanes of the first and second racks, first attach the BPLSPS-FC (5-wire cable) to the inter-rack SPS connector that is on the BPL200-SPS backplane of the first rack. b) Then, extend the free end of the cable through the holes of the metal plates that are at the back of the first and the second racks and then attach it to the inter-rack SPS connector that is on the BPL200-SPS backplane of the second rack. Repeat the same procedure for the connection between the second and the third racks. See Figure – 2. 11) Attach the 230 VAC cable to the connector on the SPS200. First, make sure that the on/off switches are off and the fuses are free from any defect. Then, attach the other end of the cable to one of the plugs next to the mains switch that is at the lower front section of the cabinet, by extending it through the back of the cabinet. Two 2A T-type fuses that are necessary for 230 VAC are in the drawer-type compartment next to the 230 VAC input.

*

VENTS OVER THE CABINET FANS MUST NOT BE COVERED BY ANY MEANS DURING OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM. CERTAINLY CHECK WHETHER THE FANS WORK PROPERLY, AT THE TEMPERATURES OVER 20°C. CAUTION! The rules that must be obeyed strictly while powering the system on and off are stated as a special chapter at the end of this guide. When the system consists of three or more racks, if it is powered on and off by the battery switches, then those switches are damaged in time, due to the electric arcs. In order to prevent this situation, a delayed main battery breaker (10 Ampere 250 V Main breaker) is included in the system. Control of the electricity provided to the racks from the battery is maintained by this breaker. Detailed information about this is in Chapter II of this guide.

I.2.C. INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS WITH FOUR OR MORE RACKS Installation of the DS200 system in configurations with four, five or six racks is indeed a step that follows the cabinet-type installation of the system. Except the case of the four-rack cabinet that has been designed for the four-rack systems, since installation cannot be realized with one cabinet for the systems with more than three racks, first installation of two cabinets are realized so as to distribute the necessary quantity of racks to those two cabinets. The crucial point while installing the two cabinets is that they should be located side by side and they should not be displaced during and after the installation.

*

THE CABLES PROVIDING THE CONNECTION BETWEEN THE CABINETS MAY BE DAMAGED IN CASE OF A DISPLACEMENT.

9

DS200 Installation Guide The four-rack cabinet is used, if a system has four racks. In this case, since the entire racks will fit into that cabinet, single-cabinet installation will suffice. The rack that will fit into the uppermost rack slot of the cabinet will be of the main rack structure, too, like the first rack. In two-cabinet systems, the first racks (lowermost) will be main rack and the others will be auxiliary racks. However, there is CPU200 card only in a single cabinet’s main rack. Likewise, there is DS200 CPUKON card in only a single main rack. The first and the fourth racks are of the main rack structure and the connection between these two racks is provided with some additional cards and cables. The list of those cards and cables are below: 1) CC Extra card 2) Clock Master card 3) Clock Slave card 4) CCU card 5) Two BPL200-FC 6) Five PCM carrier cable 7) BPLSPS-FCX cable In order to facilitate the connection of the two cabinets, you need to remove the SPS248 power units in the third rack of the first cabinet and the first rack of the second cabinet, UTIL200, DS200 CPUKON and CPU200 cards (redundant CPU200, too, if there is any.), in the first racks of both cabinets.

I.2.C.1. CONNECTIONS IN THE MAIN RACK, TO WHICH THE CPU200 CARD HAS BEEN ATTACHED: I.2.C.1.1. INTEGRATION OF THE CLOCK MASTER CARD TO THE MAIN RACK: The Clock Master card must be attached to the main rack on which there is CPU200. Structure of this card is suitable for attaching it to the plastic card slots of DS200 and its size is the same as that of the CPU200 card. However, there is no 64-pin male connector at the back of the card for the backplane connection. Instead, it is connected by a BPL200-FC to the inter-rack connector that is at the lower section on the BPL200 backplane of the main rack, at the same level with the CPU200. If, on the other hand, there will not be a redundant CPU200 card in the DS200 system, then the Clock Master card is attached to the slot that is reserved for the redundant CPU200 card. Connect the cables before completely fixing the card in the slot. The procedure for this: 1) Connect one end of the BPL200-FC to the inter-rack connector that is at the lower edge of the BPL200-MAIN backplane of the main rack. 2) Connect the other end of the BPL200-FC to the similar connector that is on the Clock Master card. 3) Connect the PCM carrier cables to the five RJ45 connectors that are on the Clock Master card. The connection order of those cables is essentially important because those cables will be connected to the second rack in the same order.

10

DS200 Installation Guide

1- BPL200-FC

4- Clock Master card

2- PCM cable connectors (RJ45)

5- BPL200-Main

3- PCM carrier cables (The order is important.)

Figure – 7 After making the entire cable connections, push the card into the slot completely and make sure the fixing latches that are on the plastic front cover have been fully fixed on the metal casing. If there will be redundant CPU200 card in the system, then you may install the Clock Master card in the second general-purpose slot that is on the main rack. (Keep in mind that there must be an extension card in the first general-purpose slot.) The cable connections are the same as above. Then, attach the DS200 CPUKON, UTIL200, CPU200 and redundant CPU200 (if there is any) of the main rack to their corresponding slots, as will be described in later sections.

I.2.C.1.2. CONNECTING THE BPLSPS-FCX CABLE: The BPLSPS-FCX cable is structurally the same as the BPLSPS-FC cable, yet it is longer. Connect one end of that cable to the SPS connector that is at the upper section of the BPLSPS backplane of the third rack. Attach the SPS248 Power Unit to its corresponding slot, as will be described in later sections. Finally, extend the free ends of the PCM carrier cables and the BPLSPS-FCX cable out of the cabinet through the cable channels that are at the lower back of the cabinet. Then, insert those cables into the second cabinet through the similar opening as that of the first one, and extend them to the front part of the main rack.

11

DS200 Installation Guide

I.2.C.2. CONNECTIONS ON THE FOURTH RACK: The procedure is similar to that for the first rack.

I.2.C.2.1. INTEGRATION OF THE CLOCK SLAVE CARD TO THE MAIN RACK Structure of the Clock Slave card is the same as that of the Clock Master card, which is on the first rack. Besides, the connections are exactly the same. Since there will not be any CPU200 and redundant CPU200 cards in the second cabinet, you can place the Clock Slave card into the redundant CPU200 card slot that is on the main rack of the second cabinet. You are supposed to connect the corresponding cables before completely fixing the card in the slot. The procedure for this: 1) Connect one end of the BPL200-FC to the inter-rack connector that is at the lower edge of the BPL200-MAIN backplane of the main rack. 2) Connect the other end of the BPL200-FC to the similar connector that is on the Clock Slave card. 3) Connect the PCM carrier cables to the five RJ45 connectors that are on the Clock Slave card. The connection order of those cables is essentially important because those cables will be connected to the Clock Slave card in the same order as they have been connected to the Clock Master card in the first cabinet. (See Figure – 7)

*

INCORRECT CONNECTION ORDER OF THE PCM CARRIER CABLES WOULD PRECLUDE THE OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM.

After making the entire cable connections, push the card into the slot completely and make sure the fixing latches that are on the plastic front cover have been fully fixed on the metal casing.

I.2.C.2.2. ATTACHING THE CC ENABLE CARD TO THE MAIN RACK: The CC Enable card has a structure, which makes it possible to be attached to the BPL200MAIN backplane, thanks to the 64-pin male connector that is located at the back of it. Attach the CC Enable card to the slot reserved for CPU200 on the main rack. Then, you should attach the UTIL200 card of the main rack to its corresponding slot.

I.2.C.2.3. CONNECTING THE BPLSPS-FCX CABLE: Connect free end of the BPLSPS-FCX cable, whose connection with the first cabinet has already been provided, to the SPS connector that is at the lower section of the BPLSPS backplane. Attach the SPS248 Power Unit to its corresponding slot, as will be described in later sections. The operation of connecting two cabinets to each other will have been completed after applying the steps above.

I.2.D. GROUNDING Grounding is essential for protecting the DS200 Exchange from the effects of lightning or other sources of high voltage that might affect over lines or peripheral devices.

12

DS200 Installation Guide Although special tools are required for measuring the sufficiency of grounding of the electric installation of the building precisely, voltages between Neuter-Phase and Neuter-Ground can be measured for getting a rough idea. The Neuter-Phase voltage should be 180-260 VAC and the Neuter-Ground voltage should be 1-2 VAC. Those values must be consistent. Possible voltage leakage in grounding installation may damage your exchange, just like all other devices that require grounding. Water installation of the building can be used for grounding, provided that the pipes are of metal and no insulation material has been used at junctions. Indeed, the most secure grounding method is inserting a copper rod that is 1.5 cm in diameter with 1.5 m of length, or inserting a copper plate with 1 m2 of area to the ground and connecting it to the exchange through a copper grounding cable. The cable should be fastened tightly to the rod or to the plate and precautions should be taken against corrosion. The cable coming from the grounding plate or grounding system must be connected to the ground connection point of the exchange. The DS200 Exchange and auxiliary racks are connected to each other tightly at the ground connection points with the ground connection cable that comes with the shipped hardware.

A- DS200 Main Rack

B- DS200 Auxiliary rack

C- The grounding cable

D- The copper grounding plate or rod Figure – 8

*

ADDITIONAL GROUNDING MUST BE PROVIDED, IF SOUNDNESS OF THE GROUNDING OF THE ELECTRIC SYSTEM CANNOT BE GUARANTEED.

For providing the internal inter-rack grounding, first connect the grounding cable and the grounding screw of the first rack, which is under the rack. Then, connect the grounding screw that is under the first rack and the grounding screw of the second rack. Repeat the same operation for the third rack. Afterwards, connect the cabinet grounding screw and the external grounding system that has been installed for the cabinet, in order to provide grounding for the entire cabinet. For the two-cabinet structure, the grounding points of both cabinets must be the same.

13

DS200 Installation Guide

I.2.E. BATTERY CONNECTION *

SINCE ANY POWER FAILURE WILL DISRUPT THE EXCHANGE TO PERFORM ITS NORMAL FUNCTIONS, YOU SHOULD CONNECT BATTERY TO THE SYSTEM, IF THERE IS SUCH A POSSIBILITY.

*

THE BATTERY BREAKER MUST BE OFF DURING THE CONNECTION PROCESS.

The system uses dry batteries. The batteries are placed at the bottom of the DS200 cabinet. The compartment has been designed as large enough to include 38 Ah, dry-type batteries. The dimensions of the cabinet bottom are about 60x78 cm. The capacity of that space is at most12 batteries of 24 Ah (width: 17.5 cm, length: 16.6 cm, height: 12.5 cm) or of 38 Ah (width: 16.5 cm, length: 19.7 cm, height: 17.0 cm). A three-rack system requires at least 4 batteries and there is room in the cabinet for 8 or 12 batteries, as needed. Placing the batteries close to the back cover facilitates connecting them, as well as their maintenance. In order to connect the batteries: First, connect the batteries that are in the compartment under the exchange serially to each other. Then, connect the battery output through main breaker to the battery input of the main rack, which is the lowermost rack. Attach the battery output to the connection clips on the SPS200 (See the Technical Reference GuideFigure – 13), in the manner as the red end being the “+” pole, and the black end being the “-“ pole. No battery connection is required for the other SPS’s.

*

REVERSE BATTERY CONNECTION MAY DAMAGE YOUR EXCHANGE.

In order to complete the connection, press the spring latch of the clips and insert the corresponding end of the battery cable into the hole in front, deep enough so that no naked portion of the cable is left outside and then release the latch. Since the batteries are connected to the 48 VDC-output of the SPS200 in parallel, completely exhausted batteries may affect normal operation of the system. In that case, you should charge them from an external source and then re-connect them to the system.

*

NORMAL OPERATION OF SYSTEMS WITH BATTERIES WOULD BE AFFECTED BY FAILURES OF 230 VAC MAINS SUPPLY DURING NIGHT TIME AND HOLIDAYS.

*

THE SYSTEM AUTOMATICALLY SHUTS DOWN IF THE BATTERY VOLTAGE DROPS BELOW 34 VDC DURING PROLONGED POWER FAILURES AND THE BATTERIES DO NOT SWITCH ON UNTIL THE BATTERY VOLTAGE LEVEL EXCEEDS 46 VDC.

14

DS200 Installation Guide

1. 230 VAC cable

4. BPL200-FC

2. BPLSPS-FC

5. Grounding screw

3. Grounding wire

6. Battery connection cables

7. Main grounding cable

Figure – 9

15

DS200 Installation Guide

I.3. INSTALLING POWER SUPPLIES IN THE SYSTEM I.3.A. SPS200 AC/DC POWER SUPPLY The SPS200 AC/DC Power Supply, which includes the SPS200CR Power Card, has been placed in a metal casing. In order to fix SPS200 in the rack, place the metal rails properly, which are on the power chassis, in the metal slots that are on rightmost side of the rack. (See the Technical Reference GuideFigure–3). Then, push the SPS200 into the rack until it is firmly fixed to the connector that is on the BPLSPS-Backplane, which is behind the power rack. Afterwards, drive the SPS200 fixing screw that is in the upper front part of the rack. (See the Technical Reference GuideFigure – 4). In case you need to take the SPS200 out of rack, switch the battery and mains off, respectively, by the ON/OFF switches on the SPS200 module. (See The Technical Reference GuideFigure – 13). Detach the 230 V cable and battery connection cables (if there is any.) Then, pull the power rack out after loosening the fixing screw that is on the upper front part of the system rack.

I.3.B. SPS248 DC/DC POWER SUPPLY SPS248 DC/DC Power Supply, which includes the SPS248CR Power Card and ring transformer, has been mounted in a metal casing. Attaching the SPS248 is very similar to that of the SPS200. It is attached to the slot on the left-hand side of the SPS200. (See The Technical Reference GuideFigure – 4).

* CAUTION! IN MULTI-RACK DS200 SYSTEMS, THE INTER-RACK POWER CONNECTIONS MUST HAVE BEEN COMPLETED PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF SPS248 MODULES.

I.4. INTEGRATING MODULES TO THE SYSTEM In this section, integration of the CPU200, DS200 CPUKON, UTIL200 UTILITY and Expansion Modules to the system, together with CON2/CON3 Line Connection Cards, have been explained.

I.4.A.CPU200, REDUNDANT CPU200 & DS200 CPUKON CARDS The CPU200 Central Processing Module has been fixed in the corresponding slot, as being connected to the BPL200-MAIN backplane in the rack. (See The Technical Reference GuideFigure – 11). The DS200 CPUKON Connection Card has been situated in the leftmost slot of the main rack, as connected to the CPU200 card via the DS200 CPU-FC flat cable. The DS200 CPUKON card has not been connected to the BPL200-MAIN backplane. Install the CPU200, DS200 CPUKON and DS200 CPU-FC modules in the main rack as described below: 1- Make sure that the UTIL200 module of the first rack has not been installed. 2- Connect the cables of the accessories to the connectors on the DS200 CPUKON. In order to do this, extend the cables through the cable hole that is in the lower front rack and 16

DS200 Installation Guide attach them to the corresponding connectors on the DS200 CPUKON card. Then take the free end of the cable out of the rack by extending it along underneath the rack through the corresponding path within the cable channel that has been fixed on the back cover. 3- Install DS200 CPUKON card together with DS200 CPU-FC cable. First, attach the DS200 CPU-FC cable to the connector on the DS200 CPUKON card. Then, insert the DS200 CPUKON card so as its back corners fit the channel of the plastic card slot. Afterwards, extend the free end of the DS200 CPU-FC cable along underneath the UTIL200 connector on the backplane. As for the final step, when the card is completely placed, fix the DS200 CPUKON card by the fixing latches on the plastic card holder. See the figure below for the correct usage of the plastic fixing latches.

Figure – 10 4- In order to install the CPU200 module, place the back corners of the module into the channel of the plastic card slot and push it towards the rack. Before you set the module completely, connect the DS200 CPU-FC cable to CPU200. Then, push the CPU200 module inside, so as it tightly fits on its corresponding connector on the BPL200-Backplane. When the module has been completely set, fix it by using fixing latches on the front cover of the card. (See The Technical Reference GuideFigure – 24). See Figure – 10 for the correct usage of the plastic fixing latches. In case it is necessary to take CPU200 out of the rack, press the card fixing latches on the front cover of CPU200 toward the tag on the holder and then pull the module cautiously until DS200 CPU-FC appears. As for the final step, detach DS200 CPU-FC from CPU200 and then take it out of the rack. In case it is necessary to take DS200 CPUKON out of the rack, press the card fixing latches on the front cover of the card toward the tag on the holder and then pull the module cautiously until DS200 CPU-FC appears. Afterwards, detach DS200 CPU-FC from DS200 CPUKON and take it out of the rack. If a redundant CPU200 is needed in the system, then install that card in the special slot at the right-hand side of CPU200, which is reserved for it by following the same installation steps as for CPU200. Its connection to DS200 CPUKON card is provided by DS200 CPU-FC.

*

DO NOT EVER REMOVE THE CPU200 CARD DURING THE OPERATION OF THE EXCHANGE.

I.4.A.1. THE LAN ADAPTOR CARD: The LAN Adaptor card has been designed to be attached to two female sockets, each with 5 pins, which are on the CPUKON card. There are pins on the solder side of the card corresponding to the female sockets on CPUKON. While the RJ45 socket on the LAN Adaptor 17

DS200 Installation Guide card is facing out of the CPUKON card, attach the pins to the sockets. In addition to that, fix the LAN Adaptor card to the CPUKON card through lead card holders. In the figure below the LAN Adaptor card is illustrated as it has been attached onto CPUKON.

Figure – 11 After you have attached the LAN Adaptor card onto the DS200 CPUKON card, adjust the jumpers on the CPUKON card according to the proper configuration. The table below shows states of the jumpers: Jumper

State

1, 2

ON

3, 4

OFF

1, 2

OFF

3, 4

ON

Selected output RS232 LAN Adaptor

After the installation of the card is over, make the network connection through a one-to-one cable with RJ45 connectors on both sides.

I.4.B. THE UTIL200 UTILITY MODULE The UTIL200 Utility Module has been set on the related plastic card slot in the rack. (See The Technical Reference GuideFigure – 11 and Figure – 12). The UTIL200 module is situated between the CPU200 and DS200 CPUKON cards in the main rack. The DS200 CPU-FC cable passes through the back of the UTIL200 module. On the other hand, it is installed in the leftmost slot in the auxiliary racks. In order to set UTIL200 into the rack, insert the module so as its back corners fits the plastic card slot. Then, you should push it towards the inside of the rack so as the connector at the back of it would fully fit its correspondent on BPL200-MAIN or BPL200-AUX (While you are attaching the one that is on the main rack, be careful so that the DS200 CPU FC cable remains behind the card.) When the module has been completely set, fix it by using latches on the plastic card holder. (See Figure –10). In case it is necessary to take UTIL200 out of the rack, press the card fixing latches on the front cover of the card toward the sticker on the holder and then take the module out of the rack.

I.4.B.1. INSTALLING THE CONFERENCE CHIP ON UTIL200 If the chip enabling conferencing with up to 16 participants, which is offered optionally is to be utilized within the system, then insert this into the socket that is reserved for it on the 18

DS200 Installation Guide UTIL200 card of the first rack. While inserting the chip into the socket, make sure positioning of the chip is correct. In case there is an optional conference chip in the system, since this chip needs 32 PCM channel in order to be functional, you must leave the last two general-purpose slots (The two general-purpose slots on the rightmost edge of the rack) of the first rack vacant.

*

WHILE INSERTING THE CONFERENCE CHIP INTO THE UTIL200 CARD, LEAVE THE TWO GENERAL-PURPOSE SLOTS VACANT, WHICH ARE AT THE RIGHTMOST SIDE ON THE BACKPLANE.

I.4.C. CON2/CON3 LINE CONNECTION CARDS The CON2 and CON3 line connection cards constitute the connection among telephones, lines and the extension and line cards of the system. High voltage protection circuits, the line-busy LED, grounding pins and line connection connectors are all situated on the line connection cards. There are four female RJ45 connectors on the CON2 card. The MDF cable with 16 pairs, which is called CBL-16, is for CON2. The male RJ45s at one end of the CBL-16 cable are attached to the corresponding female connectors on CON2. Cable pairs at the other end of the CBL-16 cable should be attached to the related sections on the MDF. There are two female RJ45 connectors on the CON3 card. The MDF cable with 8 pairs, which is called CBL-8, is for CON3. The male RJ45s at one end of the CBL-8 cable are attached to the corresponding female connectors on CON3. Cable pairs at the other end of the CBL-8 cable should be attached to the related sections on the MDF. The CON2 and CON3 cards are attached to the related expansion card on the side with circuit elements. Two 20-pin connectors on the component side of the CON2 and CON3 cards are attached to the corresponding connectors on the component side of the expansion card. You should connect the cables CBL-8 and CBL-16 correctly in order to experience no problems while removing the expansion modules from the exchange and replacing them back. Proper connection of those cables is shown in Figure – 12. It would be proper to extend the cables that go to the line connection connectors alongside the expansion card connection connector (20-pin, white connector) in order to reduce the space they occupy. Fixing line connection cables tightly to the expansion card by cable tie so as their thin sides would touch the card, would provide for a trouble-free installation.

19

DS200 Installation Guide

1. Ground contact spring

4. Line status LED

7. CBL-8 line cable

2. Line connection connector (RJ45)

5. Card status LED

8. CBL-16 line cable

3. EX200B connection connector

6. Cable tie

Figure – 12 While attaching the line connection card to the expansion card, be careful about fully inserting the connection connectors and fully fitting the line connection card into the clicks on sides of the plastic cover. Cards that are not completely fitted cause friction with the cards nearby, as well as they cause the LEDs on the front face not to be seen from outside, for they would not fit. The connectors on the line connection cards have been included only to provide for easy replacement of the card without detaching the cabling, in case protection circuitry on the card is damaged. While replacing the card, do not detach the cables from that connector. In order to achieve this, during the first connection, insert the expansion module to its corresponding place by sliding it in the slot while the cable is still loosely hanging, however, leave it 6-7 cm before the point it is completely fixed. Then, fix the line connection cable to the back surface of the exchange while the expansion module is in this position.

20

DS200 Installation Guide

1. CON2 / CON3 connection card

6. Ground contact spring of rack

2. Ground contact spring of connection card

7. CBL-8 / CBL-16 line cable

3. EX200B line card

8. Card removing latch

4. Card slot

9. Card fixing click

5. Bottom front section of rack

10. Front card cover

Figure – 13

I.4.D. INSTALLING EXPANSION MODULES This section explains integrations of the entire EX200 extension, line and network connection modules to the system.

I.4.D.1. ATTACHING EX200 MODULES: EX200 modules fundamentally consist of the electronic card and the card cover that maintains connection to chassis. Figure – 24 in the Technical Reference Guide shows fundamental characteristics of a card and a card cover. There are two points to consider while establishing the configuration of the system: 1) An extension card must be installed in the first general-purpose slot of the first rack. 2) If EX200 (1S2/0) or EX200 (1R2/0) module or modules are to be installed in the system, then the ones that are to be utilized for data or video transmission must be installed in the first rack, into the card slots with even numbers. On the other hand, the modules that are to be utilized for voice transmission can be installed into the even-numbered slots of any rack.

*

THE EX200 (1S2/0) OR EX200 (1R2/0) MODULES THAT ARE TO BE UTILIZED FOR DATA OR VIDEO TRANSMISSION IN THE SYSTEM MUST BE INSTALLED IN THE FIRST RACK OF THE EXCHANGE. 3) If EX200 (7CAS2B-RX/0) card with international dialing software is employed on the system, it must be noted that these cards cannot be installed in the 6th rack. After considering criteria such as the system configuration, traffic rate (distribution of extension and line connections to the racks), begin with installing the modules in their corresponding slots. 21

DS200 Installation Guide •

Hold the module upright and make sure the corners in the rear fit lower and upper plastic slot, then push it forward in the slot slowly and cautiously.

•

After more than half of the module has been inserted into the slot, arrange any cable that is connected to the module.

•

You need to push a little bit harder so that the connector for backplane connection fits, which is at the back of the expansion card.

•

Finally, push the module by gently pressing the latches upward / downward, which are at the top and bottom of the card cover to fit it to its place.

•

Check if the card fixing clicks that are over the card cover latches have fit to the holes on the chassis. Card latches that have not fit appear as in Figure – 10.

Before the expansion module contacts with the backplane while it is being pushed into its slot, the pins that are on and under the connection card provides grounding for the cards by applying pressure on the ground contact spring. (See Figure – 13). In case it would be necessary to remove the modules following the first installation:

•

Pull the module by pressing the latches at the top and bottom of the card cover to disconnect it from the backplane.

•

Pull the module until the line connection card gets out of the exchange. Be careful about the cable that has been fixed under the exchange, so that it would not forced too much by being pulled.

•

At this point, remove the line connection card from the expansion card and set it free as connected to the line connection cable. Then do whatever would be necessary by pulling the module out.

Repeat the steps above in reverse order in order to replace the card. While removing and replacing the module, pay attention to the facts that line connection cable has been tightly attached to the chassis, the expansion card and the connection cards are completely in contact, and the card cover moves in a straight line parallel to slot.

*

MOVE THE MODULES IN A STRAIGHT LINE WHILE INSERTING OR REMOVING, WITHOUT TILTING THEM TOWARDS RIGHT-LEFT OR IN UPWARD-DOWNWARD DIRECTION.

See Figure – 10 for the appearance of a card latch that has not fit.

I.4.D.2. CABLING OF EX200 MODULES: After you have installed the expansion modules in the corresponding slots in the rack, establish line or extension connections by making use of the cable pairs at the free ends of CBL-8 or CBL-16 cables, which have properly been taken out of the rack. The following tables present cabling information related to those connections on module basis.

I.4.D.2.1. EX200 (0/16) ANALOG EXTENSION MODULE: Pairs in the CBL-16 cable and connected extensions are given in the table below.

Pair No

Color & Signal of Pair

Extension No

1

White (A) – Blue (B)

1st Extension

2

White (A) – Orange (B)

2nd Extension

3

White (A) – Green (B)

3rd Extension 22

DS200 Installation Guide 4

White (A) – Brown (B)

4th Extension

5

White (A) – Gray (B)

5th Extension

6

Red (A) – Blue (B)

6th Extension

7

Red (A) – Orange (B)

7th Extension

8

Red (A) – Green (B)

8th Extension

9

Red (A) – Brown (B)

9th Extension

10

Red (A) – Gray (B)

10th Extension

11

Black (A) – Blue (B)

11th Extension

12

Black (A) – Orange (B)

12th Extension

13

Black (A) – Green (B)

13th Extension

14

Black (A) – Brown (B)

14th Extension

15

Black (A) – Gray (B)

15th Extension

16

Yellow (A) – Blue (B)

16th Extension

The order of A and B wires are not important for the connection of the cable mentioned above to the extension phone.

1.4.D.2.2. EX200 (0/16R) ANALOG EXTENSION MODULE: The table below shows pairs in the CBL-16 cable and the connected extensions.

Pair No

Pair Color & Signal

Extension No

1

White (A) – Blue (B)

1st Extension

2

White (A) – Orange (B)

2nd Extension

3

White (A) – Green (B)

3rd Extension

4

White (A) – Brown (B)

4th Extension

5

White (A) – Gray (B)

5 th Extension

6

Red (A) – Blue (B)

6th Extension

7

Red (A) – Orange (B)

7th Extension

8

Red (A) – Green (B)

8th Extension

9

Red (A) – Brown (B)

9th Extension

10

Red (A) – Gray (B)

10th Extension

11

Black (A) – Blue (B)

11th Extension

12

Black (A) – Orange (B)

12th Extension

13

Black (A) – Green (B)

13th Extension

14

Black (A) – Brown (B)

14th Extension

15

Black (A) – Gray (B)

15th Extension

16

Yellow (A) – Blue (B)

16th Extension

Order of wires A and B does not matter for the connection of the cable mentioned above to the extension phone.

23

DS200 Installation Guide I.4.D.2.3. EX200 (8/0) ANALOG LINE MODULE: Pairs in the CBL-8 cable and connected lines are given in the table below.

Pair No

Color & Signal of Pair

Line No

1

White (A) – Blue (B)

1st Line

2

White (A) – Orange (B)

2nd Line

3

White (A) – Green (B)

3rd Line

4

White (A) – Brown (B)

4th Line

5

White (A) – Gray (B)

5th Line

6

Red (A) – Blue (B)

6th Line

7

Red (A) – Orange (B)

7th Line

8

Red (A) – Green (B)

8th Line

The order of A and B wires are not important for the connection of the cable mentioned above to the lines. The line circuitry automatically detects polarity and takes action accordingly.

I.4.D.2.4. EX200 (8+8/0) ANALOG LINE MODULE:

If 8 more analog lines are added on the base card

The table below shows pairs in the CBL-16 cable and the connected lines.

Pair No

Pair Color & Signal

Extension No

1

White (A) – Blue (B)

1st Line

2

White (A) – Orange (B)

2nd Line

3

White (A) – Green (B)

3rd Line

4

White (A) – Brown (B)

4th Line

5

White (A) – Gray (B)

5th Line

6

Red (A) – Blue (B)

6th Line

7

Red (A) – Orange (B)

7th Line

8

Red (A) – Green (B)

8th Line

9

Red (A) – Brown (B)

9th Line

10

Red (A) – Gray (B)

10th Line

11

Black (A) – Blue (B)

11th Line

12

Black (A) – Orange (B)

12th Line

13

Black (A) – Green (B)

13th Line

14

Black (A) – Brown (B)

14th Line

15

Black (A) – Gray (B)

15th Line

16

Yellow (A) – Blue (B)

16th Line

Order of wires A and B does not matter for the connection of the cable mentioned above to the extension phone.

I.4.D.2.5. EX200 (0/8S0) ISDN BRI EXTENSION MODULE: 24

DS200 Installation Guide Pairs in the CBL-16 cable and connected extensions are given in the table below.

Pair No

Color & Signal of Pair

1

White (R1) - Blue (T1)

2

White (T2) – Orange (R2)

3

White (R1) – Green (T1)

4

White (T2) – Brown (R2)

5

White (R1) – Gray (T1)

6

Red (T2) – Blue (R2)

7

Red (R1) – Orange (T1)

8

Red (T2) – Green (R2)

9

Red (R1) – Brown (T1)

10

Red (T2) – Gray (R2)

11

Black (R1) – Blue (T1)

12

Black (T2) – Orange (R2)

13

Black (R1) – Green (T1)

14

Black (T2) – Brown (R2)

15

Black (R1) – Gray (T1)

16

Yellow (T2) – Blue (R2)

Extension No 1st ISDN Extension 2nd ISDN Extension 3rd ISDN Extension 4th ISDN Extension 5th ISDN Extension 6th ISDN Extension 7th ISDN Extension 8th ISDN Extension

For the cable above, order of the four wires that are to be used for connection to ISDN devices is important. The signals represented as “R” are the receiving signals of DS200; on the other hand, the signals represented as “T” are the transmitting signals. Pay attention to this order for cabling. Pin-signal assignments of cabling for the connection between DS200 and Iris ISDN telephones are given in the table below: Signal with respect to Iris

RJ45 pins of the Iris side

CBL-16 wires of the DS200 side

Signal with respect to DS200

T1

3

1

R1

R1

4

2

T1

R2

5

3

T2

T2

6

4

R2

I.4.D.2.6. EX200 (1S2/0) ISDN PRI MODULE: The assignments required for the PRI ISDN line connections of the EX200B (1S2/0) card are given in the table below.

Signal

D-type Connector Pin No

RJ45 Pin No

R1

5

1

R2

9

2

T1

1

4

T2

6

5

25

DS200 Installation Guide For the cable above, order of the four wires that are to be used for the ISDN connection is important. Pin assignments of the cable that comes with the EX200 (1S2/0) module are given with respect to the RJ45 connectors at both ends, in the table below: RJ45

Signal

RJ45

1

R1

4

2

R2

5

4

T1

1

5

T2

2

I.4.D.2.7. EX200 (1R2/0) R2 DIGITAL LINE MODULE: The assignments required for the line connections of the EX200 (1R2/0) card are given in the table below.

Signal

D-type Connector Pin No

RJ45 Pin No

R1

5

1

R2

9

2

T1

1

4

T2

6

5

For the cable above, order of the four wires that are to be used for the R2 connection is important. Pin assignments of the cable that comes with the EX200 (1R2/0) module are given with respect to the RJ45 connectors at both ends, in the table below: RJ45

Signal

RJ45

1

R1

4

2

R2

5

4

T1

1

5

T2

2

I.4.D.2.8. EX200 (1VF/0) MODULE: The assignments that are necessary for the line connections of the EX200B (1VF/0) card are presented in the table below.

Signal

Pin No of D-type Con.

Pin No of RJ45

R1

5

1

R2

9

2

T1

1

4

T2

6

5

As for the cable above, order of the 4 wires that are to be employed for the 1VF connection matters. Pin assignments of the cable that comes with the EX200 (1VF/0) module is shown in the table below, with respect to the RJ45 connectors at both ends: RJ45

Signal

RJ45

1

R1

4 26

DS200 Installation Guide 2

R2

5

4

T1

1

5

T2

2

An interface has been designed for the purpose of maintaining connection to the 1VF card on the DS200 and the cards in the 1VF signalling system. That interface consists of eight EX200 (4E&M/0) cards and an EX200 (1S2/0) card that have been placed in a standard DS200 main rack. The special software that is to run on the CPU200 card of that rack should have already been installed. The EX200 (1S2/0) card should be installed in the first slot of the rack and the EX200 (4E&M/0) cards in the next eight slots starting with the slot number 02. The 4 wires coming from the 1VF lines are connected to the wires adjusted for four-wire speech that are on the EX200 (4E&M/0) card. In the meantime, the EX200 (1S2/0) card is connected to the EX200 (1VF) card by a one-to-one cable. Please refer to the corresponding section for the wire-signal order of the EX200 (4E&M/0) card.

I.4.D.2.9. EX200 (7CAS2B-RX/0) CAS2B MODULE: The assignments that are necessary for the line connections of the EX200B (7CAS2B-RX/0) card are shown in the table below.

Pair No

Pair Color & Signal

1

White (A) - Blue (B)

2

White (C) – Orange (D)

3

White (A) – Green (B)

4

White (C) – Brown (D)

5

White (C) – Gray (D)

6

Red (A) – Blue (B)

7

Red (C) – Orange (D)

8

Red (A) – Green (B)

9

Red (A) – Brown (B)

10

Red (C) – Gray (D)

11

Black (A) – Blue (B)

12

Black (C) – Orange (D)

13

Black (C) – Green (D)

14

Black (A) – Brown (B)

CAS2B-RX No 1st CAS2B-RX 3rd CAS2B-RX 2nd CAS2B-RX 4th CAS2B-RX 5th CAS2B-RX 7th CAS2B-RX 6th CAS2B-RX

As for the table above, order of the 4 wires that are to be employed for the CAS2B connection matters.

I.4.D.2.10. EX200 (8CAS2B-TRX/0) CAS2B MODULE: The assignments that are necessary for the line connections of the EX200B (8CAS2B-TX/0) card are shown in the table below.

Pair No

Pair Color & Signal

CAS2B-TX no

1

White (A) - Blue (B)

1st CAS2B-TX 27

DS200 Installation Guide 2

White (A) – Orange (B)

2nd CAS2B-TX

3

White (A) – Green (B)

3rd CAS2B-TX

4

White (A) – Brown (B)

4th CAS2B-TX

5

White (A) – Gray (B)

5th CAS2B-TX

6

Red (A) – Blue (B)

6th CAS2B-TX

7

Red (A) – Orange (B)

7th CAS2B-TX

8

Red (A) – Green (B)

8th CAS2B-TX

9

Red (C) – Brown (D)

1st CAS2B-TX

10

Red (C) – Gray (D)

2nd CAS2B-TX

11

Black (C) – Blue (D)

3rd CAS2B-TX

12

Black (C) – Orange (D)

4th CAS2B-TX

13

Black (C) – Green (D)

5th CAS2B-TX

14

Black (C) – Brown (D)

6th CAS2B-TX

15

Black (C) – Gray (D)

7th CAS2B-TX

16

Yellow (C) – Blue (D)

8th CAS2B-TX

As for the table above, order of the 4 wires that are to be employed for the CAS2B connection matters.

I.4.D.2.11. EX200 (SS7 L) SS7 LINK MODULE: The necessary assignments for the line connections of the EX200B (SS7 L) card are shown in the table below. As for the table above, order of the 4 wires that are to be employed for the SS7 connection matters. Pin assignments of the cable that comes with the EX200 (SS7 L) module is shown in the table below, with respect to the RJ45 connectors at both ends: RJ45

Signal

RJ45

1

R1

4

2

R2

5

4

T1

1

5

T2

2

I.4.D.2.12. EX200 (0/8U) DIGITAL EXTENSION MODULE: Pairs in the CBL-8 cable and connected extensions are given in the table below.

Pair No

Color & Signal of Pair

Extension No

1

White (A) – Blue (B)

1st Extension

2

White (A) – Orange (B)

2nd Extension

3

White (A) – Green (B)

3rd Extension

4

White (A) – Brown (B)

4th Extension

5

White (A) – Gray (B)

5th Extension 28

DS200 Installation Guide 6

Red (A) – Blue (B)

6th Extension

7

Red (A) – Orange (B)

7th Extension

8

Red (A) – Green (B)

8th Extension

The order of A and B wires are not important for the connection of the cable mentioned above to the extension phone.

I.4.D.2.13. EX200 (0/16U) DIGITAL EXTENSION MODULE: Pairs in the CBL-16 cable and connected extensions are given in the table below.

Pair No

Color & Signal of Pair

Extension No

1

White (A) – Blue (B)

1st Extension

2

White (A) – Orange (B)

2nd Extension

3

White (A) – Green (B)

3rd Extension

4

White (A) – Brown (B)

4th Extension

5

White (A) – Gray (B)

5th Extension

6

Red (A) – Blue (B)

6th Extension

7

Red (A) – Orange (B)

7th Extension

8

Red (A) – Green (B)

8th Extension

9

Red (A) – Brown (B)

9th Extension

10

Red (A) – Gray (B)

10th Extension

11

Black (A) – Blue (B)

11th Extension

12

Black (A) – Orange (B)

12th Extension

13

Black (A) – Green (B)

13th Extension

14

Black (A) – Brown (B)

14th Extension

15

Black (A) – Gray (B)

15th Extension

16

Yellow (A) – Blue (B)

16th Extension

The order of A and B wires are not important for the connection of the cable mentioned above to the extension phone.

I.4.D.2.14. EX200 (8 T0/S0) ISDN BRI LINE/EXTENSION MODULE: Pairs in the CBL-16 cable and connected extensions are given in the table below.

Pair No

Color & Signal of Pair

1

White (R1) - Blue (T1)

2

White (T2) – Orange (R2)

3

White (R1) – Green (T1)

4

White (T2) – Brown (R2)

5

White (R1) – Gray (T1)

6

Red (T2) – Blue (R2)

7

Red (R1) – Orange (T1)

8

Red (T2) – Green (R2)

Line No 1st ISDN line 2nd ISDN line 3rd ISDN line 4th ISDN line

29

DS200 Installation Guide 9

Red (R1) – Brown (T1)

10

Red (T2) – Gray (R2)

11

Black (R1) – Blue (T1)

12

Black (T2) – Orange (R2)

13

Black (R1) – Green (T1)

14

Black (T2) – Brown (R2)

15

Black (R1) – Gray (T1)

16

Yellow (T2) – Blue (R2)

5th ISDN line 6th ISDN line 7th ISDN line 8th ISDN line

For the cable above, order of the four wires that are to be used for connection to ISDN devices is important. The signals represented as “R” are the receiving signals of DS200; on the other hand, the signals represented as “T” are the transmitting signals. Pay attention to this order for cabling. Pin-signal assignments of cabling for the connection between DS200 and lines extending out of NT1 (network terminating device) are given in the table below: Signal with respect to NT1

RJ45 pins of the NT1 side

CBL-16 wires of the DS200 side

Signal with respect to DS200

T1

3

1

R1

R1

4

2

T1

R2

5

3

T2

T2

6

4

R2

I.4.D.2.15. EX200 (0/8LB) LOCAL BATTERY EXTENSION MODULE: Pairs in the CBL-8 cable and connected extensions are given in the table below.

Pair No

Color & Signal of Pair

Line No

1

White (A) – Blue (B)

1st LB Line

2

White (A) – Orange (B)

2nd LB Line

3

White (A) – Green (B)

3rd LB Line

4

White (A) – Brown (B)

4th LB Line

5

White (A) – Gray (B)

5th LB Line

6

Red (A) – Blue (B)

6th LB Line

7

Red (A) – Orange (B)

7th LB Line

8

Red (A) – Green (B)

8th LB Line

The order of A and B wires are not important for the connection of the cable mentioned above to the extension phone.

I.4.D.2.16. EX200 (4VoIP) VOICE OVER IP MODULE: Since the EX200 (4VoIP) card will be treated as a standard network component, its connection will be made to a switch or hub, which is part of an existing computer network, over a standard Ethernet cable. 30

DS200 Installation Guide The pin-signal assignments that are necessary for the connection of the EX200 (4VoIP) card are shown in the table below (the Ethernet standard): Signal

RJ45 Pin No

RX-1

1

RX-2

2

TX-1

3

TX-2

6

As for the cable above, order of the 4 wires that are to be employed for the Ethernet connection matters.

I.4.D.2.17. EX200 (4TWT) SPECIAL BI-DIRECTIONAL LINE MODULE: In the table below, the pairs in the CBL-8 cable and the connected lines are shown.

Pair No

Pair Color & Signal

Line No st

1

White (A) – Blue (B)

1 TWT Line

2

White (A) – Orange (B)

2nd TWT Line

3

White (A) – Green (B)

3rd TWT Line

4

White (A) – Brown (B)

4th TWT Line

As for the mentioned cable above, A is –48VDC and B is at the ground level and the order of the wires matters while connecting.

I.4.D.2.18. EX200 (4E&M/0) E&M LINE MODULE: Pairs in the CBL-16 cable and connected extensions are given in the table below.

Pair No

Color & Signal of Pair

1

White (E) - Blue (SG)

2

White (M) – Orange (SB)

3

White (T) – Green (R)

4

White (T1) – Brown (R1)

5

White (T1) – Gray (R1)

6

Red (T) – Blue (R)

7

Red (M) – Orange (SB)

8

Red (E) – Green (SG)

9

Red (E) – Brown (SG)

10

Red (M) – Gray (SB)

11

Black (T) – Blue (R)

12

Black (T1) – Orange (R1)

13

Black (T1) – Green (R1)

14

Black (T) – Brown (R)

15

Black (M) – Gray (SB)

16

Yellow (E) – Blue (SG)

Line No

1st E&M Line

2nd E&M Line

3rd E&M Line

4th E&M Line

31

DS200 Installation Guide Connection orders of both signaling and voice transmission wires for cabling E&M lines are important. These wires should be connected by being crossed within their own groups. Those orders are given in the table below for two correspondent exchanges: RJ45 wire order on DS200 side

Wire order on the Signal

opposite side

1

E

M

2

SG

SB

3

M

E

4

SB

SG

5

T

R1 (R, if it is 2-wire)

6

R

T1 (T, if it is 2-wire)

7

T1

R

8

R1

T

I.4.D.2.19. EX200 (8E&M/0) E&M LINE MODULE: The pairs in the CBL-16 cable and the connected extensions are presented in the table below.

Pair No

Pair Color & Signal

1

White (E) - Blue (M)

2

White (Tx) – Orange (Rx)

3

White (E) – Green (M)

4

White (Tx) – Brown (Rx)

5

White (Rx) – Gray (Tx)

6

Red (M) – Blue (E)

7

Red (Rx) – Orange (Tx)

8

Red (M) – Green (E)

9

Red (E) – Brown (M)

10

Red (Tx) – Gray (Rx)

11

Black (E) – Blue (M)

12

Black (Tx) – Orange (Rx)

13

Black (Rx) – Green (Tx)

14

Black (M) – Brown (E)

15

Black (Rx) – Gray (Tx)

16

Yellow (M) – Blue (E)

Line No 1st E&M Line 2nd E&M Line 3rd E&M Line 4th E&M Line 5th E&M Line 6th E&M Line 7th E&M Line 8th E&M Line

Connection order of both signalling wires and the voice transmission wires matter, concerning the cabling of the E&M lines. Those wires should be cross-connected within their own groups. Those arrangements have been shown in the tables below for two corresponding exchanges: 32

DS200 Installation Guide Wire order of an RJ45 on DS200 side

Wire order of Signal

the opposite side

1

E

M

2

M

E

3

Tx

Rx

4

Rx

Tx

I.4.D.2.20. EX200 (SS7 CONTROL) SS7 Control Card: No cabling is performed on the EX200 (SS7 CONTROL) card. That card can be installed in any slot on the main rack of the exchange (except the first one.)

I.4.D.2.21. EX200 (ALARM) Alarm Card: In order to make the cabling of the alarm card through the 8 RJ45 connectors on the card, 2 pieces of CBL-16 MDF Cable is used. The rack structure enables just one cable to be fit in the cable hole on the bottom front rack part. Therefore, while the first cable is passing through this cable hole, the second cable must be laid between the plastic card holders and taken to the back of the rack. The cable lengths must be carefully set to be able remove the card without damaging the cables. The pairs in the 2 CBL-16 cables and the corresponding alarm channels are presented in the table below.

Pair No

Color & Signal of Pair

Alarm No

1-1

White (A) – Blue (B)

SS7 alarm

1-2

White (A) – Orange (B)

Card closed alarm

1-3

White (A) – Green (B)

Extension test alarm

1-4

White (A) – Brown (B)

External alarm indication

1-5

White (A) – Gray (B)

1st external alarm

1-6

Red (A) – Blue (B)

2nd external alarm

1-7

Red (A) – Orange (B)

3rd external alarm

1-8

Red (A) – Green (B)

4th external alarm

1-9

Red (A) – Brown (B)

5th external alarm

1-10

Red (A) – Gray (B)

6th external alarm

1-11

Black (A) – Blue (B)

7th external alarm

1-12

Black (A) – Orange (B)

8th external alarm

1-13

Black (A) – Green (B)

9th external alarm

1-14

Black (A) – Brown (B)

10th external alarm

1-15

Black (A) – Gray (B)

11th external alarm

1-16

Yellow (A) – Blue (B)

12th external alarm

2-1

White (A) – Blue (B)

13th external alarm

2-2

White (A) – Orange (B)

14th external alarm

2-3

White (A) – Green (B)

15th external alarm 33

DS200 Installation Guide 2-4

White (A) – Brown (B)

16th external alarm

2-5

White (A) – Gray (B)

17th external alarm

2-6

Red (A) – Blue (B)

18th external alarm

2-7

Red (A) – Orange (B)

19th external alarm

2-8

Red (A) – Green (B)

20th external alarm

2-9

Red (A) – Brown (B)

21st external alarm

2-10

Red (A) – Gray (B)

22nd External alarm

2-11

Black (A) – Blue (B)

23rd external alarm

2-12

Black (A) – Orange (B)

24th external alarm

2-13

Black (A) – Green (B)

25th external alarm

2-14

Black (A) – Brown (B)

26th external alarm

2-15

Black (A) – Gray (B)

27th external alarm

2-16

Yellow (A) – Blue (B)

28th external alarm

The order of A and B wires are not important for the connection of the cable mentioned above to the alarm panel or alarm generator. The first 4 channels of the alarm card is used to drive an alarm panel fed by a 12 VDC supply. To feed the alarm panel a power module (AL04) generating 12 VDC out of 70 VDC or 48 VDC is provided with the alarm card. The input of this power module is taken from the battery connector of the system. There are also four alarm channels to carry the outputs of the alarm card to the alarm panel. The inputs and outputs are carried in parallel. The following figure illustrates the cabling of the power module:

Figure – 14

34

DS200 Installation Guide

I.4.E. JUMPER SETTINGS ON THE EX200 (8T0/S0) MODULE The ISDN BRI lines of the EX200 (8 T0/S0) module can be configured as either external line or extension. (The software with the version 1.05 does not support the configuration for extension.) This setting operation is done trough jumpers that exist within the structure of each line. The list of those settings are given per line in the table below: Line Number 1st ISDN BRI line 2nd ISDN BRI line 3rd ISDN BRI line 4th ISDN BRI line 5th ISDN BRI line 6th ISDN BRI line 7th ISDN BRI line 8th ISDN BRI line

Positions of the jumpers for extension settings K4, K5 – pins 1,2 and K6, K7 – pins 1,2 K8, K9 – pins 1,2 and K10, K11– pins 1,2 K12, K13 – pins 1,2 and K14, K15 – pins 1,2 K16, K17 – pins 1,2 and K18, K19 – pins 1,2 K20, K21 – pins 1,2 and K22, K23 – pins 1,2 K24, K25 – pins 1,2 and K26, K27 – pins 1,2 K28, K29 – pins 1,2 and K30, K31 – pins 1,2 K32, K33 – pins 1,2 and K34, K35 – pins 1,2

Line Number 1st ISDN BRI line 2nd ISDN BRI line 3rd ISDN BRI line 4th ISDN BRI line 5th ISDN BRI line 6th ISDN BRI line 7th ISDN BRI line 8th ISDN BRI line

Positions of the jumpers for line settings K4, K5 – pins 2,3 and K6, K7 – pins 2,3 K8, K9 – pins 2,3 and K10, K11– pins 2,3 K12, K13 – pins 2,3 and K14, K15 – pins 2,3 K16, K17 – pins 2,3 and K18, K19 – pins 2,3 K20, K21 – pins 2,3 and K22, K23 – pins 2,3 K24, K25 – pins 2,3 and K26, K27 – pins 2,3 K28, K29 – pins 2,3 and K30, K31 – pins 2,3 K32, K33 – pins 2,3 and K34, K35 – pins 2,3

35

DS200 Installation Guide

I.4.F. JUMPER SETTINGS ON THE EX200 (4E&M/0) MODULE Since several different configurations are possible for the E&M module, unlike the others, some configuration settings must be done on it before it is installed in the system. Those settings are done through jumpers. A list of jumper settings for different configurations is as follows: A) FOR THE SIGNALING CHANNEL CONFIGURATION: Type 1: ♦ TRUNKING SIDE E&M channel 1: JP1, JP4, JP17, JP19, JP22 E&M channel 2: JP5, JP8, JP31, JP33, JP36 E&M channel 3: JP9, JP12, JP24, JP26, JP29 E&M channel 4: JP13, JP16, JP38, JP40, JP43 ♦ SIGNALING SIDE E&M channel 1: JP2, JP3, JP19, JP21 E&M channel 2: JP6, JP7, JP33, JP35 E&M channel 3: JP10, JP11, JP26, JP28 E&M channel 4: JP14, JP15, JP40, JP42 Type 2: ♦ TRUNKING SIDE E&M channel 1: JP1, JP4, JP19, JP20 E&M channel 2: JP5, JP8, JP33, JP34 E&M channel 3: JP9, JP12, JP26, JP27 E&M channel 4: JP13, JP16, JP40, JP41 ♦ SIGNALING SIDE E&M channel 1: JP2, JP3, JP21, JP23 E&M channel 2: JP6, JP7, JP35, JP37 E&M channel 3: JP10, JP11, JP28, JP30 E&M channel 4: JP14, JP15, JP42, JP44 Type 3: ♦ TRUNKING SIDE E&M channel 1: JP1, JP4, JP17, JP19, JP20 E&M channel 2: JP5, JP8, JP31, JP33, JP34 E&M channel 3: JP9, JP12, JP24, JP26, JP27 E&M channel 4: JP13, JP16, JP38, JP40, JP41

♦ SIGNALING SIDE 36

DS200 Installation Guide E&M channel 1: JP2, JP3, JP19, JP21, JP23 E&M channel 2: JP6, JP7, JP33, JP35, JP37 E&M channel 3: JP10, JP11, JP26, JP28, JP30 E&M channel 4: JP14, JP15, JP40, JP42, JP44 Type 4: ♦ TRUNKING SIDE E&M channel 1: JP1, JP4, JP19, JP20 E&M channel 2: JP5, JP8, JP33, JP34 E&M channel 3: JP9, JP12, JP26, JP27 E&M channel 4: JP13, JP16, JP40, JP41 ♦ SIGNALING SIDE E&M channel 1: JP1, JP4, JP18, JP21 E&M channel 2: JP5 JP8, JP32, JP35 E&M channel 3: JP9, JP12, JP25, JP28 E&M channel 4: JP13, JP16, JP39, JP42 Type 5 ♦ TRUNKING SIDE E&M channel 1: JP1, JP4, JP19, JP21 E&M channel 2: JP5, JP8, JP33, JP35 E&M channel 3: JP9, JP12, JP26, JP28 E&M channel 4: JP13, JP16, JP40, JP42 ♦ SIGNALING SIDE E&M channel 1: JP1, JP4, JP19, JP21 E&M channel 2: JP5 JP8, JP33, JP35 E&M channel 3: JP9, JP12, JP26, JP28 E&M channel 4: JP13, JP16, JP40, JP42 B) FOR SPEECH CHANNEL CONNECTION ♦ Two-wire connection E&M channel 1: JP45, JP46 E&M channel 2: JP48, JP49 E&M channel 3: JP51, JP52 E&M channel 4: JP54, JP55 ♦ Four-wire connection E&M channel 1: JP47 E&M channel 2: JP50 E&M channel 3: JP53 E&M channel 4: JP56

37

DS200 Installation Guide

I.4.G. JUMPER ADJUSTMENTS ON THE EX200 (8E&M/0) MODULE Since, unlike the others, several different configurations are possible for the E&M module, some configuration adjustments should be made on it, prior to installation in the system. Those adjustments are made through jumpers. A list of jumper adjustments that are necessary for different configurations has been presented below: B) FOR THE SIGNALLING CHANNEL CONFIGURATION: Type 1: ♦ LOWER PBX E&M channel 1: JP12 (pin 1-2), JP10, JP11 (pin 2-3) short circuit E&M channel 2: JP15 (pin 1-2), JP13, JP14 (pin 2-3) short circuit E&M channel 3: JP18 (pin 1-2), JP16, JP17 (pin 2-3) short circuit E&M channel 4: JP21 (pin 1-2), JP19, JP20 (pin 2-3) short circuit E&M channel 5: JP24 (pin 1-2), JP22, JP23 (pin 2-3) short circuit E&M channel 6: JP27 (pin 1-2), JP25, JP26 (pin 2-3) short circuit E&M channel 7: JP20 (pin 1-2), JP28, JP29 (pin 2-3) short circuit E&M channel 8: JP33 (pin 1-2), JP31, JP32 (pin 2-3) short circuit ♦ UPPER PBX E&M channel 1: JP12 (pin 2-3), JP10, JP11 (pin 1-2) short circuit E&M channel 2: JP15 (pin 2-3), JP13, JP14 (pin 1-2) short circuit E&M channel 3: JP18 (pin 2-3), JP16, JP17 (pin 1-2) short circuit E&M channel 4: JP21 (pin 2-3), JP19, JP20 (pin 1-2) short circuit E&M channel 5: JP24 (pin 2-3), JP22, JP23 (pin 1-2) short circuit E&M channel 6: JP27 (pin 2-3), JP25, JP26 (pin 1-2) short circuit E&M channel 7: JP20 (pin 2-3), JP28, JP29 (pin 1-2) short circuit E&M channel 8: JP33 (pin 2-3), JP31, JP32 (pin 1-2) short circuit Type 5 ♦ LOWER and UPPER PBX E&M channel 1: JP12, JP10, JP11 (pin 2-3) short circuit E&M channel 2: JP15, JP13, JP14 (pin 2-3) short circuit E&M channel 3: JP18, JP16, JP17 (pin 2-3) short circuit E&M channel 4: JP21, JP19, JP20 (pin 2-3) short circuit E&M channel 5: JP24, JP22, JP23 (pin 2-3) short circuit E&M channel 6: JP27, JP25, JP26 (pin 2-3) short circuit E&M channel 7: JP20, JP28, JP29 (pin 2-3) short circuit E&M channel 8: JP33, JP31, JP32 (pin 2-3) short circuit

38

DS200 Installation Guide

I.4.H. INSTALLATION OF THE EVM200L MODULE Integration of the EVM200L module to the system is the same as that of the EX200 cards. However, there are two points that differ from the case for the EX200 modules: 1) No cabling is needed for EVM200L installation, 2) EVM-FL Flash ROM Auto Attendant message module or EVM-DL, DRAM voice mail module can be installed on the EVM200L module in order to increase the capacity of Auto Attendant or voice mail. On the EVM200L card, there are two slots in which the EVM-FL card can be installed and there are four slots in which the EVM-DL card can be installed. Figure – 15 shows locations of those slots on the card:

Figure – 15 The EVM-FL or EVM-DL cards can be installed in the slots reserved for them without respect to any order. After the installation of EVM-FL or EVM-DL is over, hold the module upright and make sure the corners in the rear fit lower and upper plastic slot, then push it forward in the slot slowly and cautiously. You need to push a little bit harder so that the connector for backplane connection fits, which is at the back of the EVM200L card. In this final step, push the module by gently pressing the latches upward / downward, which are at the top and bottom of the card cover and make sure the module fits completely. Check if the card fixing clicks that are over the card cover latches have fit to the holes on the chassis. Card latch that has not fit appears as in Figure –10. In case it would be necessary to remove the module following the first installation, pull the module by pressing the latches at the top and bottom of the card cover to disconnect it from the backplane. Then, pull it until it gets out of the exchange.

I.5. THE FINAL PREPARATIONS Upon completion of all those operations, connect the computer to the system, to which the ADMIN200 has been loaded. For this, connect one end of the computer cable, which comes with DS200, to the RS232 output on the DS200 CPUKON card. As for the other end of the cable, connect it to the related serial port on the computer. In addition to that, you need to connect an LT200 (-H) or FT20 Feature Telephone set as the operator telephone in order to watch the tests closely that would be carried out on the system. For this, plug the two-pin end of the cable, which comes with DS200 with a two-pin 39

DS200 Installation Guide connector at one end and with telephone connection box on the other, into one of the KTS ports that are on the DS200 CPUKON card. Additionally, connect the first extension of the first EX200 (0/16) card (blue-white pair) to the red and green ends of the connection box that is at the other end of that cable. Details about those connections have been explained in the guides of the related telephones and in the ADMIN200 guide.

40

DS200 Installation Guide

II. PUTTING THE SYSTEM ON LINE After all the cards have been installed, the system is ready to be powered. The methods for properly powering the system have been listed below for different system configurations:

II.1. SINGLE-RACK, WALL-TYPE SYSTEM 1) Make sure the entire cables in the rack have been connected properly. 2) Check if the mains and battery switches on the SPS200 module are off. 3) Connect the mains cord to the SPS200 module and then plug it into an outlet of the premise that has been properly grounded. 4) Connect the batteries (if battery connection is to be made) to the battery connectors of the SPS200 module. 5) Turn on the mains switch on the SPS200 module. 6) Turn on the battery switch on the SPS200 module.

II.2. TWO-RACK WALL-TYPE SYSTEM 1) Make sure the entire inner-rack and inter-rack connections have been made properly. 2) Check if the mains and battery switches on the entire SPS200 modules are off. 3) Connect the mains cords to the SPS200 modules and then plug them into an outlet of the premise that has been properly grounded. 4) Connect the batteries (if battery connection is to be made) to the battery connectors of the first SPS200 module (Note that no connection shall be made to the second SPS200 module.) 5) Turn on the mains switches on the SPS200 modules. 6) Turn on the battery switch that is on the SPS200 module to which the batteries have been connected.

II.3. CABINET-TYPE SYSTEM 1) Make sure the entire inner-rack and inter-rack connections have been made properly. 2) Check, if the primary mains switch, which is on the control panel of the cabinet, is off. 3) Check, if the primary battery switch, which is on the control panel of the cabinet, is off. 4) Check if the mains and battery switches on the entire SPS200 modules are off.

41

DS200 Installation Guide 5) Plug the mains cords of the entire SPS200 modules into the mains outlets that are on the control panel of the cabinet. 6) Plug the mains cord that comes from the mains outlets on the control panel of the cabinet into an outlet of the premise that has been properly grounded. Since the primary mains switch is protected with a fuse of 10 A, the mains outlet of the premise must be protected with a higher-rate fuse. 7) Connect the batteries (if battery connection is to be made) to the battery connection points on the cabinet. 8) Make the connection from the primary battery switch to the first of the SPS200 battery connectors (Note that the battery connection is not made to the entire SPS200 modules.) 9) Turn on the entire mains switches on the SPS200 modules, beginning with the SPS200 module in the first rack. 10) Turn on the battery switch that is on the SPS200 module to which the batteries have been connected. 11) Turn on the primary mains switch that is on the control panel of the cabinet. 12) Turn on the primary battery switch that is on the control panel of the cabinet. 13) Turn on the two fan switches that are on the control panel of the cabinet. The fans must be working while the system is in operation.

II.4. TWO-CABINET SYSTEM 1) Make sure the inner-rack, inter-rack and inter-cabinet connections have been made properly. 2) Check if the primary mains switches that are on the control panels of the cabinets are off. 3) Check if the primary battery switches that are on the control panels of the cabinets are off. 4) Check if the mains and battery switches on the entire SPS200 modules are off. 5) Plug the mains cords of the entire SPS200 modules into the mains outlets that are on the control panels of the cabinets. 6) Plug the mains cords that come from the mains outlets on the control panels of the cabinets into outlets of the premise that have been properly grounded. Since the primary mains switch is protected with a fuse of 10 A, the mains outlet of the premise must be protected with a higher-rate fuse. 7) Connect the batteries (if battery connection is to be made) to the primary battery connection points on the first cabinet. 8) Make the connection from the battery switch to the first of the SPS200 battery connectors (Note that the battery connection is not made to the entire SPS200 modules and it is made only for one cabinet.) 9) Turn on the entire mains switches on the SPS200 modules, beginning with the SPS200 module in the first rack. 10) Turn on the battery switch that is on the SPS200 module to which the batteries have been connected. 11) Turn on the primary mains switch that is on the control panel of the second cabinet. 42

DS200 Installation Guide 12) Turn on the primary mains switch that is on the control panel of the first cabinet. 13) Turn on the primary battery switch that is on the control panel of the first cabinet. 14) Turn on the fan switches that are on the control panels of the cabinets. The fans must be working while the system is in operation. After being powered, the system carries out a series of automatic tests in order to check the current configuration. Beginning with the card in the rightmost slot, two LEDs that are on the front plastic panel of each card start to light in a row. This action begins with the bottom rack. After the entire LEDs have begun to light, the message “connecting” appears on LCD screen of LT200 (-H) or FT20 feature telephone that is connected to the system. Once that message disappears, the system is ready to operate.

*

WARNING

1) In order to turn on and off a cabinet-type system, use the mains and battery switches that are in front of the cabinet. 2) The correct way of powering the system is putting the batteries on line after turning the system on. 3) The correct way of shutting down the system is putting the batteries off line before turning the system off.

43

DS200 Installation Guide

III. TESTING THE SYSTEM AND TROUBLESHOOTING BASIC PROBLEMS It would be useful to test the fundamental characteristics of the exchange, after it has been put on line. It would be even more useful to detect some possible errors in advance, if those tests are done before the line cables are attached to the main distribution frame. When the system has come on line, it detects the configuration by carrying out an automatic scan as the first step, as described in the previous section. Visual test, which is the first test step, should be done after that scan. When the scanning is over, the LEDs are checked, which are in the fronts of the entire modules that have been installed in the system. Modules and normal LED actions are as follows:

Module

LED

CPU200

It blinks.

Redundant CPU200

It blinks fast.

CC Enable

It blinks.

UTIL200

It blinks.

Module

Upper LED

Lower LED

EX200 (1)

It is on

It is on.

EVM200L

It is on.

It blinks.

Module

- 48 VDC LED

+ 5 VDC LED

- 5 VDC LED

SPS248

It is on.

It is on.

It is on.

Module

VOUT

FAULT

MAINS POWER

SPS200 (2)

It is on.

It is off.

It is on.

(1) Since EX200 (1S2/0) and EX200 (1R2/0) modules have no CON line connection card, they do not have LEDs on their front sides, either. LEDs of those modules are on the cards themselves. (2) In case there are more than one SPS200 in the system, while the LEDs of one or more SPS200’s are on, the others may be off. This signifies that only the SPS200’s with the LEDs on carry the system load at that moment. The ones with the LEDs off will automatically come on line in case the load increases. If anything except the facts indicated in the table and the notes above is observed, it is probable that there is a problem in the system. If the upper LED of one of the EX200 modules are not on, then this may indicate that there is a short-circuit in the line cables that are connected to that module. In such a case, you should check for any short circuit in the cable. If the FAULT LED on SPS200 is on, then there is an element in the system, which consumes excessive power. In such a case, turn the system off and check for any mistakes that may have been made during installation.

44

DS200 Installation Guide If you observe problems with LEDs of the CPU200, CC Enable, UTIL200 and SPS248 modules, then shut down the system and replace the modules whose LEDs are off with new ones. Put the system on line again, afterwards. If the lower LED of any of the EX200 or EVM200L cards is off, then it is likely that there is a problem with that card. In that case: 1) Cut the power to that card through the operator telephone by programming, 2) Replace the card with a new one, 3) Power the new card, again, through the operator telephone by programming. The programming procedure for that purpose is as follows: a) Dial 877777 through the operator telephone and wait for the dial tone, b) Cut the power to the card by dialing 800950, then the slot number of the card and finally 0. At that point, you are supposed to receive either the dial tone or the error tone. c) Remove the card from its slot by disconnecting it from the line connection card and take it out of the system. d) Place the new card into the slot by plugging the line connection card. e) Power the card, again, through the operator telephone, by dialing 800950, then the slot number of the card and finally 1. NOTE: In order to power the card again, as explained above, a period of at least 30 seconds must pass after the power is cut.

Sixth rack

94

80

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

90

91

92

93

Fifth rack

78

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

Fourth rack

SECOND CABINET

The table below illustrates card locations and slot numbers for a 6-rack system:

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

45

Third rack

46

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

Second rack

30

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

First rack

FIRST CABINET

DS200 Installation Guide

14

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

UTIL200 cards EX200 or EVM200 cards CPU200 card (no slot number) CC Enable card (no slot number) After the visual test and the necessary arrangements are completed, it would be useful to check the system in general simply. Choosing extensions from various racks randomly and then arranging phone calls among them by establishing connections would be sufficient to test the fundamental structure of the system. At this point, it becomes a necessity to have a good command of the numbering plan of the system. Therefore, it would be wise to run the ADMIN200 program and review the numbering plan through the “Configuration” window. Once the ADMIN200 program runs and the “Configuration” window opens, numbers of the lines on a card can be viewed as long as the mouse cursor is placed onto the related card and the left mouse button is kept pressed. When the system test is over, shut down the system, make the line connections over the main distribution pane, complete the entire accessory connections and then put the system on line again for use. Afterwards, the related programming must be done preferably through the ADMIN200 program.

*

WARNING

All the programmed parameters must be saved in the non-volatile memory of the system and then they should be backed-up to a PC through ADMIN200.

46

DS200 Installation Guide NOTE: The following operations should be taken care of, not to face a dust contamination problem that may cause a decrease in the performance of the DS200 system. Therefore it is recommended that the following explanations are read carefully and applied. Concerning the fan filter, which is used to protect the system from dust that may leak through the air shutter under the DS200 cabinet the technical personnel should be careful about these points: •

The filter must be removed from its slot and cleaned every month, and changed every six months. (These time periods may vary depending on the environmental conditions of the installarion place.)

•

The covers of the system cabinet must always be closed.

•

The grids of the system air fans must not be closed with other materials.

•

The diameter of the holes on grids is a small value in accordance with EN60950 standard so the grids may be filled with dust and blocked in time. So, the system supervisor should check these grids, if it is necessary he should turn off the fans, remove the upper cover and clean them with spraying air or using a hard bristle brush.

47

PROGRAMMING GUIDE

The products may have some differences from the functionality written in this guide according to the hardware revision or software version.

TABLE OF CONTENTS I. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................1 I.1. GENERAL DEFINITIONS ....................................................................................................................2 I.2. NUMBERING PLAN............................................................................................................................2 I.3. ABBREVIATIONS ................................................................................................................................2 II. PROGRAMMING MODE............................................................................................................................3 Entering The Programming Mode: ......................................................................................................3 Exiting The Programming Mode:.........................................................................................................3 Entering Program: ...............................................................................................................................3 III. GENERAL EXCHANGE PROGRAMS........................................................................................................4 Saving Program Parameters Into Memory: ........................................................................................4 System Supervisor: ..............................................................................................................................4 Initialization Of The System Tables: ....................................................................................................4 Automatic Night Mode: ........................................................................................................................5 Weekly Automatic Features:................................................................................................................6 External Music On Hold: ......................................................................................................................6 ACD Activation:.....................................................................................................................................7 PBX Group Parameters: ......................................................................................................................7 Ring Count For PBX Group Unanswered Calls: ..................................................................................8 Auto-Dialer Attempt Count:.................................................................................................................8 Ring-Back Tone To Be Heard During Calls Through ACD Lines: .......................................................9 Line Connection After A Call:...............................................................................................................9 ACD Extension:...................................................................................................................................10 CRL Filter Time:.................................................................................................................................10 Tone Detection Setting:......................................................................................................................10 GPBX Mode:........................................................................................................................................11 Tone During Waiting: .........................................................................................................................11 Call Record Status: ............................................................................................................................12 Call Recording Device:.......................................................................................................................12 Serial Printer Status: .........................................................................................................................13 Serial Printer Language: ...................................................................................................................13 Equal Loads On Lines: .......................................................................................................................13 Serial Printer Format: .......................................................................................................................14 Number Of Dialled Digits:..................................................................................................................14 Deactivating Number Of Dialled Digits:.............................................................................................15 ACD Response Time: .........................................................................................................................15 Call Recording In Network Mode:......................................................................................................15 Call Wait Duration: (Waiting Time Of Call In Park)............................................................................15 Relay-On Duration: ............................................................................................................................16 Duration For Automatic Hold:............................................................................................................16 Tone Duration To Drop Lines:............................................................................................................17 Line Call Restricted Prefix Table:......................................................................................................17 Permitted Line Call Prefix Table: ......................................................................................................18 Call Recording Type : (Defining The Local / STD / ISD Code For Call Recording)............................19 Erasing Prefixes:................................................................................................................................20 Phone Lock Level Definition: .............................................................................................................20 Forced Account Code User: ...............................................................................................................21 Deleting Forced Account Code User: ................................................................................................22 Deleting All Forced Account Code Users: .........................................................................................22 Forced Account Code User Status Query: .........................................................................................22 Query Of All Forced Account Users’ States:......................................................................................22 Account Code Use Permission: .........................................................................................................22 Local Pager Connection:....................................................................................................................23 EEPROM Table Reset:........................................................................................................................23 Analog Extension Hook Flash Duration:............................................................................................24

Signalization Parameters: .................................................................................................................24 Signalization Parameter Printout:.....................................................................................................25 DTMF Signal Parameters: .................................................................................................................25 Tone Cadence Detection Activation: ..................................................................................................26 Tone Cadence To Drop Lines: ............................................................................................................26 CRL Capacity Query: ..........................................................................................................................27 Group Parameters Query:..................................................................................................................27 IV. EXTENSION PROGRAMS ...................................................................................................................... 29 Intrusion Authority Level: ..................................................................................................................29 Line Access Authority Level:..............................................................................................................29 Extension Line Access Group : ..........................................................................................................30 Call Time-Out:....................................................................................................................................31 “*”, “#” Keys / Hook Flash Authority:................................................................................................32 Voice Mail Leave/ Lock Authority: .....................................................................................................33 Hotel Room Access Permission: .......................................................................................................33 Call Pick Up Authority:.......................................................................................................................34 Follow Me Authority: ..........................................................................................................................34 Call Back Authority: ...........................................................................................................................35 Access Authority From DISA Line To An External Line: ...................................................................35 Call Transfer Authority For Hot Line Users: .....................................................................................35 Incoming Call-Exempt Extension: .....................................................................................................36 Outgoing Call-Exempt Extension:......................................................................................................36 Automatic Password: .........................................................................................................................37 Call Record-Exempt Extension:.........................................................................................................37 Pager Code:........................................................................................................................................38 The Language Of The System Messages:..........................................................................................38 Voice Mail Warning: ...........................................................................................................................39 Date/Time Info With Voice Mail:.........................................................................................................39 Guest-Personnel / Fax Selection:......................................................................................................40 Hot Line: .............................................................................................................................................40 Direct-Call Hot Line : .........................................................................................................................41 Hotel Room Definition:.......................................................................................................................42 Local Extension:.................................................................................................................................43 Extension PBX Group: ........................................................................................................................44 Uniform Call Distribution Among Extensions: ..................................................................................45 Voice Mail Message Leave Authority: ................................................................................................45 Inaccessible Extension Through DISA / ACD Line: ...........................................................................46 Line Drop Exempt Extension: ............................................................................................................46 Busy Extension Signalling Exempt Extension: ..................................................................................47 Extended Secretary Group:................................................................................................................47 ACD Parameters: ...............................................................................................................................48 ISDN Fax Selection: ...........................................................................................................................49 Call Pick Up Group:............................................................................................................................49 PBX Group Parameters On Extension Basis: ....................................................................................50 PBX Group Parameters On PBX Group Basis: ..................................................................................51 Toll Account Query:............................................................................................................................52 Toll Account: ......................................................................................................................................52 V. LINE PROGRAMS................................................................................................................................... 54 Line Status & Signalling: ...................................................................................................................54 Line Parameters: ...............................................................................................................................54 Line Access Groups: ..........................................................................................................................55 Line PBX Group: .................................................................................................................................56 DISA / ACD Line Selection: ................................................................................................................57 Specific ACD Menus: ..........................................................................................................................58 DISA Parameters: ..............................................................................................................................59 Line-Line Connection Time-Out: .......................................................................................................59 Dialed Number Check / DISA – E&M Connection Time-Out: ............................................................60 Line Pricing Information:...................................................................................................................61 Transmit/Receive Voice Level: ..........................................................................................................62 Dial Tone Check: ................................................................................................................................62

Equal Load On Line PBX Group: ........................................................................................................63 Call Record-Exempt Line: .................................................................................................................64 Signalling After Line Connection:......................................................................................................64 VI. PRI ISDN / R2 LINE PROGRAMS .......................................................................................................... 66 Ringing Extension: .............................................................................................................................66 Ringing Extension Deletion:...............................................................................................................67 ACD Menus:........................................................................................................................................67 DISA / ACD Line Selection: ................................................................................................................68 DISA Parameters: ..............................................................................................................................70 Line Number Root:.............................................................................................................................70 VII. BRI ISDN LINE PROGRAMS ................................................................................................................ 72 Ringing Extension: .............................................................................................................................72 Ringing Extension Deletion:...............................................................................................................72 ACD Menus:........................................................................................................................................72 DISA / ACD Line Selection: ................................................................................................................73 DISA Parameters: ..............................................................................................................................74 VIII. E&M LINE PROGRAMS....................................................................................................................... 76 Tone Reception / Transmission: ........................................................................................................76 Call Forwarding On E&M Lines: ........................................................................................................77 IX. EVM200 AUTO ATTENDANT & VOICE MAIL PROGRAMS ..................................................................... 78 EVM200 Card Programming Mode: ...................................................................................................79 Erasing All ACD Messages: ...............................................................................................................79 Erasing All System Messages: ..........................................................................................................80 ACD And System Message Recording: ..............................................................................................80 Listening To The ACD And System Messages: ..................................................................................85 Erasing The ACD And System Messages: .........................................................................................86 Copying Messages Among Cards: .....................................................................................................86 Copying All ACD Messages Among Cards:........................................................................................87 IX.1. GENERAL PARAMETERS ...............................................................................................................88 Constant ACD Messages:...................................................................................................................88 Total Penalty: .....................................................................................................................................89 Changing Language: ..........................................................................................................................90 Time-Out Durations: ..........................................................................................................................91 IX.2. THE MENU PARAMETERS AND THE ACTION TABLE ...................................................................92 Menu Entry Message: ........................................................................................................................93 Action Table: ......................................................................................................................................94 Menu Ringing Extension: ...................................................................................................................98 EVM200 Voice Level Settings: ............................................................................................................99 X. LAN ADAPTOR CARD PROGRAMS ...................................................................................................... 100 Network Settings: ............................................................................................................................100 XI. VOIP CARD PROGRAMS...................................................................................................................... 101 Network Settings .............................................................................................................................101 XII. LEAST COST ROUTING/NETWORKING PROGRAMS......................................................................... 102 LCR Activation:.................................................................................................................................102 LCR Route Access Authority:...........................................................................................................102 XIII. FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PROGRAMS............................................................................................... 104 Clearing Extension And Line Access Codes: ...................................................................................104 Clearing Feature Access Codes: .....................................................................................................104 Flexible Numbering Reset:..............................................................................................................104 Extension/Line Access Code:...........................................................................................................105 Changing Access Codes Of A Group Of Extensions Or Lines: .........................................................106 Feature Access Code: ......................................................................................................................106 Access Code According To The Physical Location: .........................................................................109 SUMMARY: .......................................................................................................................................109 XIV. MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ............................................................................................................ 111 Stopping Alarm: ...............................................................................................................................111 Powering A Card On/Off:..................................................................................................................111 Clearing The Non-Volatile Memory: ................................................................................................112 Card Configuration:..........................................................................................................................113 Communication Query: ....................................................................................................................113

Dynamic Parameter Query: .............................................................................................................115 Card Version Query: .........................................................................................................................115 CC Version Query: ............................................................................................................................115 Analog and Rural Extension Card Version Query:...........................................................................115 ISDN BRI and Digital Extension Card Version Query: .....................................................................116 VoIP, TWT, PRI ISDN, BRI ISDN And R2 Line Card Version Query:.................................................116 Analog and LB Line Card Version Query: ........................................................................................116 Extension Parameter Query: ...........................................................................................................117 Version Query Of Karel Feature Phones And DSS Modules: ..........................................................117 Feature Table Query: .......................................................................................................................117 PRI ISDN Card As System Clock Source: ........................................................................................118 External Clock:.................................................................................................................................118 Line Monitoring: ...............................................................................................................................119 Resetting The System By Preserving Its Parameters:....................................................................119 XV. REMOTE PROGRAMMING ................................................................................................................. 121 Activation Of The Remote Programming :......................................................................................121 Important Notes For The Technicians Who Will Make Use Of The Remote Programming Feature: ..........................................................................................................................................................121 Exiting The Remote Programming Mode ........................................................................................122

DS200 Programming Guide

I. INTRODUCTION Thanks to the rich software structure of the system, several parameters related to the operation of the DS200 exchange can be modified according to customer requirements. The modifications are done through program codes. The system can be programmed in two ways. The first one is the programming through telephone of the system supervisor (by default the first extension of the system, extension 1110). A different extension can be assigned through programming by the system supervisor. The second way is using a PC to program the system. All of the programs that can be entered through the system supervisor’s telephone can be entered through a PC by using the DS200 System Administrator software (ADMIN200) program, a method, which is much easier than the program entrance through phone, thus it is recommended. In addition to that, some parameters that can be modified through the ADMIN200 program cannot be modified through programming with phone (eg. ring and tone cadence.) The details of this kind of parameters can be found in ADMIN200 guide. ADMIN200 program is given with the system as a standard tool. The details about the setup and use of this program can be found its own guide. The system cannot be programmed during normal operation mode. It should be switched to programming mode by the System Supervisor. Following all the modifications of parameters in programming mode, those modifications must be saved in the memory and then the programming mode should be exited. Unless the modifications with the parameters are saved, the parameters will have to be programmed again, in case of any power failure. The structure of the program codes is standard. For all programs, there is a six-digit program code, followed by parameter codes. Details about those parameters have been included in the descriptions of the related programs. However, there is an important point about extension and line access codes that should be emphasized: In several programs, extension or line access codes must be entered as a parameter. One should be careful, during the entry of the extension or line numbers while programming, of the fact that the line numbers in the system are four digits by default but can be changed to any value up to 8 digits. Additionally, the parameters of extensions or lines in groups can be modified through single program code entrance, thanks to the group programming feature, which has been designed for time saving for the programmer during the programming of extension or line parameters. It is directly apparent from the program code whether or not the group programming option exists. Codes of the programs with no group programming option begin with the prefix 800. Codes of the programs with group programming option begin with the prefix 801 and the group program codes begin with 802 prefix. That situation has been indicated in the form of program codes within each program description. In the following pages of this guide, the program codes related to various modules of the DS200 system have been presented in the form of groups sorted with respect to program code order. The purpose is making it easy for the programmer to find the programs for the related module, as well as providing conceptual integrity. It is recommended that all of the programs below should be read and all the codes to be entered during the programming should be determined prior to programming.

1

DS200 Programming Guide

I.1. GENERAL DEFINITIONS Explanations of the programs have been presented in a constant format in this guide. Heading Line: Name of the program is stated. Definition: Brief explanation of the program is stated. This section is omitted in some programs, since it has been included in the sections for necessary explanations and parameter definitions. Program Codes: Some extension and line parameters can be programmed by two alternative ways. One of them is programming of a single line (extension or external line) and the other is programming of line group. Thus, parameters related to an extension or line can be programmed either one by one or in groups. In this section, both “Singular Program Code” and “Group Program Code” are stated. Parameters: Parameters related to programs are stated with their definitions. Some of the parameters are “conditional” ones that are to be entered in connection with some previous parameters. Those conditional parameters are indicated in braces: { } Cancellation: The codes that will cancel the given program are defined here. Please note that this section is used only when the related program has different activation and cancellation codes. Default value: Factory default initial values of program parameters are stated here. Notes: Additional constraints, warnings and information about the program are stated.

I.2. NUMBERING PLAN DS200 has four-digit extension and line numbers starting from 1110 as factory default. The extension and line numbers can be modified through the Flexible Numbering facility of the system, in a range of minimum 1 and maximum 8 figures. While programming, in case an extension or line number is needed, the final value of that number is used.

I.3. ABBREVIATIONS In the table below, the meanings of the abbreviations used in this guide are given. DP

Dial Pulse

DTMF

Dual Tone Multi Frequency

DISA

Direct Inward Subscriber Access

ACD

Automatic Call Distributor

ISDN

Integrated Services Digital Network

PRI

30 - channel ISDN line (Primary Rate Interface)

BRI

2 - channel ISDN line (Basic Rate Interface)

E&M

Ear & Mouth 2

DS200 Programming Guide

II. PROGRAMMING MODE Entering The Programming Mode: 877777 In order to set the exchange into the programming mode, that code must be dialed on system supervisor phone. Otherwise, the exchange will not accept the dialed program codes and it will signal error tone to the programmer.

Notes The phone through which the programming will be performed is the one with number 1110 that is connected to the first extension card in the first rack. This assignment can be changed by programming. Upon the system is set into the programming mode, if there is a Karel DSS200E module, which has been connected to the exchange, the “Pr” LED on the Busy Display Panel is lit.

Exiting The Programming Mode: 877778 After the programming of the exchange has been completed and all of the modifications have been saved to the memory, the exchange must be exited from the programming mode. Unless that code is dialed, the system will remain in the programming mode permanently, since there is no time limitation for that mode.

Entering Program: While entering the program, it’s essentially important to enter parameters in correct length. Otherwise, the program may be ineffective, or the system may not work as desired at all, due to the erroneous entry. Therefore, one should be careful about the length of parameters that have been indicated in the program definitions. As can be seen in definition sections, lengths of some parameters may be variable. If such parameters will be entered in a length that is shorter than the length indicated as the maximum number of digits, then they must be terminated with the “*” key. Because of that, the programming must be done with a DTMF phone. If the exchange has previously been programmed, the extension, whose phone the programming has been performed through, may not be authorized to use the key “*”. In spite of this fact, the key “*” may be used while entering the programs. Internal dial tone is received upon proper completion of the programming; otherwise, error tone is received. In such a case, the related program code should be re-entered.

3

DS200 Programming Guide

III. GENERAL EXCHANGE PROGRAMS Saving Program Parameters Into Memory: 800000

Notes: After programming has been completed, the program codes and all of the parameters must be definitely saved into the non-volatile memory. Otherwise, recent values of the program parameters will be lost in case of a blackout or any other power failure.

System Supervisor: The system supervisor can be changed by the code below. The system supervisor sets the system into programming mode, enters programming codes, saves them, and then exits the programming mode.

800001 A

Parameters A

: The Extension access code

Default Value A = 1110

Notes The programming of the system can be done by the extension with the access code A only.

Initialization Of The System Tables: The code below sets the various system parameter tables to their initial forms.

800002 P

Parameters P

: 1

Resets Line Parameters and the parameters of Line Status and Signaling programs.

: 2

Resets Parameters of Access Group and Access Group Line Matching programs.

: 3

Cancels Remote Follow Me / Follow Me facilities activated by the extensions in Night Mode and PBX Groups defined for both Day and Night Modes.

4

DS200 Programming Guide : 4

Resets Line Call Authority Levels of all extensions, Restricted Prefixes and Permitted Prefixes.

: 8

Resets all system and user parameters, except the ones that belong to common and private pool numbers.

: 9

Resets all system and user parameters and clears common and private pool numbers.

Notes You can make use of that feature, if you want to program your exchange completely or partially. In case of a failure, before using any of those codes, check whether the failure is persistent or not by reloading the system parameters by 744. (The code 744 can be dialed by the operator only.)

Automatic Night Mode: The code below switches the system automatically between day and night modes at a predetermined time, every day. In night mode, some parameters of the system can be set different from day mode and hence efficiency can be improved during night mode. The parameters, which can be set different for day mode and night mode are: a) Line access authority levels of extensions b) PBX groups of extensions c) Common pool access authority of extensions d) Follow me authority of extensions e) Follow me no answer for extensions f)

Follow me for extensions

g) Line access groups for extensions h) Executive-secretary groups for extensions i)

Call pick up authority for extensions

j)

Line drop authority for extensions

k) Call back authority for extensions l)

Remote line access permission for extensions

m) Busy extension signalling authority for extensions n) Access groups for lines o) Ringing extensions for lines p) PBX groups for lines

800003 SSDD1 SSDD2 5

DS200 Programming Guide

Parameters HHMMS

: Automatic starting time of the Night Mode. Format: Hour (00-23) Minute (00-59).

HHMME

: Automatic Exiting time from the Night Mode. Format: Hour (00-23) Minute (00-59).

Cancellation 800003* should be dialed.

Default Value The program with code 800003 is not active.

Weekly Automatic Features: It allows setting the Night Mode active all day long in any desired day of the week.

800004 S G N

Parameters S

: 0

Night feature

G

: 0

Saturday

: 1

Sunday

: 2..6

Monday...Friday

: 0

The night feature is not active throughout the day.

: 1

The night feature is active throughout the day.

N

Default Value N = 0 for all days.

Notes When the Automatic Night Mode Program is entered, the Weekly Night Mode program is not deactivated at midnight; instead, it remains active until the termination time of the Automatic Night Mode program.

External Music On Hold: It allows an external music source connected to the system to be activated or deactivated, which the callers may listen to while they are on hold or parked.

800005 P

6

DS200 Programming Guide

Parameters P

: 0

External music is not active.

: 1

External music is active.

Default Value P=0

Notes You can let the lines you have put on hold listen to the music being broadcasted from an external music source like tape player or radio, which is connected to your exchange.

ACD Activation: It activates or deactivates the ACD feature.

800006 P

Parameters P

: 0

ACD is not active

: 1

ACD is active

Default Value P=0

Notes In order to activate the ACD, there must be at least one EVM200 card in the exchange.

PBX Group Parameters: 800007 P R S T

Parameters P

R

S

: 0

When a line call request is not answered, call transfer to the PBX group does not take place.

: 1

When a line call request is not answered, call transfer to the PBX group takes place.

: 0

When an internal call request is not answered, call transfer to the PBX group does not take place.

: 1

When an internal call request is not answered, call transfer to the PBX group takes place.

: 0

If the call request is from the line and the extension is busy, call transfer to the PBX group does not take place. 7

DS200 Programming Guide

T

: 1

If the call request is from the line and the extension is busy, call transfer to the PBX group takes place.

: 0

When an extension calls another and if the called extension is busy, call transfer to the PBX group does not take place.

: 1

When an extension calls another and if the called extension is busy, call transfer to the PBX group takes place.

Default Value P=1, R=1, S=1, T=1.

Notes All parameters defined by this program are valid for all groups defined by the Extension PBX Group program.

Ring Count For PBX Group Unanswered Calls: That program defines the number of rings, after which a call request coming to a PBX group is transferred to the next extension if it is not answered.

800008 P

Parameters P

: 1..8

Ring count

Default Value P=3.

Notes The parameter defined by this program is valid for all groups defined by the Extension PBX Group program.

Auto-Dialer Attempt Count: That program defines how many times a number will be called when the auto-dialer is activated.

800009 P

Parameters P

: 01..16

Ring Count

Default value P=15.

8

DS200 Programming Guide

Notes The number defined by that program should not exceed any number prescribed by the authorities in any country in which the exchange is used.

Ring-Back Tone To Be Heard During Calls Through ACD Lines: That program defines the structure of the ring cadence that will be heard during the ringing of the called extension upon dialing a valid extension number by someone calling through Auto Attendant or DISA line.

800010 P

Parameters P

: 1

The caller hears music.

: 0

The caller hears normal ring-back tone.

Default Value P=0.

Notes Considering the possibility of normal ring-back tone confused with the standard CO cadences, it will be useful to broadcast music instead of ring-back tone.

Line Connection After A Call: That program defines whether an extension will directly receive a dial tone after a conversation is over.

800011 P

Parameters P

: 0

Dial tone connection.

: 1

Error tone connection.

Default Value P=0.

Notes 1. When P = 1, the extension will receive error tone, instead of dial tone, upon termination of a call. In that case, s/he is supposed to hang up and than lift the handset again, in order to receive a dial tone. 2. That program is suitable especially for rural-type exchange applications.

9

DS200 Programming Guide

ACD Extension: If an external automatic call distributor system is connected to the system, this program defines the first extension that is psychically connected to this ACD.

800012 A

Parameters A

: The extension access code.

Notes The extensions connected to ACD are put in the same PBX group and hence it is enough to define only the first extension of the PBX group as the ACD extension.

CRL Filter Time: This program determines the time for the system to start recording the external calls.

800013 P

Parameters P

: 00…90

The system starts recording the call P seconds after the dialled digits are set to the external line.

Default Value P=10.

Tone Detection Setting: This program determines the operation of 801212-coded Dial Tone Check program.

800014 P

Parameters P

: 0

801212-coded program works with default settings.

: 1

801212 code defines the duration during which dial tone is checked after ‘8’ is dialed on external line.

Default Value P=0

Notes Some PSTN exchanges produce another dial tone between the first and second digits; if the first dialed digit on the external line is ‘8’. If P = 1 is activated, this tone is waited for at most 10

DS200 Programming Guide the value defined by 801212 program. If dial tone is received within this period, the rest of the number is sent to the external line. If dial tone is not received within this period, the line is disconnected.

GPBX Mode: It activates GPBX mode in which call charges of extensions and lines can be controlled on a monthly basis.

800015 P

Parameters P

: 0

GPBX mode is not active.

: 1

GPBX mode is active.

Default Value P=0

Notes If the polarity is not reversed or a metering pulse is not received within the first minute, then external calls are terminated in GPBX mode. See 801199 coded Toll Account program for the details of call charge control of extensions and lines.

Tone During Waiting: This program determines the tone heard when the extension is waiting when the LCR route is applying “Dn” filter to the numbers he dialed.

800016 P

Parameters P

: 0

The extension receives silence as he is waiting for n seconds.

: 1

The extension receives ring back tone as he is waiting for n seconds

Default Value P = 0.

Notes This program is especially useful in case LCR is used for router connections. By P = 1, the caller receives ring back tone while the router is reaching the called party, hence the caller establish the call as a normal call.

11

DS200 Programming Guide

Call Record Status: That program defines the type of calls to be recorded.

800020 P

Parameters P

: 0

No recording

: 1

Only international outgoing calls are recorded.

: 2

Only long distance and international outgoing calls are recorded.

: 3

All outgoing calls on lines are recorded.

: 4

Unanswered incoming calls and all outgoing line calls are recorded.

: 5

All incoming and outgoing line calls are recorded.

: 6

Only internal calls are recorded.

: 7

All outgoing line calls and internal calls are recorded.

: 8

All calls are recorded.

Default Value P=3.

Notes In call records, IC appears next to incoming calls and U appears next to unanswered calls.

Call Recording Device: That program defines the call recording device as either a computer or a serial printer.

800021 P

Parameters P

: 0

Call recording device is a computer.

: 1

Call recording device is a serial printer.

: 2

Records of transferred calls are logged separately (only for serial printer).

Default Value P = 0.

12

DS200 Programming Guide

Notes In order to work with printer, the parameter 1 should be used. Moreover, according to the printer type, the code 800022 0 is used for activating and 800022 1 is used for stopping the printer. After 800021 2 has been entered, the code 800022 0 must be entered again and the printer must be set to on-line mode.

Serial Printer Status: That program is used for setting the printer into on-line or off-line mode for call record print-outs.

800022 P

Parameters P

: 0

The printer is set to on-line mode - activated.

: 1

The printer is set to off-line mode - stopped.

Default Value P = 1.

Serial Printer Language: That program defines the language of the printout taken from the printer as either Turkish or English.

800023 P

Parameters P

: 0

The printout is in Turkish.

: 1

The printout is in English.

Default Value P=0.

Equal Loads On Lines: Allows assigning equal load on lines for each line access group when extensions use Automatic line access feature. Especially useful to have equalized call charges on all lines.

800024 P R

13

DS200 Programming Guide

Parameters P

R

: 00

P parameter is valid for all line access groups.

: 01..31

P parameter is valid for specified line access group.

: 0

Equal load on lines is not active. The system accesses the lowest numbered line.

: 1

Equal load on lines is active. The least recently used line is accessed.

Default Value P=00 & R =0

Serial Printer Format: Allows setting the number of lines for the call records printing.

800025 P

Parameters P

: 0

Each call record is printed as two lines. A line can be at most 80 characters. The duration is printed in hh:mm format.

: 1

Each call record is printed in one line. The line can be at most 80 characters. The duration is printed in hh:mm format.

: 2

Each call record is printed as two lines. A line can be at most 85 characters. The duration is printed in hh:mm:ss format.

: 3

Each call record is printed in one line. The line can be at most 85 characters. The duration is printed in hh:mm:ss format.

Default Value P=0

Number Of Dialled Digits: Determines the number of dialed digits to be sent to the external line when this control is activated by the 80102 coded programming facility.

800026 P Q Parameters P

: 0…9

First digit of the dialled number.

Q

: 00…99

Number of digits to be sent to the external line.

Default Value For P=1 Q=3, for P=0 Q=11, for other digits Q=7.

14

DS200 Programming Guide

Deactivating Number Of Dialled Digits: Determines the number of dialed digits to be sent to the external line as 0.

800027

ACD Response Time: Through this program, it is possible to determine the response time of ACD for the incoming calls on the lines that are enabled with ACD usage by the 801204 coded programming facility.

800028 P Parameters P

: 0

ACD answers the call immediately.

: 1…7

ACD answers the calls after it rings P times.

Default Value P = 0.

Call Recording In Network Mode: Through this program, it is possible to determine whether the calls established through lines in network mode are recorded or not. (The network mode lines are the lines on which the numbers of dialed digits are not controlled by parameter value 1 of the 801208 coded program).

800029 P Parameters P

: 0

The calls established through these lines are not recorded.

: 1…7

The calls established through these lines are recorded.

Default Value P = 1.

Call Wait Duration: (Waiting Time Of Call In Park) That program defines the duration during which the parked calls will remain parked.

800030 T

Parameters T

: 03 .. 18 x 10 waiting duration in park in seconds

Default Value T = 06 15

DS200 Programming Guide

Notes When the waiting time is elapsed the call returns back to the parking extension.

Relay-On Duration: That program defines the duration during which the relay systems, which can be used for door opener controlling purpose in the system, are active.

800031 P T

Parameters P

T

: 0

First relay

: 1

Second relay

: ((00..63) + 1) x 0.1 relay-on duration in seconds

Default Value T=00

Duration For Automatic Hold: That program enables an incoming call to be put on hold automatically, in case it is not answered within a period specified by that code.

800033 T

Parameters T

: 01..99

A call that is not answered after T seconds is put on hold automatically.

: 00

Automatic hold is not active.

Default Value T = 00.

Notes 1- An incoming line call is answered automatically after T seconds if the operator is busy and the external party hears music (If the Music On Hold has not been activated, the caller receives wait tone.) The automatic hold feature has not been activated by default at the beginning. 2- If the call on hold is not answered within 2.5 minutes, then the line is disconnected. 3- The external calls that are on hold are in the queue of the operator or the ringing extension.

16

DS200 Programming Guide

Tone Duration To Drop Lines: With this program, the duration of the tone to be detected through the lines, when one of the parties hangs up his telephone in case of a line-line connection, is defined so that the lines can be dropped on time.

800034 T P R

Parameters T

: 0

Tone detector is dedicated to the lines with 15 seconds intervals.

: 1

Tone detector is dedicated to the lines with 100 msec intervals.

P

: 08..14

The duration to check the ON period of the tone.

R

: 5..8

The ON duration of the tone to be detected.

Default Value T= 0, P=11 & R=5

Notes 1- Example: The tone to be received from a line is assumed as 300 msec ON, 300 msec OFF, 300 msec ON, 300 msec OFF, 900 msec ON, 300 msec OFF then; Total tone duration = 300 + 300 + 300 + 300 + 900 + 300 = 2400 msec=2.4 sec Tone ON duration = 300 + 300 + 900 = 1500 msec=1.5 sec If P=11 & R=6 is set, then the system tries to detect a tone ON duration of 6 sec, within 11 seconds total tone duration. 2- When this program is used, one of the tone detectors of the system remains dedicated to the lines used for line-line connection and this may affect the performance of the system during high traffic. Therefore, if the cadence of the tone is known, it is recommended to use 800087 coded program instead of this one.

Line Call Restricted Prefix Table: It allows prefix definitions for different call levels in order to restrict line calls. Extensions cannot call, according to their line authority levels, the numbers starting with the prefixes defined for the corresponding levels.

800040 P T

Parameters P

: 1

Extensions with the local line call authority cannot call the numbers starting with the defined prefix.

: 2

Extensions with the long distance line call authority cannot call the numbers starting with the defined prefix. 17

DS200 Programming Guide : 3

Extensions with the international line call authority cannot call the numbers starting with the defined prefix.

: 4

Extensions whose authorities are for local line calls can call numbers starting with 0212 and 0216.

: 5, 6, 7, 8 General purpose levels T

: Prefix with at least 1 and at most 4 digits.

Default Value For P = 1, T = 0 For P = 2, T = 00 For P = 4, T = 0

Notes 1- Through that program, 8 numbers can be entered for each P value. Error ton is received upon any further attempt afterwards. 2- If the number to be entered into the table consists of less than 4 digits, it should be terminated with “*”. Besides, the program should also be terminated with “*” for each P and T value that has been entered. 3- Levels 5,6,7 and 8 can be established by entering desired numbers. In that case, desired extensions can be restricted to call numbers in desired regions by authorising through the program 801101. Example 1: 00 has been restricted for region 2 as default. In that case, when 800040 2 0212* is entered, both 00 and 0212 become restricted from now on. Example 2: By entering 800040 5 435*, 801101 1111 6 5, only the extension 1111 is restricted to call line numbers starting with 435. In that case, the extension 1111 can call all local, long distance and international numbers except the determined number.

Permitted Line Call Prefix Table: By defining prefixes for different line call authority levels, it enables calling the numbers starting with that prefix.

800041 P T

Parameters P

: 1

Extensions with the local line call authority can call the numbers starting with the defined prefix.

: 2

Extensions with the long distance line call authority can call the numbers starting with the defined prefix.

: 3

Extensions with the international line call authority can call the numbers starting with the defined prefix.

: 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 General purpose levels 18

DS200 Programming Guide T

: Prefix with at least 1 and at most 4 digits.

Default Value For P = 4, T= 0212 and T = 0216

Notes 1- Through that program, 8 numbers can be entered for each P value. Error tone is received upon any further attempt afterwards. 2- If the number to be entered into the table consists of less than 4 digits, it should be terminated with “*”. Besides, the program should also be terminated with “*” for each P and T value that has been entered. Example 1: Extensions, with local line call authority, of an exchange that is in Asian side of Istanbul, cannot normally call any number following an area code. Hence, they cannot call the European side of Istanbul, either, since the area code is different. However, the extensions with local call authority can be enabled to call numbers starting with 0212 (The area code of the European section) through the program 800041 1 0212. Example 2:

800041 1 051 * 800041 1 03 *

In that case, an extension with local line call authority can call long distance numbers starting with 051 and 03.

Call Recording Type : (Defining The Local / STD / ISD Code For Call Recording) That program allows modification of local (L), long distance (STD), international (ISD) codes, in order to define the types of calls that are to be listed during call recording.

800042 P T

Parameters P

T

: 1

Local line code

: 2

Long distance line code

: 3

International line code

: Number with at least 1 and at most 4 digits.

Default Value The long distance code : 0 The international code : 00

Notes 1- Through that program, 8 numbers can be entered for each P value. Error tone is received upon any further attempt afterwards. 19

DS200 Programming Guide 2- The local, long distance and international codes defined by that program should be entered into the corresponding fields of restricted prefixes table through the program with the code 800040, for the appropriate operation of the exchange. 3- If the number to be entered into the table consists of less than 4 digits, it should be terminated with “*”. Besides, the program should also be terminated with “*” for each P and T value that has been entered. Example : 800 042 3 09* 800 042 2 0* In that case, the long distance code becomes 0 and the international code becomes 09.

Erasing Prefixes: The prefixes defined by Line Call Restricted Prefix Table and Line Call Permitted Prefix Table or the L/STD/ISD codes can be erased through that program.

800043 P T

Parameters P

T

: 1

Restricted prefix table (800040)

: 2

Permitted prefix table (800041)

: 3

The L/STD/ISD codes (800042)

: 4

Phone lock levels (800044)

: Row number in the range 1...8

Notes If the parameter P is entered as 3, in that case: The local (L) code is erased for T=1. The long distance (STD) code is erased for T=2. The international (ISD) code is erased for T=3. Example: Upon entering 800043 1 2, the prefixes in the 2nd line of the restricted prefix table are erased.

Phone Lock Level Definition: It allows defining levels so that extensions can lock their telephones for different types of calls.

800044 P Q

20

DS200 Programming Guide

Parameters P

: 1…8

Lock level

Q

: Locked prefix

Notes 1- At most 8 locked prefix can be defines for a level. Each of these locked prefix is defined by separate entries of the program. 2- The locked prefix can be at most 4 digits. If the prefix is less than 4 digits, the code must be ended by *. e.g.: 800044 2 112 * 800044 2 03 * In that case, if an extension locks his telephone with level 2, he will not be able to dial numbers starting with 112 and 03.

Forced Account Code User: Thanks to that program, for cases when some telephone machines are used commonly, the persons using those telephones can be identified so that they can be separately restricted in senses of toll and call authorization.

800050 K S P T

Parameters K

: 000..999

The code to be entered by the user for the feature with the code 797.

S

: 0001..8191

The private password of the user

P

: 001..999

The number of pulse prices that can be consumed by the user

: 000

No pulse price limit

: 0..7

The line authority level for the user (see 800 040)

T

Notes 1- The codes and passwords defined by this program can be given to desired extensions. Those extensions can make phone calls by using any phone within the authority level determined by the customer feature with the code 797 until their pulse prices are all used up. 2- Extensions that are to make calls using those codes can do that by using the lines allocated for the 31st PBX group. 3- A user cannot make any further phone call by using that code after having used up all pulse prices allocated for her/him. Only after re-entering a new pulse quantity, can that code be used again.

21

DS200 Programming Guide 4- At the time when the number of pulse prices equals zero, if a call is going on, it is not interrupted. However, a user cannot make another call using that code.

Deleting Forced Account Code User: A user account can be deleting from the table through this program.

800051 K

Parameters K

: 000..999

The code to be entered by the user for the feature with the code 797.

Deleting All Forced Account Code Users: All of the forced account code user table is erased through this program.

800052

Forced Account Code User Status Query: The Account information of a user can be sent to a serial printer or can be logged to DS_DATA.BIN file through this program.

800053 K

Parameters K

: 000..999

The code to be entered by the user for the feature with the code 797.

Query Of All Forced Account Users’ States: The Account information of all users can be sent to a serial printer or can be logged to DS_DATA.BIN file through this program.

800054

Account Code Use Permission: All extensions which are not forced account code user are blocked to access lines with the Account Coded Call feature through this program. Only forced account code users can access lines by using Account Coded Call feature.

800055

22

DS200 Programming Guide

Local Pager Connection: Allows setting the port to which the PG100 Local Pager Base Unit is connected and the system monitoring messages are sent.

800061 P

Parameters P

: 0

PG100 connection is made to serial data (KTS) outputs on CPUKON card; all monitoring messages are sent to CPUKON card.

: 1

PG100 connection is made to DB-9 type output on the CPUKON card.

: 2

All data except for the call records are sent to the DB-9 type output on the CPUKON card.

Default Value P=0.

Notes 1- P can be set to 1, in order to reduce the excessive load on data line (KTS), especially if there are too many proprietary phone sets or DSS modules connected to that data line. 2- If P=2 is selected, all the data produced for monitoring purposes are sent to the DB-9 type output on the CPUKON card.

EEPROM Table Reset: The EEPROM data of cards, on which EEPROM modifications have been made by the ADMIN200 program, can be set to their factory defaults through this program.

800080 P

Parameters P

: Hardware type (3 digits) : 001

Analog and Rural Extension card

: 002

Analog Line (normal and expandable) card

: 016

E&M card

: 032

ISDN BRI (S0) Extension, Digital Extension and ISDN BRI (T0) Line cards

: 064

TWT, R2 and ISDN PRI (S2) Line cards

: 256

LB (Local Battery) Extension card

23

DS200 Programming Guide

Notes 1- After the EEPROM tables of the cards have been reset through that program, the cards must be turned off and then back on, so the default parameters can be loaded to them. (See Card On/Off program). 2- Please do not attempt to modify any EEPROM content in the system without consulting your authorized technical service. Otherwise your system can get out of order.

Analog Extension Hook Flash Duration: 800081 P

Parameters P

: 001..999

Hook flash duration for analog extensions in milliseconds.

Default Value P=600

Notes The hook flash duration determined by this program can be adjusted according to the hook flash durations generated by the Flash keys of the phones that are connected to the system.

Signalization Parameters: That program adjusts the signalization parameters of the E&M cards.

800082 P S T

Parameters P

: Table row number (2 digits) (see the table below)

S

: Table column number (single digit) (see the table below)

T

: Value of the parameter (3 digits) (see the table below)

Default Value Parameters for all lines have been presented in the table below: Parameter

Row number in the memory

Column number in the memory

Range

Multiplier

Default

Call time

20

0

2 - 254

X 5 ms.

20

Wink time

20

1

2 - 254

X 5 ms.

40

Close time

21

0

2 - 254

X 5 ms.

40

Wait time

21

1

2 - 254

X 5 ms.

40

Wait Before

21

2

2 - 254

X 40 ms.

125 24

DS200 Programming Guide Dialing time (for WS) Open time

21

3

2 - 254

Signalization for the 1st line

21

5

0-2

Signalization for the 2nd line

21

6

0–2

Signalization for the 3rd line

21

7

0–2

Signalization for the 4th line

21

8

0–2

Wait before dialing time (for IS and DS)

22

3

2 - 254

X 40 ms.

14

0 – WS 1 – DS 2 – IS

X 40 ms.

0

6

WS : Wink Start IS: Immediate Start DS: Delayed Start The meanings of those parameters have been explained in DS200 Technical Reference Guide.

Notes 1- Following the programming of the E&M parameters, all of the E&M cards must be powered off and back on, in order to load those parameters to the non-volatile memory fields on the E&M cards. 2- Once that program has been entered to define the E&M parameters, all those parameters will be valid for all of the E&M cards in the exchange, which has been powered off and on. Example: By 800082 21 5 001, the signalization type for the 1st line on the card is determined as Delayed Start.

Signalization Parameter Printout: The printout of the Signalization Parameter table of the E&M cards can be obtained from a printer through this program. The active parameters can be checked by that means.

800083

DTMF Signal Parameters: Through this program, limits of DTMF tones generated by the telephones of users can be defined.

800085 P Q R S T

25

DS200 Programming Guide

Parameters P

: 00…99

The minimum amplitude of a DTMF signal that the system can detect is Px18.5.

Q

: 00...99

The minimum ON duration of a DTMF signal that the system can detect is (Q+1)x6 + 10.

R

: 00…99

The minimum interval between two DTMF digits is (R+1)x6 –9.

S

: 00…99

The minimum ON duration of #/* keys signal that the system can detect is (S+1)x6 + 10.

T

: 00…99

The minimum interval between #/* keys and DTMF digits is (T+1)x6 –9.

Default Value P = 37, Q = 36, R = 30, S = 12, T = 12.

Notes Please do not attempt to enter this program without consulting your authorized technical service. Otherwise your system can get out of order.

Tone Cadence Detection Activation: Allows activating the tone cadence detection set by the “Tone Cadence To Drop Lines” program.

800086 02 When this code is entered the cadence is tried to be detected, otherwise no detection is made.

Tone Cadence To Drop Lines: With this program, the cadence of the tone to be detected through the lines, when one of the parties hangs up his telephone in case of a line-line connection, is defined so that the lines can be dropped on time. The cadence definition is made for four different tone field. Also two different tones can be defined.

800087 P O1 F1 O2 F2 O3 F3 O4 F4

Parameters P

: 6

Tone cadence definition 1

: 7

Tone cadence definition 2

O1

: First ON duration of the tone / 20 msec.

F1

: First OFF duration of the tone / 20 msec.

O2

: Second ON duration of the tone / 20 msec.

26

DS200 Programming Guide F2

: Second OFF duration of the tone / 20 msec.

O3

: Third ON duration of the tone / 20 msec.

F3

: Third OFF duration of the tone / 20 msec.

O4

: Fourth ON duration of the tone / 20 msec.

F4

: Fourth OFF duration of the tone / 20 msec.

Default Value O1, F1, O2, F2, O3, F3, F4= 010 & O4=030.

Notes 1- Example: If the cadence is 200 msec ON – 200 msec OFF / 200 msec ON– 200 msec OFF/ 200 msec ON– 200 msec OFF / 600 ms ON – 200 msec OFF then the code must be entered as: 800087 6 010 010 010 010 010 010 030 010 2- After entering this program, 800086 coded program must be entered to activate the tone detection. 3- If the cadence of the tone is not known in details then 800034 coded “Tone Duration To Drop The Lines” program can be used to define an average tone duration.

CRL Capacity Query: It allows querying the current status of the system’s CRL capacity when any call recording device is not connected to the system.

800981

Notes 1- When GPBX Mode is activated, if CRL capacity becomes full when any listing device is not connected to the system, all external calls are forbidden. 2- Once this code is dialled by the system supervisor, current and maximum call record capacity is sent to the LCD of his feature phone in the following format: 800981 | current call record capacity | maximum call record capacity

Group Parameters Query: It transfers parameters of PBX and call pick up groups to DS_DATA.BIN file.

800982 A P

27

DS200 Programming Guide

Parameters A

: The access code of the first extension in the group.

P

: 0

PBX group parameters are transferred.

: 1

Call pick up group parameters are transferred.

28

DS200 Programming Guide

IV. EXTENSION PROGRAMS Intrusion Authority Level: This program defines authority levels determining whether a phone conversation can be intruded in, in case the called extension is busy.

801100 A P

Singular program

802100 A1 A2 P

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 0..7

Authority level

Default Value P = 0 for all extensions

Notes 1- Extensions can intrude in conversations of extensions with lower authority levels only. 2- Extensions with the intrusion authority level 5 or more can make use of the Busy Line Drop feature with the code 798. 3- When an extension that has activated Do Not Disturb feature is called by another extension with a higher intrusion authority level, the Do Not Disturb feature does not function. 4- When an extension calls another one with lower intrusion authority level, the telephone of the called extension rings with a different cadence.

Line Access Authority Level: This program determine whether an extension will be granted with the call permission according to type of the calls. Since the program can be entered separately in night and day modes, the authority levels can be defined differently for night and day.

801101 A P {T}

Singular program

802101 A1 A2 P {T} Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group 29

DS200 Programming Guide A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 0

Only intercom calls are permitted.

: 1

Intercom, local and restricted common pool calls are permitted.

: 2

Intercom, local, long distance and restricted common pool calls are permitted.

: 3

Intercom, local, long distance, international and all common pool calls are permitted.

: 4

Intercom and all common pool calls are permitted.

: 5

Intercom, local and all common pool calls are permitted.

: 6

Extension cannot call the numbers in the region specified with the line authority table.

: 4,5,6,7,8

The values that can be entered in order to determine the restricted or permitted numbers defined by the Line Call Restricted Prefix Table (800 040) and the Line Call Permitted Prefix Table (800 041). (That parameter can be entered only when the value of the parameter P is 6.)

T

Default Value All extensions have 0 authority level.

Notes 1- Extensions with restricted common pool authority levels are permitted to call common pool numbers that are only within their authority levels. 2- The basic line call authority levels of the extensions are defined for the values of the parameter P in the range 1 to 5. Some additional permissions or restrictions can also be defined by setting P to 6. As an example, assume that the following programs are entered: 801 101 1113 2 801 101 1113 6 7 800 040 7 12* 800 041 7 0090 Information about the last two codes were presented in previous pages. In that case, the extension 1113 can call long distance numbers and the numbers starting with 0090; however, s/he cannot call the ones starting with 12.

Extension Line Access Group : This program defines extension groups in order to allocate determined lines to those groups.

801102 A G

Singular program

802102 A1 A2 G

Group program 30

DS200 Programming Guide

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

G

: 00..32

The group number.

: 00

Extension can access any line.

Default Value 01 for all extensions.

Notes 1- The extension group program operates in connection with the Line Matching program with the code 801202. The Line access group is valid for line access administration of any kind. 2- Extensions can access lines allocated to the access group defined here by the Line Access Group program only.

Call Time-Out: This program controls the duration for which an extension can talk during the outgoing line calls.

801103 A T1 T2

Singular program

802103 A1 A2 T1 T2

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

T1

: Conversation duration in (002..250) x 10 seconds for the calls started by the extension. : 000 :

T2

No duration limit for conversations

Conversation duration in (002..250) x 10 seconds for the calls coming to the extension. 000 :

No duration limit for conversations

Default Value T1 and T2 = 000 for all extensions.

31

DS200 Programming Guide

Notes 1- While this program is active, whenever an extension with number A has any line call, the conversation is automatically terminated at the end of period T1 / T2. 2- The extension is warned by a short tone 15 seconds prior to termination of the conversation.

“*”, “#” Keys / Hook Flash Authority: This program controls whether extensions use the keys “*” / “#” and make hook flash.

801104 A P T

Singular program

802104 A1 A2 P T

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 0

Extension cannot use “*” / “#” keys

: 1

Extension can use “*” / “#” keys

: 0

Extension can make hook flash

: 1

Extension cannot make hook flash

T

Default Value P = 0, T = 0 for all extensions.

Notes 1- For cases when “*” / “#” keys have to be used to take advantage of various CO exchange features that the system is connected to, or if it is not desired that an extension transfers calls by her/his telephone’s on/off switch then this program should be utilized. 2- This program does not affect usage of function keys of LT200 and FT200 feature telephone sets such as transfer, flash. 3- There are 19 MF receivers per rack in the system. Since one MF receiver per extension, whose P parameter has been set as 1, is allocated throughout the conversation, the number of extensions in the system with parameter P has been defined as 1 should be determined by considering that situation and traffic load in the overall system. 4- Usage of the parameter P affects only extensions with DTMF telephone set. 5- The DTMF channels allocated to the extensions whose P parameters has been set as 0 are disconnected by the system 20 seconds after those extensions dial last DTMF number. Those extensions cannot take advantage of various system features such as Intrusion, Busy Extension Signalling, Call Back, 20 seconds after they have dialed last DTMF number. 32

DS200 Programming Guide

Voice Mail Leave/ Lock Authority: This program sets permission status whether an extension can leave a voice mail message or lock messages left for her/him.

801105 A P T

Singular program

802105 A1 A2 P T

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 0

Extension cannot leave message.

: 1

Extension can leave message.

: 0

Extension cannot lock messages.

: 1

Extension can lock messages.

T

Default Value P = 1, T=0 for all extensions.

Hotel Room Access Permission: This program sets the permission status for an extension to call hotel rooms.

801106 A P

Singular program

802106 A1 A2 P

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 0

Extension can call hotel rooms.

: 1

Extension cannot call hotel rooms.

Default Value P = 0 for all extensions.

Notes 1- The operator can call any hotel room and this cannot be modified. 33

DS200 Programming Guide 2- The extensions with hotel room call permission can also take advantage of the Meet Me feature.

Call Pick Up Authority: 801107 A P T

Singular program

802107 A1 A2 P T

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 0

The extension can pick up a call by the feature 82 or 5.

: 1

The extension cannot pick up a call by the feature 82 or 5.

: 0

Calls to the extension can be picked up by the feature 82 or 5.

: 1

Calls to the extension cannot be picked up by the feature 82 or 5.

T

Default Value P=0, T=0 for all extensions.

Follow Me Authority: 801108 A P

Singular program

802108 A1 A2 P

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 0

The extension can forward calls that her/his telephone receives.

: 1

The extension cannot forward calls that her/his telephone receives.

Default Value P=0 for all extensions.

34

DS200 Programming Guide

Call Back Authority: 801109 A P

Singular program

802109 A1 A2 P

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 0

The extension can use the Call Back feature with the code 81.

: 1

The extension cannot use the Call Back feature with the code 81.

Default Value P=0 for all extensions.

Access Authority From DISA Line To An External Line: 801110 A P

Singular program

802110 A1 A2 P

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 0

When the extension enters in a DISA Line, s/he can access the external line and s/he can make calls within the limits of her/his authority.

: 1

When the extension enters in a DISA Line, s/he can access the external line, however, s/he can make calls only at the local external call authority level.

Default Value P = 0 for all extensions.

Call Transfer Authority For Hot Line Users: This program determines whether an extension, for whom Hot Line has been defined, can transfer calls.

35

DS200 Programming Guide

801111 A P

Singular program

802111 A1 A2 P

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 0

The extension cannot transfer calls.

: 1

The extension can transfer calls.

Default Value P = 0 for all extensions.

Notes An extension, for whom Hot Line has been defined, must also have the hook flash authority in order to transfer a call.

Incoming Call-Exempt Extension: This program determines whether an extension can be called or not,

801112 A P

Singular program

802112 A1 A2 P

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 0

The extension can be called.

: 1

The extension cannot be called.

Default Value P = 0 for all extensions.

Outgoing Call-Exempt Extension: This program determines whether an extension can make calls or not.

36

DS200 Programming Guide

801113 A P

Singular program

802113 A1 A2 P

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 0

The extension can make calls.

: 1

The extension cannot make calls and receives error tone as soon as he lifts his handset.

Default Value P = 0 for all extensions.

Automatic Password: A password that belongs to an extension can be changed automatically as 9999 through this program.

801120 A

Singular program

802120 A1 A2

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

Notes If any extension in the system forgets her/his password, the password can be automatically changed to 9999 by this program.

Call Record-Exempt Extension: This program discards calls of a certain extension from the call records. That feature is especially useful if the extension is connected to another system via an exchange-exchange connection, or if the external calls of the extension must remain confidential.

801121 A P

Singular program

802121 A1 A2 P

Group program

37

DS200 Programming Guide

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 0

Calls of the extension appear in call records.

: 1

Calls of the extension does not appear in call records.

Default Value P = 0 for all extensions.

Pager Code: This program defines a permanent code for the extension’s pager as an extension parameter. The extension can activate the pager after the definition of that code.

801122 A P

Parameters A

: The extension access code

P

: 000

The extension does not have a pager

: 001..999

The permanent code of the extension’s pager.

Default Value P = 000 for all extensions.

Notes Since the permanent code of the extension’s pager is an extension parameter, extensions whose physical address have changed can continue using their pagers.

The Language Of The System Messages: 801123 A P

Singular program

802123 A1 A2 P

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 0

The system messages are announced in the 1st language (Turkish). 38

DS200 Programming Guide : 1

The system messages are announced in the 2nd language (optional).

Default Value P = 0 for all extensions.

Voice Mail Warning: 801124 A P

Singular program

802124 A1 A2 P

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 0

When there is a new voice mail message, the extension telephone rings once in every 10 minutes.

: 1

When there is a new voice mail message, the extension telephone does not ring at all.

Default Value P = 0 for all extensions.

Date/Time Info With Voice Mail: 801125 A P

Singular program

802125 A1 A2 P

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 0

Before listening to voice mail messages, the extension hears date & time of the left message.

: 1

Before listening to voice mail messages, the extension does not hear date & time of the lest message.

Default Value P = 0 for all extensions.

39

DS200 Programming Guide

Guest-Personnel / Fax Selection: This program defines an extension as either a hotel guest or hotel personnel. Additionally, fax extension to be used via VoIP lines is defined by this program.

801140 A P Q

Singular program

802140 A1 A2 P Q

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 0

The extension is defined as guest.

: 1

The extension is defined as one of the personnel.

: 0

The extension is not marked as fax.

: 1

The extension is marked as fax.

Q

Default Value P = 0 and Q = 0 for all extensions.

Notes 1- Parameter P is used during commissioning. The commissioning is based on the identity of the extension and differs according to it. 2- If there is fax reception over VoIP lines, then Q parameter must be activated for the extensions to which fax machines are connected.

Hot Line: This program enables an extension to do the following operations as soon as picking up the handset or following a 4-second delay, by defining a hot line: 1- Calling another extension 2- Accessing any idle line 3- Accessing a certain line

801141 A P T

40

DS200 Programming Guide

Parameters A

: The extension access code (except the operator)

P

: 1 + extension no / line no

The value following 1 is number of the extension or the line that that will be called.

: 9

Any idle line is accessed.

: 0

The hot line is cancelled.

: 1

The hot line operates after a 4-second delay.

: 0

The hot line operates as soon as the handset is lifted.

T

Default Value P = 0 for all extensions.

Notes 1- The extensions, for whom a hot line is defined, are provided with the feature of calling another extension or an external number without dialing. 2- If the extension is a hotel guest, the delay becomes 15 seconds for T=1. 3- Hot line cannot be allocated to the operator or to the system supervisor. 4- If a delayed hot line has been allocated to an extension, then that extension can dial any code within 4-second delay period. However, if no such action takes place, then the hot line connection is done in that case.

Direct-Call Hot Line : This program enables the extension to call one of the numbers stored in fields 997, 998 and 999 in the common pool memory, in case of an emergency.

801141 A P

Parameters A

: The extension access code (except the operator)

P

: 3

The number in the field 997 of the common pool is directly called.

: 4

The number in the field 998 of the common pool is directly called.

: 5

The number in the field 999 of the common pool is directly called.

: 0

Direct-call hot line is cancelled.

Default Value : P = 0 for all extensions.

Notes 1- Direct-call hot line cannot be allocated to the operator or to the system supervisor. 41

DS200 Programming Guide 2- For P=3,4,5, even if all lines are busy when the extension has lifted the handset, the system drops one of those lines and allocates it to the Direct-call hot line extension.

Hotel Room Definition: An extension is defined as a hotel guest through this program. Such an extension cannot make use of the features given in the list in Notes section.

801142 A P

Singular program

802142 A1 A2 P

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 0

Not hotel room

: 1

Hotel room

Default Value: P = 0 for all extensions.

Notes 1- An extension defined as hotel guest cannot make use of the following features: a) Password definition, password update, locking telephone, calling from a locked telephone. b) Making entries to the private pool, making calls from the common pool, making calls from the private pool, redialling the last number. c) Auto-dial (Last number, Private Pool, Common Pool) d) Call back e) Intrusion f)

Selective call pick up, group call pick up.

g) Do not disturb h) Background music i)

Parked call retrieve.

j)

Follow me, remote follow me.

2- An extension who has been defined as hotel guest cannot be the target for features of Follow Me, Remote Follow Me. In other words, no call forwarding can be done to such an extension in any case. 3- An extension defined as hotel guest cannot be the part of any PBX group. 42

DS200 Programming Guide 4- An emergency hot line with line access cannot be allocated to a hotel guest. 5- An extension defined as hotel guest can call all other extensions, including other hotel guests. However, that extension can be called only by the operator, another extension with hotel room call authority or another hotel room. 6- No hotel guests have the authority to use “*” / “#” keys by default. However, they are enabled to use their “*” / “#” keys by 801104 coded program.

Local Extension: An extension defined as local extension can automatically activate some features without dialing by making assignments to number keys on her/his telephone, as well as s/he can make one-touch dialing.

801143 A P

Singular program

802143 A1 A2 P

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 0

Not local extension

: 1

Local extension

Default Value P = 0 for all extensions.

Notes The extensions marked as local can make one-touch operations. The private pools of the related extension is used for this feature. The internal or external number in the memory field of the private pool, corresponding to the key pressed by the extension, is called or the requested service is fulfilled. No program can be assigned to the key “0”. If the entry to the private pool will be done through telephone of the extension, then this should be done before the extension is marked as local. Warning: 1- Local extensions must not be allowed to use “*” / “#” keys, together with their hook switches to make hook flash. 2- An extension must not be defined as both local and hot line. 3- If the local extension telephone is a Karel proprietary telephone, the function keys are not used.

43

DS200 Programming Guide

Extension PBX Group: This program defines groups for extensions, in order to provide them with various features to take advantage of. The extensions can make use of the features listed below, when they are included in such groups called PBX group: 1- Extensions of the same PBX group can answer each other’s ringing telephones by making use of the feature PBX Group Call Pick Up. 2- If A and B are in the same PBX group, when the extension A receives a call request while s/he is busy or the request has not yet been answered after the telephone rang three times, the call request is forwarded to the extension B. 3- Extensions in the same PBX group can activate the Parallel Extensions feature. Hence, when one of the extensions in the PBX group receives a call request, the telephones of the first four extensions in the group will ring simultaneously.

801160 A B

Parameters A

: The access code of the extension to be included in the PBX group.

B

: The access code of the extension following the extension to be included in the PBX group.

Cancellation 801160 A A

Default Value No extension PBX group has been defined.

Notes 1- According to the mode at which the program is entered, different PBX groups for night and day modes can be defined separately. 2- By entering that code more than once, extensions in desired number can be included in a PBX group. Here, it is essentially important that the entered extensions must form a chain. Therefore, the last member of the group must be forwarded to the first member. If that condition is not fulfilled, then that feature of the exchange may not fully satisfy customers and problems may occur. Example : If extensions with numbers 1112, 1113 and 1114 are to be included in the same PBX group, the following programs should be entered: 801 160 1112 1113, 801160 1113 1114, 801 160 1114 1112 3- In order to discard an extension from the PBX group, the program 801 160 A A should be entered, where A is the extension access code, and the chain should be preserved. The previous and the next extensions in the group must be related with the code 801 160. Example : Let us assume that the codes

44

DS200 Programming Guide 801 160 1112 1113, 801 160 1113 1114, 801 160 1114 1115 and 801 160 1115 1112 have been entered for a PBX group. In that case, the following codes must be entered in order to discard 1114 from the PBX group: 801 160 1114 1114 801 160 1113 1115 4- In order to cancel all of a PBX group, each and every member of the group must be discarded separately one by one.

Uniform Call Distribution Among Extensions: This program distributes incoming external call requests for an extension in a PBX group uniformly to the other members of the group.

801161 A P

Singular program

802161 A1 A2 P

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 0

Incoming external call requests for the extension are not distributed uniformly within the PBX group and those requests always ring the telephone of the extension A.

: 1

Incoming external call requests for the extension are distributed uniformly within the extension’s PBX group.

Default Value P = 0 for all extensions.

Notes Example: Suppose that aaa, bbb, ccc and aaa constitute a PBX group. External call requests ring telephone of the extension aaa. In that case, if 801161 aaa 1 is entered, the first external call request rings at the extension aaa. If the call is answered, then the second request rings at the extension bbb. Whenever a call request is answered by an extension in the group, the ring turn passes to the next member of the group. Normal PBX operation is not affected by that feature.

Voice Mail Message Leave Authority: This program determines, when an extension is called through ACD or DISA line, whether the caller will be granted with the permission to leave message for that extension.

45

DS200 Programming Guide

801162 A P

Singular program

802162 A1 A2 P

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 0

Caller cannot leave message.

: 1

Caller can leave message.

Default Value P = 1 for all extensions.

Inaccessible Extension Through DISA / ACD Line: 801163 A P

Singular program

802163 A1 A2 P

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 0

The extension can be called through DISA /Auto Attendant line.

: 1

The extension cannot be called through DISA / Auto Attendant line.

Default Value P = 0 for all extensions.

Line Drop Exempt Extension: 801164 A P

Singular program

802164 A1 A2 P

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group 46

DS200 Programming Guide P

: 0

During a line call, another extension can drop the line through the feature with code 798.

: 1

During a line call, another extension cannot drop the line through the feature with code 798.

Default Value P = 0 for all extensions.

Busy Extension Signalling Exempt Extension: 801165 A P

Singular program

802165 A1 A2 P

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 0

Other extensions can warn the extension through ear while s/he is busy.

: 1

Other extensions cannot warn the extension through ear while s/he is busy.

Default Value P = 0 for all extensions

Extended Secretary Group: Thanks to this program, the extensions who have been defined as in the same extended secretary group can call each other directly, in case their telephones have been forwarded. The forwarding does not work for the calls among themselves. Three groups can be defined for that purpose.

801166 A P

Singular program

802166 A1 A2 P

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 1, 2, 3

Extended secretary group number

47

DS200 Programming Guide : 0

The extension does not belong to any group. Normal operation mode.

Default Value P = 0 for all extensions.

ACD Parameters: The extension parameters in external automatic call distributor operation can be programmed through this facility.

801167 A P

Singular program

802167 A1 A2 P

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 01

ACD is connected to the extension.

: 00

ACD is not connected to the extension.

: 11

The extension has the authority to forward his telephone to ACD.

: 10

The extension does not have the authority to forward his telephone to ACD.

Default Value P = 00 and 10 for all extensions.

Notes 1- The extensions that are connected to ACD should be included in a PBX group. 2- For example: Extensions aaa, bbb, ccc and ddd are connected to ACD: a) aaa, bbb, ccc and ddd are included in a PBX group. b) aaa is marked as the first extension connected to ACD by the 800012 coded facility. c) By activating the 801167 coded program by the parameter value 01; bbb, ccc and ddd are marked as the other extensions connected to ACD. d) By activating the 801167 coded program by the parameter value 11, authority is given to extensions that want to take benefits of ACD (like call forwarding on busy or no answer).

48

DS200 Programming Guide

ISDN Fax Selection: ISDN BRI extensions connected to fax servers can be marked by this program.

801168 A P

Singular program

802168 A1 A2 P

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 0

Fax server is not connected to the extension.

: 1

Fax server is connected to the extension.

Default Value P = 0 for all extensions.

Notes This program should be activated so that called number information coming from the ISDN line can be sent to the ISDN BRI extension connected to the fax server.

Call Pick Up Group: This program defines groups for extensions who can pick up their calls by pressing “5”.

801169 A B

Parameters A

: The access code of the extension to be included in the Call Pick Up group.

B

: The access code of the extension following the extension to be included in the Call Pick Up group.

Cancellation 801169 A A

Default Value No call pick up group has been defined.

Notes 1- According to the mode at which the program is entered, different call pick up groups for night and day modes can be defined separately. 49

DS200 Programming Guide 2- By entering that code more than once, extensions in desired number can be included in a call pick up group. Here, it is essentially important that the entered extensions must form a chain. Therefore, the last member of the group must be forwarded to the first member. If that condition is not fulfilled, then that feature of the exchange may not fully satisfy customers and problems may occur. Example : If extensions with numbers 1112, 1113 and 1114 are to be included in the same call pick up group, the following programs should be entered: 801 169 1112 1113, 801169 1113 1114, 801 169 1114 1112 3- In order to discard an extension from the call pick up group, the program 801 169 A A should be entered, where A is the extension access code, and the chain should be preserved. The previous and the next extensions in the group must be related with the code 801 169. Example : Let us assume that the codes 801 169 1112 1113, 801 169 1113 1114, 801 169 1114 1115 and 801 169 1115 1112 have been entered for a call pick up group. In that case, the following codes must be entered in order to discard 1114 from the group: 801 169 1114 1114 801 169 1113 1115 4- In order to cancel all of a call pick up group, each and every member of the group must be discarded separately one by one. 5- An extension can be a member of only one call pick up group.

PBX Group Parameters On Extension Basis: Set the values of call forwarding parameters in the PBX groups on extension basis.

801170 A P R S T

Singular program

802170 A1 A2 P R S T

Group program

Parameters A

: The extension access code

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension in the group

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension in the group

P

: 0

When a line call request is not answered, call transfer to the PBX group does not take place.

: 1

When a line call request is not answered, call transfer to the PBX group takes place.

: 0

When an internal call request is not answered, call transfer to the PBX group does not take place.

R

50

DS200 Programming Guide

S

T

: 1

When an internal call request is not answered, call transfer to the PBX group takes place.

: 0

If the call request is from the line and the extension is busy, call transfer to the PBX group does not take place.

: 1

If the call request is from the line and the extension is busy, call transfer to the PBX group takes place.

: 0

When an extension calls another and if the called extension is busy, call transfer to the PBX group does not take place.

: 1

When an extension calls another and if the called extension is busy, call transfer to the PBX group takes place.

Default Value P=1, R=1, S=1, T=1.

PBX Group Parameters On PBX Group Basis: Set the values of call forwarding parameters in the PBX groups on PBX group basis.

801171 A P R S T

Singular program

802171 A1 A2 P R S T

Group program

Parameters A

: The access code of the first extension of the PBX group.

A1

: For group programming, the number of the first extension of the first PBX group.

A2

: For group programming, the number of the last extension of the last group.

P

: 0

When a line call request is not answered, call transfer to the PBX group does not take place.

: 1

When a line call request is not answered, call transfer to the PBX group takes place.

: 0

When an internal call request is not answered, call transfer to the PBX group does not take place.

: 1

When an internal call request is not answered, call transfer to the PBX group takes place.

: 0

If the call request is from the line and the extension is busy, call transfer to the PBX group does not take place.

: 1

If the call request is from the line and the extension is busy, call transfer to the PBX group takes place.

: 0

When an extension calls another and if the called extension is busy, call transfer to the PBX group does not take place.

R

S

T

51

DS200 Programming Guide : 1

When an extension calls another and if the called extension is busy, call transfer to the PBX group takes place.

Default Value P=1, R=1, S=1, T=1.

Toll Account Query: It allows querying the current status of an extension’s or line’s account.

801198 P

Parameters P

: The extension or line access code.

Notes 1- This facility can only be used when GPBX mode is activated. 2- Once this code is dialled by the system supervisor, the number of currently used metering pulses and the account valid for the current month is sent to the LCD of his feature phone in the following format: 800198 | number of currently used metering pulses | the account valid for the current month

Toll Account: It allows defining toll account for extensions and lines on a monthly basis.

801199 P Q R

Singular program

802199 P1 P2 Q R

Group program

Parameters P

: The extension or line access code.

P1

: For group programming, number of the first extension or line in the group.

P2

: For group programming, number of the last extension or line in the group.

Q

R

: 0

Account for metering pulses used currently.

: 1

Account for metering pulses used in the previous month.

: 2

Account for metering pulses that can be used by the extension/on the line throughout the month, and that will be valid at the beginning of next month.

: 3

Account for metering pulses that can be used until the end of the month.

: 0000…9999

Number of metering pulses for the account entered by parameter Q. 52

DS200 Programming Guide

Default Value No accounts are defined for extensions and lines.

Notes 1- This facility can only be used when GPBX mode is activated. 2- By activating this code by Q=2, the main limit for number of metering pulses that can be used in a month is defined. This limit will be valid at the beginning of each month. 3- By activating this code by Q=3, the number of metering pulses that can be used in that month can be defined. If all of this account for a line is used before the end of the month, then this line cannot be involved in external calls. If the account becomes zero during an ongoing conversation, then this call is terminated. 4- If the account of a line defined by entering Q=3 becomes zero before the end of the month and if there are other lines with account within the same PBX group, then the next calls will be established using these lines. 5- The accounts defined by entering Q=2 and Q=3 may be different. The account defined by Q=3 is valid for that month; at the beginning of the next month the account defined by Q=2 will be valid. 6- As the number of metering pulses in the account defined by Q=3 decrease during external calls, the number of metering pulses in the account is automatically written in the non-volatile memory 1 minute after each decrease in the account. 7- As using values 0 and 1 of parameter Q will change the values that are automatically set, these values should not be used unless absolutely necessary.

53

DS200 Programming Guide

V. LINE PROGRAMS Line Status & Signalling: This program determines activation or deactivation of a line for service, as well as the signalization that will take place over the line.

801200 D P T

Singular program

802200 D1 D2 P T

Group program

Parameters D

: The line access code

D1

: For group programming, number of the first line in the group.

D2

: For group programming, number of the last line in the group.

P

: 0

Out of service

: 1

In service

: 0

DP (pulse) signalling is used.

: 1

DTMF (tone) signalling is used.

T

Default Value P = 1, T = 1 for all lines.

Notes Example: Some features that will be applied to the line with number 1212 and the corresponding codes to be entered are presented below: 801200 1212 11

:To put the line into service as DTMF

801200 1212 10

:To put the line into service as DP

801200 1212 0 :To put the line out of service This program is also applicable for PRI ISDN / R2, E&M, BRI ISDN, TWT, VoIP and LB lines. (T parameter is not used for PRI ISDN / R2, BRI ISDN, TWT, VoIP and LB lines.)

Line Parameters: This program assigns various parameter values for a line.

801201 D A P T

Singular program

802201 D1 D2 A P T

Group program

54

DS200 Programming Guide

Parameters D

: The line access code

D1

: For group programming, number of the first line in the group.

D2

: For group programming, number of the last line in the group.

A

: The access code of the extension that will be rung by the line.

P

: 0

No access to the line by dialing 9, only selective line access

: 1

The line can be accessed both by dialing 9 and by selective line access as well.

: 0

Line call authorities of extensions requesting line access are not checked.

: 1

Line call authorities of extensions requesting line access are checked.

T

Default Value A=1110, P=1, T=1 for all lines.

Notes 1- P=0 assignment is useful especially when line D is connected to an extension of another exchange in order to maintain an exchange-exchange connection. 2- T=0 assignment is useful especially when line D is connected to an extension of another exchange in order to maintain an exchange-exchange connection. 3- If a DISA line on which call authorities are not checked by T=0 is used, an external line can be accessed without the need to dial the extension number and password. 4- Different ringing extensions can be defined for line D in night and day modes. If the program code is entered in day mode, then ringing extension definition is valid only for daytime. On the other hand, if the program code is entered in night mode, then ringing extension definition will be valid only for night mode. 5- Parameter P of this program can be used for LB and TWT lines as well. 6- The ringing extensions for LB lines can b changed by this program.

Line Access Groups: Extensions are assigned to line access groups through the Extension Line Access Group program. On the other hand, lines are assigned to the access groups through the Line Access Groups program. Therefore, extensions can access the lines, which are in the same access group with them.

801202 D G (GG …)*

Singular program

802202 D1 D2 G (GG…) *

Group program

55

DS200 Programming Guide

Parameters D

: The line access code

D1

: For group programming, number of the first line in the group.

D2

: For group programming, number of the last line in the group.

G

: 01..32

Line access group number

Default Value G = 01 for all lines.

Notes 1- G=01,…,32 Following each line access group number entry, the system allows other access group number entries, instead of emitting internal dial tone. Hence, upon entering that program once, it is possible to assign one line to 32 access groups in a single programming session. If line D is to be assigned to less than 32 access groups, then the telephone should be hung up after the last access group number entry. 2- There are examples below that would clarify the topic: Examples : - 801 202 1336 01 02 03, then hang up. That assigns line 1336 to access groups 01,02 and 03. - 802 202 1338 1341 02, then hang up. That assigns lines 1338, 1339, 1340 and 1341 to access group 02 3- This program is also applicable for PRI ISDN / R2, E&M, BRI ISDN, TWT, VoIP and LB lines.

Line PBX Group: In case selectively accessed line is busy, this program allows automatic connection of an extension to the next available line in the group, by defining a line PBX group.

801203 D E

Parameters D

: The access code of the line to be added on the PBX group.

E

: The access code of the line that will follow the line to be added on the PBX group.

Default Value No line PBX group has been defined.

Cancellation 801203 D D 56

DS200 Programming Guide

Notes 1- By entering the code more than once, it is possible to add lines in desired quantity on a line PBX group. Yet those lines must form a chain. That means the last member of the PBX group must be forwarded to the first member in the group. 2- In order to discard line D from a PBX group, the code 801 203 D D should be entered and the previous and the next line in the group must be related by the code 801 203 in order to preserve the chain. Example : Suppose that the programs 801 203 1334 1335, 801 203 1335 1336, 801 203 1336 1337 and 801 203 1337 1334 have been entered for a PBX group. In that case, the programs below should be entered in order to discard the line 1336 from the PBX group: 801 203 1336 1336 801 203 1335 1337 3- In order to cancel a whole PBX group, the program 801 203 D D must be entered for each line one by one. 4- This program is also applicable for PRI ISDN / R2, E&M, BRI ISDN, TWT, VoIP and LB lines.

DISA / ACD Line Selection: This program marks an analog line as DISA / ACD. Extensions can be directly accessed without assistance of the operator for calls made through a line marked as DISA / ACD. Someone calling through DISA / ACD lines will have 15 seconds to dial number of the extension s/he wants to make conversation with. The caller receives a tone specific to DISA /ACD line within that period.

801204 D P

Singular program

802204 D1 D2 P

Group program

Parameters D

: The line access code

D1

: For group programming, number of the first line in the group.

D2

: For group programming, number of the last line in the group.

P

: 0

The Line is in normal service.

: 1

DISA is active in the line.

: 2

The line has been enabled for ACD usage.

Notes 1- DTMF telephone set is required in order to dial extension numbers for making calls through DISA/ ACD line.

57

DS200 Programming Guide 2- If no extension number is dialed within 15-second period during calls through DISA line, then the caller is transferred to the operator or to the ringing extension. If that transferred call is not answered within 6 ringing periods, then the line is automatically released. 3- A DISA-line caller -

Can refresh special DISA dial tone by pressing “*” key, so that s/he can call another extension in case the called extension is busy or does not answer.

-

Can drop the line by pressing “#” key.

4- If an extension called through DISA line is busy or does not answer, the system gives another 15 seconds to the caller to call another extension. 9 such attempts can be done. If no connection has been established after the 9th try, the call is transferred to the operator or to the ringing extension. If, furthermore, that transferred call is not answered within 5 ringing periods, then the line is automatically released. 5- If the operator does not activate the ACD, then the ACD lines function as normal lines. 6- If a caller through ACD line does not dial an extension number while receiving special DISA tone, then s/he is transferred to the operator or to the ringing extension. If that transferred call is not answered within 6 ringing periods, then the line is automatically released. 7- If polarity reversal facility has not been set by CO in a line defined as DISA / ACD, even if caller hangs up during dialing step, then the call rings at the operator and the operator receives CO tone when s/he answers the call. However, if CO has set polarity changing property in that line, then, in that case, when the caller party hangs up, the polarity of the line will change and the exchange, which detects this, will drop that line. Hence, invalid call requests to the operator will be blocked. 8- LB lines can be marked as DISA lines by this program.

Specific ACD Menus: This program defines 4 specific menus among 16.

801205 D P R S T

Singular program

802205 D1 D2 P R S T

Group program

Parameters D

: The line access code

D1

: For group programming, number of the first line in the group.

D2

: For group programming, number of the last line in the group.

P

: 00..15

Day greeting menu

R

: 00..15

Night greeting menu

S

: 00..15

No answer menu

T

: 00..15

Busy menu 58

DS200 Programming Guide

Default Value P= 00, R=13, S=14, T=15.

Notes 1- While the system is in the night mode, the night greeting menu will be active instead of the day greeting menu. 2- The remaining 12 menus can be used for other purposes.

DISA Parameters: They determine the consequences of operations of a caller who calls through a line marked as DISA.

801206 D P T

Singular program

802206 D1 D2 P T

Group program

Parameters D

: The line access code

D1

: For group programming, number of the first line in the group.

D2

: For group programming, number of the last line in the group.

P

: 0 1

T

: 0 1

Error tone is received upon a dialing error. Line drops upon a dialing error. Line is accessed by dialing the extension no + password. Line cannot be accessed by dialing the extension no + password.

Default Value P = 0, T= 0 for all lines.

Notes This program is also applicable for LB lines.

Line-Line Connection Time-Out: This program provides duration control for line-line connections made through analog lines.

801207 D P

Singular program

802207 D1 D2 P

Group program

59

DS200 Programming Guide

Parameters D

: The line access code

D1

: For group programming, number of the first line in the group.

D2

: For group programming, number of the last line in the group.

P

: 00..30 31

(P + 2) x 30 seconds of conversation duration Conversation is limitless.

Cancellation 801207 D *

Default Value P = 04 for all lines.

Notes This program is also applicable for PRI ISDN / R2, E&M, BRI ISDN, TWT, VoIP and LB lines

Dialed Number Check / DISA – E&M Connection Time-Out: 801208 D P T

Singular program

802208 D1 D2 P T

Group program

Parameters D

: The line access code

D1

: For group programming, number of the first line in the group.

D2

: For group programming, number of the last line in the group.

P

: 0

Length of the dialed number is checked.

: 1

Dialed number is transmitted to the line 4 seconds later, without being checked.

: 0

Conversation duration is limited to 3 minutes upon accessing E&M line from DISA line.

: 1

No Conversation duration limit upon accessing E&M line from DISA line.

T

Default Value P = 0, T = 0 for all lines.

Notes 1. While P=0, if the dialed number: 60

DS200 Programming Guide -

Starts with 1, then the number is transmitted to the line after dialing at least 3 digits (emergency numbers),

-

Is 0, then the number is transmitted to the line after dialing at least 11 digits (long distance),

-

Is 2..9, then the number is transmitted to the line after dialing at least 7 digits (local).

2. As long as calls through E&M lines are concerned, when the caller dials “9” to access a line, one of the lines allocated to the extension group 31 is assigned to that person. 3. Parameter T of this program is also applicable for LB lines.

Line Pricing Information: This program determines two different types of pulse prices on lines for extensions, provided that CO supports that feature.

801209 D P T

Singular program

802209 D1 D2 P T

Group program

Parameters D

: The line access code

D1

: For group programming, number of the first line in the group.

D2

: For group programming, number of the last line in the group.

P

: 0

Pricing for guests

: 1

Pricing for personnel

T

: Unit price of at most 6 digits

Cancellation 801209 D *

Default Value No price has been determined.

Notes 1- A serial printer can print costs (calculated over the unit price that has been determined) of calls, provided that CO metering pulse is active on lines. The unit pulse price must have been determined for that. That unit, T can be at most 999999. For the details of guest and personnel information, please inspect the Guest-Personnel Selection program. 2- This program is also applicable for PRI ISDN / R2, E&M, BRI ISDN, TWT, VoIP and LB lines.

61

DS200 Programming Guide

Transmit/Receive Voice Level: This program adjusts voice level on a line.

801210 D P T

Singular program

802210 D1 D2 P T

Group program

Parameters D

: The line access code

D1

: For group programming, number of the first line in the group.

D2

: For group programming, number of the last line in the group.

P

: 0

Low transmitting voice level

: 1

High transmitting voice level

: 0

Low receiving voice level

: 1

High receiving voice level

T

Default Value P=0, T=0 for all lines.

Notes 1- Modification, which has been done is permanent. 2- All adjustments done through this program for a line are valid for all conversations on that line. 3- This program is also applicable for TWT, E&M and LB lines. 4- For TWT, LB and expandable analog lines, parameters P and T take the values in between 0 and 7.

Dial Tone Check: Allows determining if the dial tone is checked on the line or not when an extension accesses the line. Additionally, if the dial tone is received with a delay on the line, the delay can be set.

801212 D P T

Singular program

802212 D1 D2 P T

Group program

Parameters D

: The line access code

D1

: For group programming, number of the first line in the group.

D2

: For group programming, number of the last line in the group. 62

DS200 Programming Guide P

T

: 0

Dial tone is not checked.

: 1

Dial tone is checked.

: 0..15

The duration of delay to start sending the numbers to the line. The duration is calculated as (T+1) x 0.5 seconds.

Default Value P=0, T=0 for all lines.

Notes 1- If P is set as “1”, then one of the tone detection channels is dedicated to the line through out the call. Therefore, it is recommended not to enter P as “1” unless absolutely necessary. 2- If P is set as “0” then the numbers are sent to the line after the delay specified with parameter T. If P is set as “1” and if dial tone is received before the delay specified with the parameter T, the numbers are sent to the line immediately.

Equal Load On Line PBX Group: Allows assigning equal load on lines for each line access group when extensions use lines in belonging to a PBX group.

801213 D P

Singular program

802213 D1 D2 P

Group program

Parameters D

: Access code of the first line in the PBX group.

D1

: For group programming, number of the first line in the group.

D2

: For group programming, number of the last line in the group.

P

: 0

Equal load is not active in the line PBX group. The system accesses the lowest numbered line.

: 1

Equal load is active in the PBX group. The least recently used line is accessed.

Default Value P=0 for all lines.

Notes 1- In LCR applications where specific lines are used (e.g. GSM numbers are routed to the external line where GSM gateway exists and this external line is included within a PBX group) equal load activated by the 800024 coded programming facility does not take action. For these applications 801213 code must be used so that equal load is activated. 2- This program is also applicable for PRI ISDN / R2, BRI ISDN, TWT, VoIP and LB lines.

63

DS200 Programming Guide

Call Record-Exempt Line: This program discards calls made through a certain line from the call records.

801214 D P

Singular program

802214 D1 D2 P

Group program

Parameters D

: The line access code.

D1

: For group programming, number of the first line in the group.

D2

: For group programming, number of the last line in the group.

P

: 0

Calls made through the line appear in call records.

: 1

Calls made through the line do not appear in call records. This line can be accessed from a locked telephone without dialling password.

Default Value P=0 for all lines.

Notes 1- That feature is especially useful if the line is connected to another system to make an exchange-exchange connection, or if the external calls of the line must remain confidential 2- This program is also applicable for PRI ISDN / R2, E&M, BRI ISDN, TWT, VoIP and LB lines.

Signalling After Line Connection: This program determines the signalling on the external lines with DP signalling after the connection is established.

801215 D P

Singular program

802215 D1 D2 P

Group program

Parameters D

: The line access code

D1

: For group programming, number of the first line in the group.

D2

: For group programming, number of the last line in the group.

P

: 0

After the external party answers the call, the numbers are sent to the external line with DP signalling if the line is in service with DP signalling.

64

DS200 Programming Guide : 1

After the external party answers the call, the numbers are sent to the external line with DTMF signalling even if the line is in service with DP signalling.

Default Value P = 1 for all lines.

Notes 1- If the C.O. is producing a tone between the dialed digits, this program decides the signalling on the line after this tone is connected. 2- This program takes affect only on lines with DP signalling.

65

DS200 Programming Guide

VI. PRI ISDN / R2 LINE PROGRAMS Ringing Extension: This program provides definition of different ringing extensions for every PRI ISDN and R2 DDI number. When a ringing extension has been defined, a direct number that can be used for outgoing calls from that extension has also been assigned as well.

800300 Y N A

Parameters Y

: Slot number in which PRI ISDN / R2 card has been installed. (2-digit, even number)

N

: Last 3 digits of the CO number for which a ringing extension will be defined.

A

: The ringing extension

Default Value A = 1110 for all numbers.

Notes 1- An incoming call from CO rings at the extension defined according to the last 3 digits of the number. 2- The first slot numbers according to racks are as follows: 1st rack first slot number = 00 2nd rack first slot number = 16 3rd rack first slot number = 32 4th rack first slot number = 48 5th rack first slot number = 64 6th rack first slot number = 80 3- This program and the program 800 305 define direct numbers for extensions, as well as determining the ringing extension. Therefore, the extensions can be called directly by their own numbers and when they make an outgoing call, their numbers are transmitted to CO. Example 1 : If numbers of PRI ISDN line are in the range 2670200 ... 2670399, then the permanent section is 2670 and the DDI digits are in the range 200...399 in that case. If the ringing extensions are defined as below, DDI Number

Ringing Extension number

200

1120

201

1121 66

DS200 Programming Guide 202

1122

.

.

.

.

399

1319

the extension 1122 rings when someone calls 2670202 from outside. Likewise, if the extension 1122 makes a line call, the system will transmit 2670202 as the caller number information. Example 2 : Suppose that the PRI ISDN card is in slot 4 and 2651550 is one of the numbers. In that case, 800300 04 550 1245 should be entered in order to ring the extension 1245 when 2651550 is called.

Ringing Extension Deletion: This program enables deletion of the ringing extensions that have been defined for PRI ISDN / R2 DDI numbers, as well as the direct access numbers that have been assigned to those extensions.

800301 Y N A

Parameters Y

: Slot number in which PRI ISDN / R2 card has been installed. (2-digit, even number)

N

: Last 3 digits of the CO number for which the ringing extension will be deleted.

A

: The ringing extension

Notes The first slot numbers according to racks are as follows: 1st rack first slot number = 00 2nd rack first slot number = 16 3rd rack first slot number = 32 4th rack first slot number = 48 5th rack first slot number = 64 6th rack first slot number = 80

ACD Menus: This program enables definition of 4 specific menus among 16 to be used for PRI ISDN / R2 card.

800302 Y N P R S T

67

DS200 Programming Guide

Parameters Y

: Slot number in which PRI ISDN / R2 card has been installed. (2-digit, even number)

N

: Last 3 digits of the CO number

P

: 00..15

Day greeting menu

R

: 00..15

Night greeting menu

S

: 00..15

No answer menu

T

: 00..15

Busy menu

Default Value P= 00, R=13, S=14, T=15.

Notes 1- The first slot numbers according to racks are as follows: 1st rack first slot number = 00 2nd rack first slot number = 16 3rd rack first slot number = 32 4th rack first slot number = 48 5th rack first slot number = 64 6th rack first slot number = 80 2- Since 1000 different numbers can be defined on a PRI ISDN line, 1000 different ACD scenarios can be realized. 3- While the system is in night mode, the night greeting menu is automatically used instead of the day greeting menu. 4- The remaining 12 menus can be used for other purposes.

DISA / ACD Line Selection: This program enables an external caller to access extensions without assistance of the operator, by marking a PRI ISDN / R2 line as DISA / ACD. The external caller through the DISA / ACD line receives a special DISA tone for 15 seconds. Number of an extension can be dialed within this period.

800303 Y N P

Parameters Y

: Slot number in which PRI ISDN / R2 card has been installed. (2-digit, even number)

N

: Last 3 digits of the CO number 68

DS200 Programming Guide P

: 0

The line is in normal service.

: 1

DISA is active on the line.

: 2

ACD is active on the line.

Default Value P = 0 for all numbers.

Notes 1- If a line is enabled for direct inward access, then when an incoming call request is received through that line, the exchange automatically activates that line and emits a special dial tone. Then, the caller can access the extension by dialing her/his number. 2- The first slot numbers according to racks are as follows: 1st rack first slot number = 00 2nd rack first slot number = 16 3rd rack first slot number = 32 4th rack first slot number = 48 5th rack first slot number = 64 6th rack first slot number = 80 3- The external caller through a DISA line must use a DTMF telephone set in order to dial extension numbers. 4- If an external caller through the DISA line fails to dial an extension number while receiving the special DISA dial tone, then s/he is transferred to the operator or to the ringing extension. If that transferred call is not answered within 6 ringing periods, then the line is automatically released. 5- Someone calling through the DISA line can: -

Refresh the special DISA dial tone by pressing “*” key. By this way, s/he can call another extension if the extension s/he has called is busy or not answering.

-

Drop the line by pressing “#” key.

6. If the extension called through the DISA line is busy or not answering, the system gives the caller party additional 15 seconds to call another extension. The caller party can make 9 such attempts to establish a call. However, if s/he has not yet established a call within 9 attempts, the call is transferred to the operator or to the ringing extension. If that transferred call is not answered within 5 ringing periods, then the line is automatically released. 7. More than one party can access the system simultaneously for the inward calls through a line marked as DISA / Auto Attendant.

69

DS200 Programming Guide

DISA Parameters: This program determines the consequences of operations realized by a party calling through a line marked as DISA.

800304 Y N P T

Parameters Y

: Slot number in which PRI ISDN / R2 card has been installed. (2-digit, even number)

N

: Last 3 digits of the CO number

P

: 0

Error tone is received upon error in dialing.

: 1

Line is released upon error in dialing.

: 0

Line is accessed by dialing extension no + password.

: 1

No line access permission by dialing extension no + password.

T

Default Value P = 0, T = 0 for all numbers.

Line Number Root: This program determines the root number that belongs to a certain PRI ISDN / R2 card. (The remaining part of the number excluding the last three digits.)

800305 Y N

Parameters Y

: Slot number in which PRI ISDN / R2 card has been installed. (2-digit, even number)

N

: The root section of CO number.

Default Value No root number has been defined.

Notes The first slot numbers according to racks are as follows: 1st rack first slot number = 00 2nd rack first slot number = 16 3rd rack first slot number = 32 4th rack first slot number = 48 5th rack first slot number = 64 70

DS200 Programming Guide 6th rack first slot number = 80

Attention! The programs listed below, which are valid for analog lines, are also valid for PRI ISDN / R2 lines. 801200 (Parameter T is not used) 801202 801203 801207 801209 801210 801213 801214

71

DS200 Programming Guide

VII. BRI ISDN LINE PROGRAMS Ringing Extension: 800350 D N A

Parameters D

: The line access code

N

: The CO number which the ringing extension will be defined for (maximum 7 digits.)

A

: The ringing extension

Default Value A = 1110 for all numbers.

Notes A call request coming from CO rings at the extension that has been defined according to the number. If the number is shorter than 7 digits, then it should be terminated with “*”. If, on the other hand, the number is longer than 7 digits, then the last 7 digits are used in this case. Example: Let the number of the BRI ISDN line be 1358 and the extension numbers be in the range 2651100..2651199. In this case, 800350 1358 2651150 1245 should be entered in order to make the extension 1245 ring when 2651150 is called.

Ringing Extension Deletion: 800351 D N A

Parameters D

: The line access code

N

: The CO number whose ringing extension will be deleted (maximum 7 digits.)

A

: The ringing extension.

ACD Menus: 800352 D N P R S T

Parameters D

: The line access code

N

: The CO number (maximum 7 digits)

P

: 00..15

Day greeting menu 72

DS200 Programming Guide R

: 00..15

Night greeting menu

S

: 00..15

No answer menu

T

: 00..15

Busy menu

Default Value P= 00, R=13, S=14, T=15.

DISA / ACD Line Selection: This program enables an external caller to access extensions without assistance of the operator, by marking a BRI ISDN line as DISA / ACD. The external caller through the DISA / ACD line receives a special DISA tone for 15 seconds. Number of an extension can be dialed within this period.

800353 D N P

Parameters D

: The line access code

N

: The CO number (maximum 7 digits)

P

: 0

The line is in normal service.

: 1

DISA is active on the line.

: 2

ACD is active on the line.

Default Value P = 0 for all numbers.

Notes 1- If a line is enabled for direct inward access, then when an incoming call request is received through that line, the exchange automatically activates that line and emits a special dial tone. Then, the caller can access the extension by dialing her/his number. 2- The first slot numbers according to racks are as follows: 1st rack first slot number = 00 2nd rack first slot number = 16 3rd rack first slot number = 32 4th rack first slot number = 48 5th rack first slot number = 64 6th rack first slot number = 80 3- The external caller through a DISA line must use a DTMF telephone set in order to dial extension numbers. 73

DS200 Programming Guide 4- If an external caller through the DISA line fails to dial an extension number while receiving the special DISA dial tone, then s/he is transferred to the operator or to the ringing extension. If that transferred call is not answered within 6 ringing periods, then the line is automatically released. 5- Someone calling through the DISA line can: -

Refresh the special DISA dial tone by pressing “*” key. By this way, s/he can call another extension if the extension s/he has called is busy or not answering.

-

Drop the line by pressing “#“ key.

6. If the extension called through the DISA line is busy or not answering, the system gives the caller party additional 15 seconds to call another extension. The caller party can make 9 such attempts to establish a call. However, if s/he has not yet established a call within 9 attempts, the call is transferred to the operator or to the ringing extension. If that transferred call is not answered within 5 ringing periods, then the line is automatically released. 7. More than one party can access the system simultaneously for the inward calls through a line marked as DISA / Auto Attendant.

DISA Parameters: They determine the consequences of operations of a caller who calls through a line marked as DISA.

800354 D N P T

Parameters D

: The line access code

N

: The CO number (maximum 7 digits)

P

: 0

Error tone is received upon error in dialing.

: 1

Line is released upon error in dialing.

: 0

Line is accessed by dialing extension no + password.

: 1

No line access permission by dialing extension no + password.

T

Default Value P = 0, T = 0 for all lines.

Attention! The programs listed below, which are valid for analog lines, are also valid for BRI ISDN lines. 801200 (Parameter T is not used) 801202 801203 74

DS200 Programming Guide 801207 801209 801210 801213 801214

75

DS200 Programming Guide

VIII. E&M LINE PROGRAMS Tone Reception / Transmission: This program provides adjustments for tone transmission/reception operations of an E&M line. The tone transmission/reception operations increases the efficiency of E&M lines and provides users with tone hearing after dialing.

801401 D P T

Singular program

802401 D1 D2 P T

Group program

Parameters D

: The line access code

D1

: For group programming, number of the first line in the group.

D2

: For group programming, number of the last line in the group.

P

:

T

0

The E&M line does not check tones.

: 1

The E&M line checks tones.

: 0

The E&M line does not transmit tones.

: 1

The E&M line transmits tones.

: 2

If EVM200L is available, 28th system message is read to the external party.

Default Value P = 0, T= 0 for all lines.

Notes 1- It is recommended that the E&M lines should be adjusted to receive tones, if a remote exchange is generating a tone after a connection has been established, and furthermore, if it supports DTMF signalling. 2- If the E&M line has been adjusted to check tones, then the numbers to be dialed must be DTMF; otherwise, the line cannot transmit the numbers to the remote exchange. 3- If the E&M line has been adjusted to check tones, then the parameter P of the program Call Properties does not have any effect. In other words, that parameter is not used if the remote exchange is transmitting tone after collecting numbers during tone reception. 4- If the E&M line has been adjusted to check tones, then, as soon as a tone is received from the remote exchange, speech channel that belongs to the E&M line is automatically connected to the user. 5- If the remote exchange is capable of checking tones after a connection has been established, then it is recommended that the E&M lines should be adjusted to transmit tones. 76

DS200 Programming Guide

Call Forwarding On E&M Lines: If the external caller calling the system through E&M line does not dial any number and waits for 20 seconds, this program decides whether this call will be transferred to the operator or not.

801402 D P

Singular program

802402 D1 D2 P

Group program

Parameters D

: The line access code

D1

: For group programming, number of the first line in the group.

D2

: For group programming, number of the last line in the group.

P

:

0

: 1

The external caller receives error tone after 20 seconds. The call is forwarded to the operator after 20 seconds.

Default Value P= 0 for all lines.

Attention! The programs listed below, which are valid for analog lines, are also valid for E&M lines. 801200 (Parameter T is not used) 801202 801203 801207 801209 801210 801214

77

DS200 Programming Guide

IX. EVM200 AUTO ATTENDANT & VOICE MAIL PROGRAMS EVM200, is an integrated Auto Attendant and Voice Mail module of Karel DS200 digital PBX. Before starting with the software structure of the module, it will be appropriate to explain some fundamental topics related to that module. As an Auto Attendant module, EVM200 can be utilized for two different purposes: 1- Guiding external callers as an Automatic Call Distributor (ACD). 2- Presenting information to extensions about states of their telephones. All authorized users can make use of EVM200, as a voice mail module, like an answering machine to leave messages or to listen to the messages left for them. An EVM200 card has totally 8 channels: 4 for listening to the messages and 4 for leaving and/or recording messages. The card has got some message boxes for its various different tasks : 1- 64 message boxes for informing users about their telephones. Those have been mentioned as System Messages in this guide. The message boxes that have been reserved for the system messages have been numbered in the range 000...063. 2- 64 message boxes for guiding external callers. Those have been mentioned as ACD Messages in this guide. The message boxes that have been reserved for the ACD messages have been numbered in the range 064...127. 3- 512 message boxes in order to enable users to leave messages for each other. Those have been mentioned as Voice Mail Messages in this guide. The message boxes that have been reserved for the Voice Mail messages have been numbered in the range 128...639. By factory default, the first 17 ACD messages (064-082) on EVM200 is recorded for special purposes. However, any message can be used for any purpose. If all channels have been occupied when a message is about to be announced, then the caller hears music; if Music On Hold is not active, however, then wait tone is emitted. The message is announced whenever a channel is available. Message duration can be at most 40 seconds. EVM is delivered to customers as the system messages have been recorded. Those messages can be modified or erased. The first 28 (000-027) messages are employed for informative purposes during the normal operation of the exchange. Other messages (028063), on the other hand, are date-time messages announced at the beginning while listening to a message previously left. If all announcement channels have been occupied when a message is about to be announced, then music, if Music On Hold is not active, then wait tone is emitted. The message is announced whenever a channel is available. At most 8 EVM200 cards can be installed in a DS200 system. The number of needed EVM200 cards may vary due to capacity and traffic load of the DS200. The main idea behind increasing the number of EVM200 cards are extending the number of the channels in order to serve more call requests simultaneously, as well as providing more message boxes for voice mail messages. An example to clarify the topic is presented below: Suppose that there are 4 EVM200 cards in the DS200 system. In that case, there are -

4 x 4=16 channels for listening to messages, 78

DS200 Programming Guide -

4 x 4=16 channels for leaving or recording messages,

-

64 message boxes for the system messages,

-

64 message boxes for the ACD messages,

-

512 x 4=2048 message boxes for the voice mail messages in the system.

As can be seen in the example, increasing the number of cards in the system does not increase the number of the message boxes that can be used for the system and the ACD messages; because the same messages should be recorded on all the cards. Since it is possible to copy messages from one card to the other, there is no need to record on each card one by one separately. It should be kept in mind that both the exchange and the EVM200 card must be simultaneously in programming mode in order to do programming operations on EVM200 card.

EVM200 Card Programming Mode: This program enables EVM200 card to be put into/taken out of the programming mode.

800450 Y P

Parameters Y

: EVM200 card slot number

P

: 0

Programming mode is not active.

: 1

Programming mode is active.

Notes Prior to the operations (such as ACD/System message recording, erasing, copying) related to EVM200, the card must be put into the programming mode. In order to put EVM200 into the programming mode, DS200 must also be in the programming mode. (877777) While EVM200 is in programming mode, all program codes starting with 800 can be entered by the system supervisor only, whereas the codes starting with 7 can be entered both by the system supervisor and the operator.

ATTENTION! It is recommended that the related parts of the guide should be read carefully and the requirements should be determined in detail before starting with programming EVM200.

Erasing All ACD Messages: This program enables the erasure of all ACD messages when the maximum capacity has been reached.

7559 Y 79

DS200 Programming Guide

Parameters Y

: EVM200 card slot number

Notes 1- This program can be entered only through the operator or the system supervisor telephone, while the EVM card is in programming mode. 2- As the result, all ACD messages in the flash memory modules are erased. Silence is received during the operation and dial tone is received after the operation. 3- The ACD function should be deactivated prior to the entry of that program.

Erasing All System Messages: This program enables erasure of all system messages in case there is a problem with them.

7558 Y D

Parameters Y

: EVM200 card slot number

D

: 0

Messages in 1st language.

: 1

Messages in 2nd language.

Notes 1- This program can be entered only through the operator or the system supervisor telephone, while the card is in programming mode. 2- All messages in the system message flash memory module are erased. Silence is received during the operation and dial tone is received after the operation. 3- The ACD function should be deactivated prior to the entry of that program.

ACD And System Message Recording: Coupling of ACD and system messages enable them to be placed in predefined message boxes.

7586 Y M D + Message

Parameters Y

: EVM200 card slot number

M

: 000..063 system messages box number, 064..127 ACD messages box number

D

: 0

Messages in 1st language.

: 1

Messages in 2nd language.

80

DS200 Programming Guide Message

: The message to be read in order to complete the program

Notes 1- This program can be entered only through the operator or the system supervisor telephone, while the card is in programming mode. . 2- The ACD function should be deactivated prior to the entry of that program. . 3- D parameter is used only for system messages. And D parameter can take value “1” only if the EVM200L card is enriched with an extra FLASH module for system messages to provide the second language. 4- After the code has been dialed, short warning tone is awaited. Once the tone is received, the message is read. Messages related to time and day are used for informing the extension, for whom the message is left, about the time when the message was left. 5- If the entered message is already in the system, that message is automatically erased. While the previous message is being erased, wait tone is received or music is listened to, if that feature is active. The new message can be entered after that tone has stopped. 6- The telephone must be hung up in order to complete the message entry. It is strongly recommended that the keys “*” / “#” should not be used for terminating the message entry, since DTMF values of those keys are recorded as a part of the system message. 7- Considering the ACD message capacity, the entered messages should be as short and explanatory as possible. If the ACD message capacity is exceeded during a message entry, then the recording stops and the internal dial tone is heard again. 8- Each system message box has a predefined and fixed function. This fact should be considered during message entry. There are examples below for the factory default messages.

The System Messages: 000, “Follow Me Active” Message : If the telephone has been forwarded to another extension through 85aaaa or 865aaaaAAAA, then this message is read to the extension when the handset is lifted. 001, “Permanent Absent Message Is On-line.” Message : If Permanent Absent Message is active, then this message is announced when the handset is lifted. Please see the section Extension-Related Features, Permanent Message Feature (737) for the Permanent Absent Message. 002, “You Have Got Message.” Message : If there is a message left for the extension, then this message is announced when the handset is lifted. 003, “Night Mode is Active.” Message : When the system is in the night mode, if the operator telephone goes off-hook, then this message is announced. 004, “Auto-dialer is Active.” Message : If the Auto-dialer is active, then this message is announced when the handset is lifted. 005, Reminder Message : If a reminder has previously been entered through 838, then this message is announced when the handset is lifted while the telephone is ringing at the warning time. 81

DS200 Programming Guide 006, Unassigned Port Message : When an extension that does not exist in the system is attempted to be called or a non-existent line is attempted to be accessed, then this message is announced. 007, “All Lines are Busy.” Message : This message is announced upon a line access attempt while all the lines are busy. 008, “This Line is Out of Service.” Message : This message is announced upon a line access attempt that is out of service. 009, “No authority for Line Access.” Message : This message is announced when an extension without line access authority attempts to access a line. 010, “Insufficient Authority for This Call” Message : This message is announced when an extension attempts to make a call beyond her/his authority (such as long distance, international, etc.). 011, “No Authority for Restricted Number” Message : This message is announced when a restricted number, which has been entered through the accessible number by the area code or prefix definition program, is dialed. 012, Operator Only Message : This message is announced when an operation code, which can be normally done by the operator only, is dialed by an extension. 013, System Supervisor Only Message : This message is announced when an operation code, which can be normally done by the Admin only, is dialed by an extension. 014, “No Authority for This Feature.” Message : This message is announced when an extension dials a feature code which is beyond her/his authority. 015, “No Calls to Pick up” Message : This message is announced when a non-existent call is attempted to be picked up by 82+ extension no. 016, “System is out of Programming Mode” Message : This message is announced when a program is attempted to be entered while the system is not in the programming mode. 017, “All Lines are out of Service.” Message : If the Admin lifts the handset while all the lines are out of service, then this message is announced. 018, Phone Locked Message : If the code (877777) for entering into the system programming mode is dialed even though the Admin telephone is locked, then this message is announced. 019, Erroneous Operation Message : This message is announced when an invalid operation code is dialed. 020, Wrong password Message : This message is announced if a wrong password is entered during password change (836), phone locking and unlocking. 021, “Auto-dialer is Busy.” Message : If the Auto-dialer is attempted to be activated while all auto-dialer services of the system are busy (That means 103 extensions has simultaneously activated auto-dialer.), then this message is announced. 022, No password Message : This message is announced, if an operation requiring a password is attempted to be done, such as phone locking, authority and program entry locking. 023, “Room is Clean.” Message : This message is announced when the status of a clean hotel room is inquired (731). 82

DS200 Programming Guide 024, “Room is Being Cleaned.” Message : This message is announced when the status of a hotel room which is being cleaned is inquired (731). 025, “Room is Dirty.” Message : This message is announced when the status of a dirty hotel room is inquired (731). 026,027 : Reserved for future use. The date-time messages consist of numbers and months and their lengths are limited. (0.5-1 second). The date-time messages are below: 028, "zero"

052, "January"

029, "one"

053, "February"

030, "two"

054, "March"

031, "three"

055, "April"

032, "four"

056, "May"

033, "five"

057, "June"

038, “eleven” *

034, "six"

058, "July"

039, “twelve” *

035, "seven"

059, "August"

040, “thirteen” *

036, "eight"

060, "September"

041, “fourteen” *

037, "nine"

061, "October"

042, “fifteen” *

047, "ten"

062, "November"

043, “sixteen” *

048, "twenty"

063, "December"

044, “seventeen”*

049, "thirty"

045, “eighteen” *

050, "forty"

046, “nineteen” *

051, "fifty" * They are not used in Turkish message structure. Instead, they are used for recordings done in English or in other languages.

The ACD Messages: 064 – The Greeting Message: The system automatically answers an incoming call and announces that message. Example : "Welcome to our company. If you know the extension number please dial right now; or please wait for the operator.” Call forwarding to specific sections is possible by making use of the grouping program of the PBX. For instance, if 112, 113, 114 are telephones of the accounting department; 123, 124, 125 are telephones of the sales department; 140, 141, 142 are telephones of the technical service department; then those three departments can be grouped by the program 805 and the greeting message may take such a form: " Welcome to our company. Please dial 112 for the accounting, 123 for the sales, and 140 for the technical service departments; or please wait for the operator." 065 – Missing Digit Message: This message is announced when a dialed number is incomplete at any stage.

83

DS200 Programming Guide Example : "You have dialed an incomplete number. Please try again. " . 066 - Busy Message: If the called extension is busy, then this message is announced. After the message below has been announced, the caller can call back by dialing 5 or can leave message by dialing 6. Example : "The extension you are calling is busy right now. You can dial 5 to call back, dial 6 to leave a message, call another extension or wait for the operator. " If the caller decides to call back after the announcement, then this can be done by dialing 5 during the silence following the announcement. Afterwards, the announcement related to the place of the caller in the queue is announced to her/him. 067 – No Answer Message: If the called extension does not answer within 20 seconds, then this message is announced. Example : " The extension you are calling is not answering. You can dial 6 to leave a message, call another extension or wait for the operator. " 068 – Wrong Number Message: This message is announced when a dialed number is wrong at any stage. Example : "You have dialed a wrong number; please try again. ". 069 – Hold On Message: When a busy extension is called back, (by dialing 5, after listening to the Busy Message), this message is announced and then music is emitted to the caller if it has been activated, or the wait tone is emitted otherwise. Example : "Please hold on". No number can be dialed during the announcement of that message. Music or the wait tone is emitted after the message. The call is transferred to the extension, who has been called back by dialing 5, as soon as s/he becomes available. 070 – Inaccessible Extension Message: If an extension marked as inaccessible is called, then this message is announced. Example : "No direct connection is possible to the extension you are calling. Please wait for the operator or call another extension. " 071 – Transfer to the Operator Message: After a call request has been answered by EVM, there is a limit, which has previously been determined through programming, for trials until a conversation is established. If that limit is exceeded, then that message is announced. The call is transferred to the operator, afterwards. Example : "Please hold on; you are being connected to the operator. " 072 – Night Mode Greeting Message: While the system is in the night mode, this message is announced to answer incoming call requests. The request is transferred to the operator, afterwards. Example : "Our company is closed right now. Please dial 7 if you would like to leave a message. ". 073 –DISA Message: When a call request is received through a line on which DISA is active, first this message is announced, then a special dial tone is emitted. Example : "Please dial the extension if you know the number; or wait for the operator. " 84

DS200 Programming Guide 074 – Password Request Message: This message is announced when an extension attempts to listen to the messages left for her/him by dialing 8646 or 8645, and her/his password is requested, if there is one. Example : "Please enter your password. " 075 – “Ringing” Message: If an extension, which is called through ACD, is busy during a call request and is called back, then this message is announced when s/he is available. Example: “Ringing.” 076 – “The Operator is Busy.” Message: If the operator is busy when the call request is transferred to the operator, then the caller receives music or the wait tone. However, the duration of those are 2.5 minutes. This message is announced, if the operator is still busy at the end of that period. Example: “ The operator is busy. Please call again later.” 079 – “The 1st Person in the Queue.” Message: Announced if you are the first person to call back. 080 – “The 2nd Person in the Queue.” Message: Announced if you are the second person to call back. 081 – “The 3rd Person in the Queue.” Message: Announced if you are the third person to call back. 082 – “The 4th Person in the Queue.” Message: Announced if you are the fourth person to call back. The ACD message box numbers mentioned above are just factory defaults. Those messages are or similar ones can be erased and recorded to the boxes 064-095 upon wish. If any one of those messages is not recorded, dial tone is emitted again for the cases that message should be announced; or some other operation is initiated according to the situation. The other Messages : Other messages can be recorded to the boxes 083...127 for other purposes through the feature with the code 7586 Y M. Yet you may need to increase the flash memory capacity in order to record such additional messages.

Listening To The ACD And System Messages: This program enables the recorded ACD or system messages to be listened to through the operator or the Admin telephone. That code can be used to check the messages in certain intervals.

7585 Y M D

Parameters Y

: EVM200 card slot number

M

: 000..063 box numbers of the system messages, 064..127 box numbers of the ACD messages

85

DS200 Programming Guide D

: 0 : Messages in 1st language. : 1 : Messages in 2nd language.

Notes 1- If there are no messages in the box with number M, then the dial tone is emitted. 2- If all the announcement channels of EVM are busy at the moment, then a caller receives music or the wait tone. The message is announced as soon as one of the channels is available. 3- Parameter D is used only if system messages are listened to. 4- This programming facility does not support listening to date and time messages for the time being.

Erasing The ACD And System Messages: The ACD or the system messages that have previously been recorded can be erased by this program.

7557 Y M D

Parameters Y

: EVM200 card slot number (2 digits)

M

: 000..063 box numbers of the system messages, 064..127 box numbers of the ACD messages

D

: Language selection for the system messages : 0 : Messages in 1st language. : 1 : Messages in 2nd language.

Notes 1- The wait tone or music is heard during the erasing operation and the dial tone is received upon completion of the operation. 2- This program can be entered only through the operator or the system supervisor telephone, while the card is in programming mode. 3- The ACD function should be deactivated prior to the entry of that program. 4- Parameter D is used only if system messages are erased.

Copying Messages Among Cards: A message that have been recorded on an EVM card can be copied to another EVM card through this program.

7560 Y1 Y2 0 M1 M2 86

DS200 Programming Guide

Parameters Y1

: EVM200 card slot number (2 digits)

Y2

: The card slot number (2 digits) of the target EVM card

M1

: The message box number of the message to be copied (000..127)

M2

: The number of the message box on the target EVM card (000..127)

Notes 1- This program can be entered only through the operator or the system supervisor telephone, while the card is in programming mode. 2- M1 should be equal to M2 under normal conditions. 3- If there is already a message in the target message box, then it is erased by the copied message from the source card. 4- If there is the optional module for system messages in 2nd language, the messages in this extra module are not copied other cards. 5- The ACD function should be deactivated prior to the entry of that program.

Copying All ACD Messages Among Cards: All ACD messages that exist on an EVM200 card can be copied to another EVM200 card through this program.

7560 Y1 Y2 2

Parameters Y1

: EVM200 card slot number (2 digits)

Y2

: The card slot number (2 digits) of the target EVM card

Notes 1- This program can be entered only through the operator or the system supervisor telephone, while the card is in programming mode. 2- If there are already messages in the target message boxes, then they are erased by the copied messages from the source card. 3- The ACD function should be deactivated prior to the entry of that program.

87

DS200 Programming Guide

IX.1. GENERAL PARAMETERS Constant ACD Messages: Some of the ACD messages utilized in the system are constant messages, which are announced at certain situations. They are to warn the caller party about the present condition. (For instance: “You have dialed an incomplete number.”, “Invalid extension number.”, etc.). Those messages are the same for every menu. Since the constant messages are basically ACD messages, they are recorded into the ACD message boxes of range 064-127. First the constant ACD messages should be recorded into the ACD message boxes and then it should be determined through the code below which box will be used for which constant message condition.

800451 P K M

Parameters P

: 00..05, 08..11 constant message number

K

: 0

No message is announced. The parameter M is ignored.

: 1

The message is protected and normal.

: 2

The message is protected and special.

: 3

The message is ignorable and normal.

: 4

The message is ignorable and special.

M

: 064..127 message box number

Default Value For P = 00, M = 068 For P = 01, M = 068 For P = 02, M = 065 For P = 03, M = 070 For P = 04, M = 076 For P = 05, M = 071 For P = 08, M = 079 For P = 09, M = 080 For P = 10, M = 081 For P = 11, M = 082

Notes The conditions during which the constant ACD messages are announced are as follows: 0. Dialing a wrong number during an extension number entry. 88

DS200 Programming Guide

Example: ‘You have dialed a wrong number. Please try again.’ 1. The busy extension that has been called back is then available and ringing. Example: ‘Ringing’ 2. Dialing an incomplete number during extension number entry.

Example: ‘You have dialed an incomplete number. Please try again.’ 3. Dialing an inaccessible extension. Example: ‘There is no direct connection to the extension you have dialed. ...for the

operator.’

4. If the operator fails to answer a transferred call request within a certain period.

Example: ‘All our operators are busy right now. Please call again later...’. The line is

dropped after this message.

5. Transfer of call request to the operator.

Example: ‘Please hold on; You are being connected to the operator.’ 8. When a busy extension is called back, to the first person in the queue:

Example: ‘You are the first person in the queue.’ 9. When a busy extension is called back, to the second person in the queue:

Example: ‘You are the second person in the queue.’ 10. When a busy extension is called back, to the third person in the queue:

Example: ‘You are the third person in the queue.’ 11. When a busy extension is called back, to the fourth person in the queue:

Example: ‘You are the fourth person in the queue.’ Example: Suppose that the message “You have dialed an incomplete number. Please try again.” Has been recorded into the ACD message box 064. In that case, when the program 800451 02 064 is entered, the ACD message 064 is announced to a caller if s/he dials an incomplete number. (Caution: In this example, since the message box 064, which should normally contain the greeting message as the factory default, is used for the constant message 02, the greeting message should be recorded to some other message box, instead of the box 064 in that case.)

Total Penalty: An external caller who has connected to the ACD sometimes may not access the extension s/he is calling due to some reasons (like busy, wrong number etc.). Some penalty points are assigned for such cases. If the caller faces more erroneous situations than that has been defined in the system (the total penalty), then s/he is transferred to the operator. The penalty list: 1. Dialing an incomplete number = 1 penalty point 2. Dialing an invalid number = 2 penalty points 3. Dialing an inaccessible number = 1 penalty point 4. No answer from the called extension = 2 penalty points 89

DS200 Programming Guide 5. The called extension is busy = 1 penalty point

800452 P

Parameters P

: 00..99 the total penalty value

Default Value P = 04

Notes Example: The factory default value of that parameter is 4. Hence, in case an external caller dials wrong numbers twice (4/2=2), the call request is transferred to the operator. If that value is entered as 8, then in case the caller dials wrong numbers for (8/2=4) 4 times, the call request is transferred to the operator.

Changing Language: A choice can be done between two message boxes through this program, in order to determine the language that will be used for the menus. The language options are defined by the programmer during recordings of the ACD messages. The ACD message boxes (064..127) have been separated into two groups. The first group consists of the boxes in the range 064...095, and the second group in the range 096...127. The ACD messages that will be recorded into the second group in another language should follow the same order as for the first group.

800453 P

Parameters P

: 0

The first language (Turkish), message boxes 064..095

: 1

The second language (optional), message boxes 096..127

Default Value P = 0.

Notes The message boxes 064...127, which are reserved for the ACD messages, have been divided into two in order to provide recording in two languages. In that case, the recording in the first language should be done into the boxes 064-095, and the recording in the second language should be done into the boxes 096-127 by preserving the same order. The opening language of the ACD, when it answers a call request, is determined through this parameter. P can take values 0 and 1. The opening language will be the one that has been used in boxes 064-095, if the value 0 has been entered. On the other hand, if the value is set to 1, then the opening language will be the one that has been used in boxes 096-127. If a user chooses “change the language” from the menu, then the language switches for that specific session only, ie., if P=0, then it becomes 1 and vice versa. Example: If both Turkish and English ACD options will be used in your company, and if the opening language of the ACD will be Turkish, then the messages in Turkish should be

90

DS200 Programming Guide recorded into the boxes 064...095 and the messages in English should be recorded into the boxes 096...127. The English equivalent of the message in box 064 should be recorded into the box 096, The English equivalent of the message in box 065 should be recorded into the box 097, : The English equivalent of the message in box 095 should be recorded into the box 127.

Time-Out Durations: This program determines the time-out durations for normal and special messages.

800454 S1 S2

Parameters S1

: 01..99

The normal time-out duration in seconds (for normal messages)

S2

: 01..99

The special time-out duration in seconds (for special messages)

Default Value S1 = 8, S2 = 4

Notes This program determines the maximum time intervals during which an external caller could wait before dialing, after dialing options have been presented to her/him. There are two types of time-out durations, namely the normal time-out and the special time-out duration. If the message announced to the caller has been defined as “special message” (see the section “Menu Entry Message”), and if that caller has got into selection state after having listened to the special message, then the system waits until the special time-out duration is up. On the other hand, if the announced message has not been defined as “special”, then the waiting period is the one determined for the normal time-out. To clarify the topic with an example, let the normal time-out duration is 8 seconds and the special time-out duration is 4 seconds. If an extension waits at the first entry menu, then s/he is transferred to the operator at the end of 8-second period. After getting information by dialing 1 or 2 (if those informative messages are special messages), if the extension is again at the selection state, then the line is dropped after waiting for 4 seconds.

91

DS200 Programming Guide

IX.2. THE MENU PARAMETERS AND THE ACTION TABLE EVM200 has 16 menus to use for the ACD functions. The structures of all menus are the same. The structure of one of those menus is presented on the diagram below:

Each menu has an entry message. That entry message can be selected among the ACD messages (064..127) to be announced or not to be announced. That message can be classified as special or normal. The differences between a normal and a special message can be described as follows: - After the normal message has been announced to the caller, there is a programmable time interval in which the caller should dial a number (normal time-out period). If the caller fails to dial a number within the specified period, then the call request is automatically transferred to the menu-specific ringing extension. The caller receives a special dial tone during the normal time-out period. - After the special message has been announced to the caller, there is another programmable time interval in which the caller should dial a number (special time-out period). If the caller fails to dial a number within the specified period, then the line is released. The caller receives a special dial tone during the special time-out period. The entry message can be classified as ignorable or protected message, as well. The difference between those two message types can be described as follows: -

While an ignorable message is being read to the caller, the caller can skip the rest of the message and can take another action.

92

DS200 Programming Guide -

While, on the other hand, a protected message is being read to the caller, the caller cannot take any other action.

After the caller has listened to, or has ignored, the special or normal type message, an action decision is initiated upon pressing a key. The Action Decision is made according to an action table determined through programming and is initiated upon pressing a key. Different Action choices: 1- Moving on to the next menu. 2- Access by a single key. 3- Forming a valid access code by collecting the numbers that is dialed by the caller. 4- Exiting from the ACD to the DISA line. 5- Changing the menu language. 6- Leaving message to an extension that is busy or that does not answer. 7- Calling a busy extension back. 8- Leaving message to the operator and exiting. 9- Waiting for another number to make action decision by ignoring a dialed digit. The action decision is the brain of a menu and the user is led to any action field according to the result of that action decision.

Menu Entry Message: This program determines the message to be announced as the menu entry message.

800455 N P M

Parameters N

: 00..15

Menu page number

P

: 0

No message is announced.

: 1

The message cannot be ignored and it is normal.

: 2

The message cannot be ignored; it is special.

: 3

The message can be ignored and it is normal.

: 4

The message can be ignored and it is special.

: 064..095

The message box number of the message to be announced (Does not apply if P=0.)

M

Default Value For N = 00, M = 064 For N = 13, M = 072 For N = 14, M = 067 For N = 15, M = 066 93

DS200 Programming Guide

Notes If the parameter P is set to 0 , then that means no message will be announced to the caller. In that case the programmer receives dial tone without entering the kkk parameter at the end. If the parameter P is set to 1 , then that means a message will be announced upon entering the menu in that case. The caller is not allowed to press a key and proceed to an action before the announcement is complete. Besides, the caller is automatically transferred to the operator at the end of the normal time-out period, unless s/he takes an action following the announcement. If the parameter P is set to 2 then that means a message will be announced upon entering the menu in that case. The caller is not allowed to press a key and proceed to an action before the announcement is complete. Besides, if the caller waits until the end of the special time-out period, without taking an action, then the line will be dropped. If the parameter P is set to 3 then that means a message will be announced upon entering the menu in that case. The caller may take another action by pressing a key while listening to the announcement, before the end of it. Moreover, the caller is automatically transferred to the operator at the end of the normal time-out period, unless s/he takes an action following the announcement. If the parameter P is set to 4 then that means a message will be announced upon entering the menu in that case. The caller may take another action by pressing a key while listening to the announcement, before the end of it. Besides, if the caller waits until the end of the special time-out period, without taking an action, then the line will be dropped. The menu entry message can be selected as special message, as will be mentioned later in the section action list / the next menu.

Action Table: This program allows an action table to be chosen, so that the program code can change according to the action that has been chosen.

800456 N T H

{P1 P2 P3}

94

DS200 Programming Guide

Parameters N

= 00..15 :

The Menu page number

T

= 0..9 :

The first digit that the caller will dial. (decision point)

H

= 01..09 :

The action code

H=01 :

The action : “Go to the next menu” P1 = 00..15 :

Page number of the next menu

P2

=0:

No message is announced.

=1:

The message cannot be ignored and it is normal.

=2:

The message cannot be ignored; it is special.

=3:

The message can be ignored and it is normal.

=4:

The message can be ignored and it is special.

= 064..095 :

The message box number of the message to be announced. (Does not apply if P2 is 0)

P3

H=02 :

The action: “Extension access by single key”” P1

: The number of the extension to be accessed by single key

The parameters P2 and P3 do not apply.

H=06:

The action: “Leave message” P1

P2

=0:

No message is announced.

=1:

The message cannot be ignored.

=2:

The message can be ignored.

= 064..095

The message box number of the message to be announced (Does not apply if P1 is 0)

The parameter P3 does not apply.

H=07:

The action: “Call back” P1

=0:

No message is announced.

=1:

The message cannot be ignored.

=2:

The message can be ignored. 95

DS200 Programming Guide P2

= 064..095

The message box number of the message to be announced (Does not apply if P1 is 0)

The parameter P3 does not apply.

H= 03, 04, 05, 08, 09

The details are below.

The parameters P1, P2 and P3 do not apply.

Default Value For the Menu 00

For the Menu 13

For T = 0, H = 03

For T = 0, H = 09

For T = 1, H = 03

For T = 1, H = 09

For T = 2, H = 03

For T = 2, H = 09

For T = 3, H = 09

For T = 3, H = 09

For T = 4, H = 09

For T = 4, H = 09

For T = 5, H = 09

For T = 5, H = 09

For T = 6, H = 09

For T = 6, H = 09

For T = 7, H = 09

For T = 7, H = 06, P1 = 1, P2 = 083

For T = 8, H = 09

For T = 8, H = 09

For T = 9, H = 04

For T = 9, H = 04

For the Menu 14

For the Menu 15

For T = 0, H = 03

For T = 0, H = 03

For T = 1, H = 03

For T = 1, H = 03

For T = 2, H = 03

For T = 2, H = 03

For T = 3, H = 09

For T = 3, H = 09

For T = 4, H = 09

For T = 4, H = 09

For T = 5, H = 09

For T = 5, H = 07, P1=3, P2 = 069

For T = 6, H = 06, P1 = 1, P2 = 083

For T = 6, H = 06, P1=1, P2 = 083

For T = 7, H = 09

For T = 7, H = 09

For T = 8, H = 09

For T = 8, H = 09

For T = 9, H = 09

For T = 9, H = 09

Notes The action that a user will take in any menu is automatically determined according to the first digit s/he dials. The actions that will be taken according to the digit the caller dials should be assigned to the Action Table by choosing one of the actions, which have been defined in the Action List for each digit.

96

DS200 Programming Guide Waiting without pressing any key is a selection, too, for the user. In that case the operator is called by exiting menu. For each menu page, different ringing extension access codes can be entered in order to determine which extension the line will be automatically transferred to.

01 : The next menu Upon pressing the key, one proceeds to the next menu that has been defined by programming. That selection has two parameters: i)

The number of the next menu: a number should be entered in the range 00..15,

ii)

The jump message: It can be defined as present or not present. If there is a jump message, then the number of the message box containing the jump message should also be entered and that message is also announced (apart from the entry message of the next menu) before proceeding to the next menu. That feature has been created by taking applications into consideration such as automated information services.

02 : Single-key Call a) A call is initiated as soon as pressing a key and an extension is immediately called. That feature has a single parameter. The access code: A valid extension access code (the ringing extension) b) If the called extension is busy, then the process jumps to the Busy Menu, returns to the same menu and starts again from the entry message. c) If the called extension does not answer, the process jumps to the No Answer menu, returns to the same menu and starts again from the entry message.

03 : Collecting Numbers The numbers that are dialed during the normal or special time-out periods are collected by the system. Then the system checks whether the dialed code is a valid access code. a) If that is a valid access code, then the related extension is called. I.

If the called extension is busy, then the process jumps to the Busy Menu, returns to the same menu and starts again from the entry message.

II.

If the called extension does not answer, the process jumps to the No Answer menu, returns to the same menu and starts again from the entry message.

b) If the dialed code is not a valid access code or if it is the code of an inaccessible extension, then, in that case: I)

If the access code digit quantity is not enough, then the “Incomplete Number” constant message is announced and the process returns to the Action Decision step.

II) If the access code is invalid, then the “Wrong Number” constant message is announced and the process returns to the Action Decision step. III) If the access code belongs to an inaccessible extension, then the “Inaccessible Extension” constant message is announced and the process returns to the Action Decision step.

04 : Exit to DISA The user receives the DISA dial tone, upon exiting the Auto Attendant. Then s/he can take any action that a normal user is authorized to do on DISA lines.

97

DS200 Programming Guide

05 : Change Language Another language is selected upon pressing the related key. In that case: a) The system converts the language of the messages in all menus to another language. b) The process continues in the other language, starting from the entry of the same menu. Once the language has been changed, the later language will be valid until the caller exits the Auto Attendant.

06 : Leave Message: a) The system puts the caller into the queue for the busy extension and, if it has been programmed in that way, announces a message like “Please wait.” b) The system lets the caller leave a message with a length of at most 30 seconds. c) The process continues through the entry of the same menu. That action can be taken in the Busy and No Answer menus only. A message like “You can leave your message after the beep when you press the key...” may be announced.

07 : Call Back a) The system puts the caller into the queue for the busy extension and, if it has been programmed in that way, announces a message like “Please wait.” b) The system announces the Queue Information constant message to the caller. c) If the caller waits for 40 seconds, I.

If the extension is still busy, then the process returns to the Busy Menu.

II.

If the extension does not answer the call request, even if s/he has hung up, then the process returns to the No Answer Menu.

08 : Call the Ringing Extension a) The system transfers the call to the ringing extension. b) If the ringing extension is busy, then a message such as “The extension you are calling is busy. Please wait.” is announced and then the caller is put into the queue of the ringing extension. The connection is established when the ringing extension becomes available. c) If the ringing extension does not answer the call request within 30 seconds, then a message such as “We are sorry, your call cannot be answered right now. Please call again later.” is announced and then the line is dropped.

09: No Action The key is ignored. No action is taken. Another number is awaited for the action decision.

Menu Ringing Extension: When a certain quantity of busy and unanswered calls are made or when a certain quantity (see the total penalty) of invalid/incomplete numbers are dialed within a menu, the ringing extension determined by that parameter is called by exiting the menu. Besides, there is the choice of “Call the ringing extension.” in the action list that can be assigned to the keys.

800457 N A 98

DS200 Programming Guide

Parameters N

: 00..15

The menu page number

A

: The ringing extension

Default Value A = 1110

EVM200 Voice Level Settings: 800458 T S

Parameters T

S

: 0

The system message gain

: 1

The ACD message gain

: 0..6

The gain parameter (0 lowest, 6 highest)

Default Value For T = 1, S = 3, For T = 0, S = 3.

99

DS200 Programming Guide

X. LAN ADAPTOR CARD PROGRAMS LAN Adaptor card is an interface used to program the system remotely through an IP network such as LAN, WAN or Internet. As LAN Adaptor card is a kind of a network element, some network settings must be made to before using it.

Network Settings: Used to make the network settings of LAN Adaptor card.

800470 P T

Parameters P

T

:

1

IP number

:

2

Network gateway address

:

3

Subnet mask address

:

4

Port number

:

Takes values depending on the value of the parameter P.

P

1

IP number of 12 digit

2

Gateway address of 12 digits

3

Subnet mask address of 12 digits

4

Port number of 5 digits

Notes Example: If 800 470 1 192168002235 is entered, IP number is set to 192.168.2.235. If 800 470 3 255255255000 is entered, subnet mask is set to 255.255.255.0. If 800 470 4 15000 is entered, the port number is set to 15000. After making these settings, a short cut for the ADMIN200 program must be created and the following must be add at the end of the target line in the Properties of the short cut. “/lan:192.168.2.235:15000”. ADMIN200 must be run through this short cut.

100

DS200 Programming Guide

XI. VOIP CARD PROGRAMS To use ADMIN200 program is more practical for making the settings of VoIP card. But since the basic difference between VoIP card and other interfaces is direct connection to an IP network, the first network setting after VoIP card is installed must be made from the system supervisor’s telephone.

Network Settings Used to make network settings of VoIP card.

800480 P R Parameters P

R

: 1

IP address

: 2

Network gateway address

: 3

Subnet mask address

: The address information of 12 digits.

Notes 1. When defining the addresses, the empty digits should be entered as “0”. Example: If the IP address is 192.168.2.35, then the code 800480 1 192168002035 should be entered. 2. After the program code activation, the values are automatically set for the first VoIP card on the system. If there are more than one card on the system, successive IP addresses will again automatically be set for these cars. Gateway and Subnet mask addresses should be programmed as the same for the different cards on the system. 3. It is recommended to Ping to the cards from a PC on the same LAN to verify the programming.

101

DS200 Programming Guide

XII. LEAST COST ROUTING/NETWORKING PROGRAMS Least Cost Routing (LCR) facility is one of the most flexible and effective facility of the system. By the use of this facility, extensions make their calls as making normal calls as the system is selecting the cheapest or the most effective route with the extensions knowing it. Additionally, via the networking facility, far systems can be connected to each other and the extensions of each system can call extensions from the other system as if they are in the same system. As the LCR facility is very powerful but detailed, most of the settings are made through ADMIN200 program. The programs that can be entered through the system supervisor’s telephone are given below:

LCR Activation: The LCR parameters which are set via ADMIN200 program can be activated or deactivated by this program.

800803 P

Parameters P

: 0

LCR parameters are not active

: 1

LCR parameters are active.

LCR Route Access Authority: For the extensions whose Line Access Authorities are the same, the LCR route Access authority can be defined with this program. Thus, the extensions are authorized to use different levels of the LCR facility.

800804 A B C D E F G H

Parameters A

: 0-63

Access authority for the extensions with local line access authority.

B

: 0-63

Access authority for the extensions with long distance line access authority.

C

: 0-63

Access authority for the extensions with international line access authority.

D

: 0-63

Access authority for the extensions with line access authority level 4.

E

: 0-63

Access authority for the extensions with line access authority level 5.

F

: 0-63

Access authority for the extensions with line access authority level 6.

102

DS200 Programming Guide G

: 0-63

Access authority for the extensions with line access authority level 7.

H

: 0-63

Access authority for the extensions with line access authority level 8.

103

DS200 Programming Guide

XIII. FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PROGRAMS The access codes of extensions and lines, as well as feature codes, can be changed through the flexible programming feature in your DS200 system. The numbers have been assigned as factory default, regardless of the extension/line difference, as the first number of the first card being 1110 and incrementing that number by one for the following cards. If a card with a capacity of less than 16 lines has been installed in a slot, then only a portion of the 16 access codes reserved for that slot corresponding to the number of the lines is employed. The remaining portion is not used. Codes can be defined of length up to 8 digits for extensions, lines and the features. The new number of a line, whose access code has been changed, is used for all programs. The programs related to the flexible numbering are entered while the system is in the programming mode. Since those data are stored separately from other parameters, even if the system is reset through the code 800002 9, they retain their most recent values.

Clearing Extension And Line Access Codes: This program clears all extension and line numbers.

800900

Notes If a new numbering plan coincides with the previous or the default ones at too many points, then it may be too cumbersome to enter the new plan by the code 800903 A E, so all extension and line numbers are cleared through the code 800900. Then it will be necessary to enter new access codes for extensions and lines all over again. If the number of any extension is not entered after dialing that code, then one cannot access that extension.

Clearing Feature Access Codes: This program clears all feature access codes.

800901

Notes 1- If there are too many coincidences between the flexible numbering plan to be entered and the current feature access codes, then entry of new feature codes can be facilitated by entering that code. 2- You can delete all feature access codes by using that code. However, the programming access prefixes 800, 801 and 802 are not deleted when that code is used.

Flexible Numbering Reset: This program loads the default values to the Flexible Numbering table.

800902 104

DS200 Programming Guide

Notes Whatever the capacity of the system is, the access codes of all extensions are contained in the table. For the cases when a change will be done on a previously entered numbering plan, that program must not strictly be entered, or all the previously entered numbers will take on their default values. Since the default values for all extensions are loaded, regardless of the system capacity, following the entry of the program 800902, the numbers of non-existing extensions should not be assigned to the existing extensions. Hence, it is necessary to delete those non-existing extensions prior to number assignment. Besides, in case things go wrong while entering a numbering plan, it is possible to reset through this program, if necessary.

Extension/Line Access Code: This program changes the extension and line numbers.

800903 H E

Parameters H

: The access code of the extension or the line.

E

: The new access code. (minimum 1, maximum 8 digits)

Notes 1- A new access code can be entered for any extension or a line through this program. If the entered access code is of 8 digits, then dial tone or the invalid operation tone is received after entering the last digit. If dial tone is received, then the entered code does not coincide with any other code and the operation has been accomplished. On the other hand, if the invalid operation tone is received, then that means the code coincides with other codes, thus the operation has not been accomplished. 2- If the entered access code is of less than 8 digits, then the operation should be terminated with “*” key. (If the operation is attempted to be terminated by hanging up, then it cannot be accomplished.) In that case, either dial tone or the invalid operation tone is received. For the invalid operation case, either the coincided code must be replaced by another, or must be temporarily deleted. Clearing access codes through the code 800900 facilitates the entry of a numbering plan with many coincidences with the previous codes. (see Clearing Access Codes) 3- The access code of the line with number H is cleared after entering 800903 H, terminating the entry by “*” and receiving dial tone, respectively. That line can no longer be accessed, when another extension is called or external call is made through that line, nothing is transmitted as the access code of the line. Clearing access code can be applied as a temporary action in case there is code coincidence. 4- For example, suppose you would like to change the access code of an extension from 1112 to 1144, and at the same, you would like to change access code of another extension from 1144 to 1112. Both of the actions 800903 1112 1144 * and 800903 1144 1112 * will result with error. In that case, the programs 800903 1144 *, 800903 1112 1144 * and 800903 1144 1112 *, respectively, should be entered. 5- If the Karel digital telephone set is utilized for programming, then the coinciding number will be displayed, in case of a coincidence. 105

DS200 Programming Guide

Changing Access Codes Of A Group Of Extensions Or Lines: This program changes the current access codes of a whole line or extension group all at once.

800904 H1 H2 E

Parameters H1

: The access code of the first line or the extension in the group.

H2

: The access code of the last line or the extension in the group.

E

: The new access code to be assigned to the first line or extension of the group. (minimum 1, maximum 8 digits)

Notes 1- Numbers are automatically assigned by starting from E and incrementing by 1 to all lines between H1 and H2 . 2- In case E is of less than 8 digits, the program code must be terminated with “*”. Example: When 800906 1110 1125 2110* is entered, the access codes that were once between 1110 and 1125, now vary between 2110 and 2125 accordingly, after the change.

Feature Access Code: This code changes the feature access codes.

800905 P E

Parameters P

: The Feature code (3-digit special code)

E

: The new access code (minimum 1, maximum 8 digits)

106

DS200 Programming Guide

Feature Access Code Table FRC Feature 001 Follow me 002 Call Back 003 Line Park 004 Line Access 005 Last Number Redial 006 Calling From Common Pool 007 Selective Call Pick Up 008 Group Call Pick Up 009 Parked Call Retrieve 010 Parked Call Retrieve From Parking Extension 011 Date Setting 012 Time Setting 013 Set to Night Mode 014 System Parameter Update 015 Private Pool Entry 016 Common Pool Entry 018 Call Record Clear 019 Call Record Listing 020 Call Record Listing Stop 021 All Call Record Listing 022 Call Record Counter Reset 023 Programming Access Prefix 024 Programming Mode Entry 025 Programming Mode Exit 026 Night Mode Exit 027 Parallel Ringing 028 Do Not Disturb Activation 029 Do Not Disturb Cancel 030 Password Define 031 Phone Lock 032 Line Transfer to Extension 033 Conference 034 Executive – Secretary Enable 035 Executive – Secretary Disable 036 Reminder 037 Remote Follow Me 038 Line Drop 039 Password Dialing From Another Extension 040 ISDN Line Park 041 Pager Activation 042 Serial Call Transfer 043 Serial Call Transfer on ISDN phones 044 Message Waiting On The Operator 045 Wake Up Service 046 Remote Programming Through DISA Line 047 Auto-Dial Common Pool 048 Auto-Dial Private Pool 049 Night Watch Code 050 Line Transmit Voice Level 051 Line Receive Voice Level

Default FAC 85 81 4 9 60 3 82 5 45 44 833 832 879 744 84 834 8765 8766 8768 8767 8769 800 877777 877778 878 835 831 830 836 837 839 5 888 889 8380 865 798 799 47 741 8 48 740 8388 74 78 77 869 67 66 107

DS200 Programming Guide FRC 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 078 079 080 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093

Feature Marked Line Access Account Coded Line Access Line Access through DISA Line Hotel Room Status Hotel Room Status Query Hotel Room Query - Group Check-in / Check-out Meet Me Enable Minibar Account Meet Me Cancel Room Monitoring Enable Room Monitoring Activate Wake Up Service - Group Headset User Extension Background Music Listening to ACD and System Messages Recording ACD and System Messages Deleting ACD and System Messages Deleting All System Messages Deleting All ACD Messages Clear All Message Boxes Copy Message from Card to Card Line Access with a Line on Hold Listening to New Messages Listening to All Messages Leave Message Temporary Absent Message Permanent Absent Message Permanent Absent Message Activation Permanent Absent Message Deactivation Permanent Absent Message Clear Permanent Reminder with Message Temporary Reminder with Message Extension/Line Programming Access Prefix Extension/Line Programming Access Prefix_Group Busy Extension Call Pick Up Door Opener Follow Me No Answer Ring Transmit to Phone with Local Battery Line Flash

Default FAC 790 797 9 730 731 7319 732 738 733 739 8385 9 8389 742 743 7585 7586 7557 7558 7559 7561 7560 69 8646 8645 82 8648 737 7371 7372 7370 8387 8384 801 802 43 100 866 #3 #2

Notes The access codes of the features can be modified through this program when one wishes to make use of the features through shorter codes, or in cases when the entered numbering plan makes the feature codes too long. If the entered access code is of 8 digits, then dial tone or the invalid operation tone is received after entering the last digit. If dial tone is received, then the entered code does not coincide with any other code and the operation has been accomplished. On the other hand, if

108

DS200 Programming Guide the invalid operation tone is received, then that means the code coincides with other codes, thus the operation has not been accomplished. If the entered access code is of less than 8 digits, then the operation should be terminated with “*” key. In that case, either dial tone or the invalid operation tone is received. For the invalid operation case, either the coincided code must be replaced by another, or must be temporarily deleted. For example: A line is requested by pressing 9 in order to make external call; the code of that feature is 004. If the code 800904 004 01* is entered, then dialing 01, instead of 9, is required to access a line. The features that can be modified through the flexible numbering and their 3-digit special codes are in the table above. If the Karel digital telephone set is utilized for programming, then the coinciding number will be displayed, in case of a coincidence.

Access Code According To The Physical Location: This program defines the extension or line access codes according to physical location data.

800906 F E

Parameters F

: The 4-digit physical address of the line the number of which will be changed.

E

: The new access code (minimum 1, maximum 8 digits)

Notes 1- This program defines a new number for an extension or a line by using its physical address. 2- This program is useful for entering the correct access code without the need for the previous access code data, in case access codes of some of the extensions or lines have been forgotten or confused.

SUMMARY: Entering a New Numbering Plan (Following Reset): ♦ Fill in the Access Table form. ♦ If you clear the access codes of some non-existing extensions in the system in order to assign them to the existing extensions, or, in order to utilize the starting figures of them (eg. utilizing 2 in a system without an extension whose number starts with 2120), then enter Inaccessible next to that extension in the form. ♦ Enter a new numbering plan through the programs 800903, 800904, and 800905. In case there are coincidences, clear the coinciding access codes temporarily through the code 800903 H. ♦ Check whether the plan has been entered correctly by calling the extensions and accessing the features. 109

DS200 Programming Guide ♦ Transfer the Access Table to the non-volatile memory through the program 800000. ♦ Keep the Access Table form; it will be necessary in the future, when you would like to make modifications. Entering a New Numbering Plan (While there is already another plan): ♦ Fill in an Access Table form anew. ♦ If the numbering plan to be entered coincides with the current plan too much, then clear the extension and line access codes through 800900 or load the default values to the table through 800902. ♦ Enter the new numbering plan through the programs 800903, 800904 and 800905. In case there are coincidences, clear the coinciding access codes temporarily through the code 800903 H. ♦ Check whether the plan has been entered correctly by calling the extensions and accessing the features. ♦ Transfer the Access Table to the non-volatile memory through the program 800000. ♦ Keep the Access Table form; it will be necessary in the future, when you would like to make modifications. Making Modifications on the Current Numbering Plan: ♦ Make the necessary modifications on the current Access Table. ♦ Make the modifications, which have been recorded into the form, through the programs 800903, 800904 and 800905. In case there are coincidences, clear the coinciding access codes temporarily through the code 800903 H. ♦ Check whether the plan has been entered correctly by calling the extensions and accessing the features. ♦ Transfer the Access Table to the non-volatile memory through the program 800000. ♦ Keep the Access Table form; it will be necessary in the future, when you would like to make modifications. In Case Problems Related to Accessing Occur: ♦ Dial 744 on the operator phone. That code will re-load the program parameter and the Access Table from the non-volatile memory. If the problem persists, then make the necessary corrections on the Flexible Numbering Plan.

110

DS200 Programming Guide

XIV. MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS Stopping Alarm: This program allows stopping the alarm signal.

800701 P

Parameters P

: 1

For PABX systems the alarm when the system powered by battery is stopped. For rural systems SS7 link alarm is stopped.

: 2

For PABX systems PRI connection alarm, for rural systems powered down card alarm is stopped.

: 3

For PABX systems the alarm when the system is working on Stand-By CPU is stopped. For rural systems the alarm for erroneous rural extension test is stopped.

: 4

For PABX systems powered down card alarm, for rural systems alarm input alarm is stopped.

Powering A Card On/Off: This program allows replacement or addition of any line/extension interface card to the system while the system power is on.

800950 Y P

Parameters Y

: The slot number of the card

P

: 0

Power of the card is off.

: 1

Power of the card is on.

Default Value P = 1 for all cards.

Notes You can perform operations related to the cards through that code without powering the system off when you want to add or remove a card while the system is operating. Only the extension or line modules are turned on and off by that action, whereas the UTIL200 and CPU200 cards strictly must not be removed from the system in any case while the system is operating.

111

DS200 Programming Guide

93 13

61

77 45 29 12

60

92 76 44 28 11

59

91 75 58 27 10

43

90 74 57 26 09

42

89 73 56 25 08

41

88 72 55 24 07

40

87 71 54 23 06

39

86 70 53 22 05

38

85 69 52 21 04

37

84 68 51 20 03

36

83 67 50 19 02

35

82 66 49 18 01

34

81 33 17 00

32 16

48

65

80 64

94 78 46 30 14

62

6th rack 5th rack 4th rack 2nd rack 1st rack

THE FIRST CABINET

3rd rack

THE SECOND CABINET

The slot numbers corresponding to racks are in the table below: (The values that the parameter Y can take on.)

UTIL200 cards EX200 or EVM200 cards CPU200 card (No slot number) CC Enable (No slot number) The slot numbers of the UTIL200 cards have been presented, however the UTIL200 cards cannot be turned on or off through that program. By using that program, a card can easily be removed from the system by being powered off. Likewise, when a new card is added to the system, the card can be powered by that program.

Clearing The Non-Volatile Memory: 112

DS200 Programming Guide

800951 P

Parameters P

: 0

All parameters, except for call records, are cleared.

: 6

Call records are cleared.

: 7

All parameters are cleared.

Notes When this code is dialed, the parameters in the non-volatile memory are deleted according to the program entry. Then, in order to provide normal system operation, either the system tables should be reset or a parameter file which has previously been created for an exchange with the same configuration should be loaded through the ADMIN200 PC interface.

Card Configuration: 800952 Y P

Parameters Y

: PRI ISDN / R2 card Slot number

P

: 100100

The card is in the master mode (internal clock is used).

: 100101

The card is in the slave mode (external clock is used).

: 100200

Receive/transmit wire order of the card is in TE mode.

: 100201

Receive/transmit wire order of the card is in NT mode.

Notes 1- The entry of that program must be terminated with the “*” key. 2- The parameter of that program which is related to time is used especially in videoconference applications for selecting location of the PRI ISDN card. 3- If a problem with LEDs are observed when the card is placed into the slot, then that could be solved by adjusting the NT/TE mode parameter of the program.

Communication Query: This program transfers the data, related to the communication among the CPU200 Communication Controller and the other peripheral units, to the DS_DATA.BIN file.

800960 P

Parameters P

: 0

The communication parameters data do not flow into the DS_DATA.BIN file.

113

DS200 Programming Guide : 3

Data related to all communication parameters flow into the DS_DATA.BIN file.

: 4

Data related to all communication parameters of ISDN and digital extensions flow into the DS_DATA.BIN file.

: 7

Y

Q

Y

Card slot number

Q

: 1

The communication parameters of the card in the specified slot flow into the DS_DATA.BIN file.

Q

: 0

The communication parameters of the card in the specified slot that flow into the DS_DATA.BIN file are stopped.

: 8

Data related to the communication parameters of all Karel telephone sets and the DSS modules flow into the DS_DATA.BIN file.

: 9

A copy of information used in Fidelio hotel software is sent to DB-9 type connector on CPUKON card.

Notes 1- The ADMIN200 PC interface must be operational in order to utilize that program. When the admin software is run, the DS_DATA.BIN file is automatically created by the software. 2- Prior to the entry of that code, the current DS_DATA.BIN file belonging to the ADMIN200 PC interface should be renamed. Then the code should be entered and the DS_DATA.BIN file should be copied to another location when the recording is over, in order to be sent to Karel. Finally, the previously renamed file should be renamed as DS_DATA.BIN again. 3- Since the content of the file DS_DATA.BIN is encrypted, the data in that file cannot be deciphered by anyone except the specialized personnel. The proper check of the file will be performed by Karel. 4- When the system is turned on, the errors (if any) in EEPROM tables are recorded to DS_DATA.BIN file.

114

DS200 Programming Guide

Dynamic Parameter Query: 800962

Notes The inquired data is saved into the DS_DATA.BIN file.

Card Version Query: This program transfers the software version data of any card, which belongs to the system, to the DS_DATA.BIN file.

800970 Y 00

Parameter Y

: The number of the slot where the card is located.

Notes 1- Please see the Card Turn On/Off program, for the card slot numbers corresponding to racks. 2- The code 800960 3 should have been entered in order to make use of that program. 3- The ADMIN200 PC interface must be operational in order to utilize that program. 4- Prior to the entry of that code, the current DS_DATA.BIN file belonging to the ADMIN200 PC interface should be renamed. Then the code should be entered and the DS_DATA.BIN file should be copied to another location when the recording is over, in order to be sent to Karel. Finally, the previously renamed file should be renamed as DS_DATA.BIN again.

CC Version Query: This program transfers the software version data of the CPU200 Communication Controller to the DS_DATA.BIN file.

800971 00

Notes 1- The ADMIN200 PC interface must be operational in order to utilize that program. 2- Prior to the entry of that code, the current DS_DATA.BIN file belonging to the ADMIN200 PC interface should be renamed. Then the code should be entered and the DS_DATA.BIN file should be copied to another location when the recording is over, in order to be sent to Karel. Finally, the previously renamed file should be renamed as DS_DATA.BIN again.

Analog and Rural Extension Card Version Query: This program transfers the software version data of the analog extension cards to the DS_DATA.BIN file.

800972 00 115

DS200 Programming Guide

Notes 1- The ADMIN200 PC interface must be operational in order to utilize that program. 2- All extension cards are inquired by that program. 3- Prior to the entry of that code, the current DS_DATA.BIN file belonging to the ADMIN200 PC interface should be renamed. Then the code should be entered and the DS_DATA.BIN file should be copied to another location when the recording is over, in order to be sent to Karel. Finally, the previously renamed file should be renamed as DS_DATA.BIN again.

ISDN BRI and Digital Extension Card Version Query: This program transfers the software version data of the ISDN BRI and digital extension cards to the DS_DATA.BIN file.

800973 00

Notes 1- The ADMIN200 PC interface must be operational in order to utilize that program. 2- Prior to the entry of that code, the current DS_DATA.BIN file belonging to the ADMIN200 PC interface should be renamed. Then the code should be entered and the DS_DATA.BIN file should be copied to another location when the recording is over, in order to be sent to Karel. Finally, the previously renamed file should be renamed as DS_DATA.BIN again.

VoIP, TWT, PRI ISDN, BRI ISDN And R2 Line Card Version Query: This program transfers the software version data of the VoIP, TWT, PRI ISDN, BRI ISDN and R2 cards to the DS_DATA.BIN file.

800974 00

Notes 1- The ADMIN200 PC interface must be operational in order to utilize that program. 2- Prior to the entry of that code, the current DS_DATA.BIN file belonging to the ADMIN200 PC interface should be renamed. Then the code should be entered and the DS_DATA.BIN file should be copied to another location when the recording is over, in order to be sent to Karel. Finally, the previously renamed file should be renamed as DS_DATA.BIN again.

Analog and LB Line Card Version Query: This program transfers the software version data of the analog and LB line cards to the DS_DATA.BIN file.

800975 00

Notes 1- The ADMIN200 PC interface must be operational in order to utilize that program.

116

DS200 Programming Guide 2- Prior to the entry of that code, the current DS_DATA.BIN file belonging to the ADMIN200 PC interface should be renamed. Then the code should be entered and the DS_DATA.BIN file should be copied to another location when the recording is over, in order to be sent to Karel. Finally, the previously renamed file should be renamed as DS_DATA.BIN again.

Extension Parameter Query: This program transfers all the parameter data of an extension to the DS_DATA.BIN file.

800976 A

Parameter A

: The access code of the extension

Notes 1- The ADMIN200 PC interface must be operational in order to utilize that program. 2- Prior to the entry of that code, the current DS_DATA.BIN file belonging to the ADMIN200 PC interface should be renamed. Then the code should be entered and the DS_DATA.BIN file should be copied to another location when the recording is over, in order to be sent to Karel. Finally, the previously renamed file should be renamed as DS_DATA.BIN again.

Version Query Of Karel Feature Phones And DSS Modules: This program transfers the software version data of the Karel Digital telephones and the DSS modules to the DS_DATA.BIN file.

800977 00

Notes 1- The ADMIN200 PC interface must be operational in order to utilize that program. 2- Prior to the entry of that code, the current DS_DATA.BIN file belonging to the ADMIN200 PC interface should be renamed. Then the code should be entered and the DS_DATA.BIN file should be copied to another location when the recording is over, in order to be sent to Karel. Finally, the previously renamed file should be renamed as DS_DATA.BIN again.

Feature Table Query: This program transfers table data related to some features to the DS_DATA.BIN file, in case a problem occurs. By this way, it can be monitored whether there is a problem related to those features.

800978 P

Parameter P

: 0

The Call Back feature table

: 1

The Wait on Busy feature table

: 2

The Call Park feature table 117

DS200 Programming Guide : 3

DTMF and tone generation table

: 4

EVM200 table

: 9

Tables controlled by parameter values 0, 1 and 2.

Notes 1- The ADMIN200 PC interface must be operational in order to utilize that program. 2- Prior to the entry of that code, the current DS_DATA.BIN file belonging to the ADMIN200 PC interface should be renamed. Then the code should be entered and the DS_DATA.BIN file should be copied to another location when the recording is over, in order to be sent to Karel. Finally, the previously renamed file should be renamed as DS_DATA.BIN again.

PRI ISDN Card As System Clock Source: 800979 Y P

Parameters Y

: PRI ISDN / R2 card slot number

P

: 0

The card cannot be used as the clock source.

: 1

The card can be used as the clock source.

Default Value P=0 for all PRI ISDN/R2 cards.

Notes 1- One of the cards which are enabled as a source for the system clock by this program, is activated as the external clock source for the system if the external clock utilization is activated by 800980 coded program. If for any reason the card fails to receive the external clock, another card is activated by the system automatically. 2- Especially for data applications like video transmission, one of the cards in the first rack of the system must be enabled as the clock source. Additionally 800980 coded program must be used to activate the external clock source for the system.

External Clock: If it is required to synchronize the system with an external device (this is generally required for data applications like videoconference), then with this program the system must be set to use the external clock.

800980 P

Parameters P

: 0

System uses its internal clock.

: 1

System uses the external clock. 118

DS200 Programming Guide

Default Value P=0

Notes 1- If P=1 but the system cannot detect an external clock then it goes on using its internal clock. 2- If the system is set to use external clock source with this program then any one of the PRI ISDN / R2 cards which are enabled as the external clock source by 800979 coded program, is selected as the external clock source by the system automatically and the system synchronizes itself to that clock. 3- Especially useful for video conference and similar data transfer applications together with 800979 coded program.

Line Monitoring: Thanks to this program, a call being made on a line can be monitored and checked to see if there is any problem.

800989 Y P

Parameter Y

: The slot number of the related card

P

: 00..30

The number of the line to be monitored on the card

Notes 1- Do not hang up after having entered the program code. The conversation on the related line will be connected to your phone. In that case you can listen to both parties, but they cannot hear you. 2- The program is automatically deactivated when the phone through which the programming has been done is hung up.

Resetting The System By Preserving Its Parameters: In case a malfunction occurs in the system, the system status information is transferred to the DS_DATA.BIN file through this program.

800990

Notes 1- When this code is dialed, the system restarts without being powered off and with all the modified and saved parameters being preserved. This code is especially useful when there is a confusion about the parameters which have been saved into the system memory. It is also useful for inquiries about cases such as inaccessibility of a line as the result of suspension. 2- The ADMIN200 PC interface must be operational in order to utilize that program.

119

DS200 Programming Guide 3- Prior to the entry of that code, the current DS_DATA.BIN file belonging to the ADMIN200 PC interface should be renamed. Then the code should be entered and the DS_DATA.BIN file should be copied to another location when the recording is over, in order to be sent to Karel. Finally, the previously renamed file should be renamed as DS_DATA.BIN again.

120

DS200 Programming Guide

XV. REMOTE PROGRAMMING The DS200 system can be remotely programmed over the telephone lines. The remote programming feature is one of the best and most efficient means of software maintenance especially on customer side. Instead of spending extra time and making extra effort to reach the customer, a responsible technician can take advantage of the Remote Programming method in order to enter all of the programming codes and to activate some of the user features. This chapter gives information about the features a technician can make use of through remote programming. The terminology below applies within the chapter: The technician: The person who performs the remote programming. The Admin: The system supervisor on the customer side.

Activation Of The Remote Programming : The system supervisor can put the system into remote programming mode. In order to realize this, s/he has to make hook flash and dial 74 while speaking with the technician. In that case the line in use is marked as DISA and the technician can program the system by exploiting all the authority the Admin possesses. The Admin can activate the remote programming for more than one line simultaneously so that more than one technician can program the system at the same time.

Important Notes For The Technicians Who Will Make Use Of The Remote Programming Feature: a) If the technician is the extension of another system : 1. The technician must be using a DTMF telephone set. 2. The system, which the technician has employed, must be transmitting the dialed DTMF tones directly to CO. In other words, the system must not be processing those DTMF tones before transmitting to CO. For instance, if the system is an MS48, then the technician must be prohibited by programming to use the keys “*” / “#”. b) If the technician is directly connected to CO and the remote programming line is in DP mode: 1. In order to start the remote programming, either the operator should call the technician or the technician should use a DP-DTMF convertible telephone set. 2. The technician should be using her/his telephone in DP mode in order to call the operator. 3. Afterwards, the technician should enter the necessary codes through remote programming by converting the telephone into DTMF mode. c) Once the remote programming is activated, if the technician does not enter any code within 5 minutes, then the line is released automatically. d) Following the initiation of the remote programming, the technician starts to hear a special discontinuous dial tone and keeps on hearing it after each successful program or feature code entry.

121

DS200 Programming Guide e) If the technician enters a program or feature code incorrectly, then s/he receives the error tone. In such a case, s/he can refresh the discontinuous dial tone by pressing the “*” key. f)

If the numbering plan of the system, which is remotely programmed, has been previously modified, then the technician must use the new numbering plan.

A technician can use all of the program codes that are available in this guide. Additionally, s/he can activate the user and operator features below during the remote programming: 1. The night mode 2. Time setting 3. Date setting 4. Common pool entry 5. Parameter download 6. Call Listing 7. All Call Listing / Stop Listing 8. Total Cost Listing 9. Call Record Clear 10. Remote Follow Me 11. Line Access If no number is dialed within 15 seconds, after another line is accessed, then the line, which has already been accessed, is automatically released. The external call, which the technician will make, can take at most 50 seconds. 12. Calling an extension: While using this facility, if the extension of the system hangs up, the line is not released but the technician receives the special dial tone for remote programming, so that s/he can continue with the remote programming of the system.

Exiting The Remote Programming Mode After the remote programming is completed, the technician should give information to the Admin about the programming s/he has performed. In order to exit the remote programming mode: 1. The technician can drop the line by pressing the “#” key on her/his telephone, or, 2. The Admin drops the line by dialing 798 and the system exits the remote programming mode.

122

ADMIN200 USER’S GUIDE

The products may have some differences from the functionality written in this guide according to the hardware revision or software version.

TABLE OF CONTENTS I.

THE ADMIN200 PROGRAM ...................................................................................................................... 1

II.

INSTALLATION OF THE ADMIN200 PROGRAM ..................................................................................... 3

II.1. II.2. III.

CABLE CONNECTION....................................................................................................................... 3 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................. 3

HOW TO USE THE ADMIN200 PROGRAM ............................................................................................. 5

III.1. FILE MENU .......................................................................................................................................... 7 III.2. NON-VOLATILE MEMORY MENU........................................................................................................ 9 III.3. CONFIGURATION MENU ..................................................................................................................... 9 III.4. SYSTEM PARAMETERS MENU ......................................................................................................... 12 III.5. SERVICES MENU ............................................................................................................................... 13 III.6. TABLES MENU................................................................................................................................... 14 III.7. ACD MENU ......................................................................................................................................... 33 III.8. LCR-ARS MENU ................................................................................................................................ 35 III.9. REPORTS MENU................................................................................................................................ 39 III.10. SECURITY MENU ............................................................................................................................. 42 III.11. SPECIAL OPERATION OF ADMIN200.............................................................................................. 43 IV.

LCR-ARS .............................................................................................................................................. 55

IV.1. IV.2. IV.3. IV.4.

THE CALL FILTERS TABLE ............................................................................................................ 55 THE ROUTING TABLE..................................................................................................................... 56 THE ROUTING PLAN TABLE .......................................................................................................... 57 THE LEADING DIGITS TABLE......................................................................................................... 57

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

I.

THE ADMIN200 PROGRAM

The System Administrator program (ADMIN200) is a computer software towards programming Karel digital exchanges of models DS200, DS200S and DS200M over computer, viewing previously entered programs, as well as taking records and saving in computer. The ADMIN200 program is made up of two main files: 1) ADMIN200.EXE: The main program. 2) SERVICES.TXT: The text file that contains the list of user features, which are in the DS200, DS200S and DS200M software. 3) ROUTES.TXT: On the systems where statistics for external lines are important, some definitions have to be made for the routes so that the statistics are correct as per the routes. This file is used to make these definitions. The format of ROUTES.TXT is important. The first 5 rows must remain the same as shown in the figure below. The routes are defined in 6th row and the rows afterwards. The following points have to be kept in mind while forming this file: a. The rows should not start with character “#”. b. The access number of line which is used for incoming calls from the relevant route should be entered in “Incoming Trunk No” and LCR route number should be entered in “Route No” fields. c. “Space” key of the keyboard should be used for the blanks between the fields. (“Tab” key should not be used.)

4) Other Files: These files are stored under the folders which automatically formed under the directory of ADMIN200 program after the operations under Reports menu.

1

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide -

Errors folder: Contains the ddmmyyyy.txt file with error messages of lines, for R&D purposes. (The file name is the date of the Monday of current week. e.g.0812003.txt.)

-

Report folder: Explained in Trunks option of Reports menu.

-

Trunklog folder: Explained in Trunks option of Reports menu.

The ADMIN200 program is presented within a diskette that comes with each DS200, DS200S and DS200M system. The cable that will be used for the exchange-computer connection is provided as well, beside that diskette. The ADMIN200 program has been designed to work on Windows 9x, Windows NT, Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems, and it has a structure that would allow it to be used even by ones who have merely basic computer knowledge, due to its friendly GUI. The DS200, DS200S and DS200M exchanges can be programmed through the first analog extension phone, which has been determined as the Operator (Starting extension number is 1110.) by dialing the codes specified for programming. However, programming medium and large-scale exchanges such as DS200, DS200S and DS200M in that way may take quite long time and become cumbersome. Therefore, utilizing the ADMIN200 to program the exchange would provide time efficiency as well as facilitation and control of the programming through visual means. Through the ADMIN200 program, it is possible to do the entire programming that would be coded over the Operator phone. Besides, some features that can be activated by all users through their own phones (e.g. Follow Me) and some operator-specific features can be activated (e.g. the Night Mode). Some programming related to the system parameters, which could not be entered through phone, can also be accomplished through ADMIN200. The entire program functions are explained in the chapter “How to Use the ADMIN200 Program” in this guide. Since some of the features that can be controlled by ADMIN200 can be accomplished by dialing through phones as well, detailed information about those features are included in other guides, according to the structure of the codes; thus, this guide shall not mention such details, but shall reference to related guides, instead. Detailed information about the settings that can be done only by ADMIN200 has been presented in the final chapter of this guide.

2

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

II.

INSTALLATION OF THE ADMIN200 PROGRAM

II.1. CABLE CONNECTION In order to run the ADMIN200 program, the cable for computer-exchange connection that comes with DS200, DS200S or DS200M system should be connected first. That cable has a length of 5 meters. It has a 9-pin, D-type connector at the exchange end and 25-pin, D-type connector at the computer end. The pins used on that cable and the carried signals are in the table below: The Exchange End (9-pin)

Signal

The Computer End (25-pin)

2

TX

3

3

RX

2

4

RTS

20

5

CTS

7

7

GND

4

The only thing to be done to attain the cable connection is connecting the computer end of the cable to an unused serial output of the computer and connecting the exchange end to the 9-pin, D-type connector on the DS200 CPUKON or DS200S CPUKON card. Since the computer end is of 25 pins, in case the computer has no 25-pin output, a 9-pin serial output can be used by employing a standard 25/9 converter.

II.2.

SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

The software installation is quite simple. Just create a folder in the hard disk of the computer and then copy the files ADMIN200.EXE and SERVICES.TXT, which are included in the diskette, to that folder. The ADMIN200 program has been designed to run via COM2 port of the computer, by default. If the serial port number used on a specific computer is different, then a shortcut to the file ADMIN200.EXE should be created and the correct serial output number should be entered by making use of characteristics of that shortcut. The necessary procedure for that operation is below: Open the folder that contains the ADMIN200 program. Click on the ADMIN200.EXE file with the right mouse button. Select “Properties” from the menu. In the “Properties” window that has appeared, type the serial output number, after leaving a space at the end of the “Target” line.

3

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

Close the Properties window by clicking “OK”. After that step, the ADMIN200 program will start to communicate with the exchange directly over the recently entered serial output, when it is run through the already created shortcut.

4

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

III.

HOW TO USE THE ADMIN200 PROGRAM

When ADMIN200 runs, if the correct serial output has been chosen, then messages that demonstrate that the program is communicating with the exchange and receiving some data are displayed on the opening screen. In the meantime, the program opens a report file, namely DS_DATA.BIN, within the folder it has been installed and records some data into that file during operation. When the program gets into normal operation mode, the main window of the program is displayed on the screen.

There are three sets of fundamental information about the configuration of the system on this screen. As seen in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen, that information are the main software version of the exchange, the number of extensions and lines of the exchange. In addition to that, again in the taskbar, icons (leftmost) displaying whether the system is in the Night Mode or the Day Mode have been employed. At the center right in the main screen, the version number of the software being used is displayed in red characters. Menu options that would be functional for program utilization can be seen in menu bar. Those menus are as follows, from left to right in order: File Non-Volatile Memory Configuration System Parameters Services Tables

5

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide ACD LCR-ARS Reports Security Accessing the entire operations related to the ADMIN200 program is achieved over those menus. When any menu is selected, a menu window displaying options_if there is any_ within the menu appears. There are two types of options. One type of option directly initiates an operation and such menu items have no sign next to their titles. On the other hand, some menu items do not carry out any operation, but yield to another submenu with related suboptions. This type of options have a “” sign right to their titles. All of these menus are reviewed below one by one. There are a number of general-purpose buttons used in all menus. Since their functions are the same for all menu options, the explanations below apply for all menus; hence, similar explanations shall not be repeated for each menu. “Close” button: When this button is clicked, modifications made on the related menu option are cancelled, the menu option is closed and one proceeds back to the higher-level menu. “Program” button: In order to activate this button, value of at least one of the parameters of the related menu should be modified. Upon clicking that button when it is active, the entire modifications that have already been made are uploaded to the exchange. “Program All” button: This button is valid only if the same type of programming would apply for more than one window, and when it is clicked, all parameters in the entire windows are transferred to the exchange. “Update” button: When this button is clicked, the most up-to-date parameter values of the related menu option are reloaded from the exchange and displayed on the screen. Especially if programming is simultaneously done through the system supervisor phone while ADMIN200 software is being employed, then that button can be useful to view the latest forms of the programs entered through the phone, as well. “OK” button: If this button clicked after the sub-parameters related to a menu option have been programmed, then the modifications are accepted and one proceeds back to the upper level menu; however, those parameters are not uploaded to the exchange yet. One needs to click the button “Program”, in order to accomplish that. “Cancel” button: If this button clicked after the sub-parameters related to a menu option have been programmed, then the modifications are cancelled, and then one proceeds back to the upper level menu. “File” button: This button presents two sub-options. “Load”: A related parameter file that has been previously saved into the computer is loaded and displayed on the screen through this option. However, those parameters are not transferred to the exchange from the file directly, that operation is rather done after the loading upon clicking the “Program” button. “Save”: The parameters displayed on the screen are saved to a file through this option. “Reset” button: The parameters displayed on the screen are reset to their factory defaults through this button. However, they are not uploaded to the exchange until the “Program” button is clicked. “Delete” button: Upon clicking this button, value of the related parameter is deleted and the window is set for another entry. “^”Button: List of the menu options related to the current menu is displayed upon clicking this button and one may proceed to another menu option.

6

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide “ν”Button: A summarized view can be obtained through this button, if a window contains too many parameters. “?”Button: A specific parameter can be directly located through this button, if a window contains too many parameters. “List” button: A list of specific features can be viewed through this button. Contents of all menus are explained below, with respect to the order above.

III.1. FILE MENU

PC > PABX option is employed for transferring the exchange parameters, which have previously been saved into PC, to the PABX. Transferring can be performed for the entire parameters as well as for some specific parameter groups. Those parameter groups appear on the screen when the PC > PABX option is selected. Those are: •

Parameter File: The entire system, extension and line parameters. The file name extension is “DS2”.

•

Common Pool File: The numbers that have been recorded into the common memory of the system with a capacity of 1000 entries. The file name extension is “CPF”.

•

Private Pool File: The collection of private memory numbers that is created by each user for personal usage. The file name extension is “PPF”.

•

Account Code Table File: The table in which the customers who can make calls with password and restriction. The file name extension is “MST”.

•

LCR-ARS File: The parameters that would provide selection of the least-cost route automatically. The file name extension is “ASR”.

•

All: All of the parameters above. This option functions for all groups as if the entire parameters above have been selected one by one in a row.

When one of those options is selected, name of the file to be loaded is prompted. After a valid file name has been selected, the parameter values in the selected file are written into the volatile memory of the system and the system starts to operate with those values. In order to preserve those parameters in case of a power failure, the parameters should be saved in the non-volatile memory through the option “Write in the Memory” in the “Non-Volatile Memory” menu. Through the PABX > PC option, the parameter values that are active on the PABX are transferred from the PABX to the PC so that their back up is provided. Either the entire parameters can be transferred from the PABX to the PC in a single time or specific parameter groups can be transferred independently. Those parameter groups appear on the screen when the PABX > PC option is selected. Those are:

•

Parameter File: The entire system, extension and line parameters. The file name extension is “DS2”.

7

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide •

Common Pool File: The numbers that have been recorded into the common memory of the system with a capacity of 1000 entries. The file name extension is “CPF”.

•

Private Pool File: The collection of private memory numbers that is created by each user for personal usage. The file name extension is “PPF”.

•

Account Code Table File: The table in which the customers who can make calls with password and restriction. The file name extension is “MST”.

•

LCR-ARS File: The parameters that would provide selection of the least-cost route automatically. The file name extension is “ASR”.

•

All: All of the parameters above. This option functions for all groups as if the entire parameters above have been selected one by one in a row.

When one of those options is selected, name of the file in which the parameters will be saved is prompted and then the parameters are written into the file that has been created in the entered name. The PRINT option allows taking printouts of specific parameters from different environments through a printer. The sub-options for that option are:

•

File: This option is used for printing the contents of the file in which the parameters that have previously been transferred to computer environment have been saved. Name of the file containing the parameters to be printed is prompted upon selecting this option. The parameters are printed out upon entering a valid file name.

•

Settings: The parameter values that are active on the exchange are printed out.

•

Special: Printouts of some of the exchange data are taken optionally. The window below appears after selecting this option and the related parameters are printed out by marking desired items.

The program is exited by the

EXIT option.

8

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

III.2. NON-VOLATILE MEMORY MENU

The READ FROM THE MEMORY option transfers parameter values that are in the non-volatile memory of the exchange simultaneously both to the volatile memory and to the ADMIN200 program automatically. Hence, it is possible to view and modify the parameters directly, which are in the non-volatile memory. The WRITE IN THE MEMORY option allows writing of the parameters, which have been modified by ADMIN200 and which have already been saved in the volatile memory, into the non-volatile memory in order to preserve them in case of a power failure. This option should definitely be used following completion of the programming by ADMIN200. Otherwise, there might occur undesired loss of parameter values and thus operational malfunctions. Once the operation is over, the system displays the message “The operation has successfully been accomplished”. The RESET THE MEMORY option resets the entire parameter values in the non-volatile memory to their factory default values. In that case, either the exchange should be reprogrammed from the beginning, or a previously saved parameter file should be loaded. That option is especially useful if there have been some undesired changes in the parameter values, which are active on the exchange, or if the exchange is not functioning satisfactorily. The exchange could be re-programmed or another parameter file could be loaded after employing that option.

III.3. CONFIGURATION MENU

The window below appears when the “PABX Configuration” option is selected:

9

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

The characteristics of a card in any slot of any rack can be viewed in that window. One can choose a rack through the selection bar in the lower section of the window and view a card through a color scheme. The legend for that color scheme is continuously displayed on the right-hand side. Besides, the numbering plan related to a card can also be viewed by placing the mouse cursor on the card and keeping the left mouse button pressed. As long as the button is kept being pressed, the list of numbers that have been assigned to the lines on the card can be viewed.

10

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

As can be seen in the window view above, not only the line numbers, but also information such as the row of the card in the rack and type of the card can be obtained. Again, in this window, when the cursor is placed on a card and right mouse button is pressed, three options about the card are presented to the user. Those options are: Turn on the card: The line and extension cards in the exchange can be put on and off line through software control. Any card that has been put off line like this can be put on line again through that option. Turn off the card: Any line or extension card can be put off line through this option. By this way, the card can be disconnected and connected again while the exchange is still working normally. Version query: The software version of the card can be sent to the DS_DATA.BIN file through this option.

11

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

III.4. SYSTEM PARAMETERS MENU

Parameters related to the system in general are contained in five groups in the System Parameters menu. The guides that contain detailed information about the features related to those parameters are referenced to in the table below (PG : Programming Guide, UG: User’s Guide, AG: ADMIN200 User’s Guide). Group No

Parameter

Guide

1

Night Mode

UG

1

Programming

AG

1

Data

-

1

Music

PG

1

ACD

PG

1

External Clock

PG

1

Incoming Call Filter No

AG

1

Outgoing Call Filter No

AG

1

Operator No

AG

1

System Supervisor No

PG

2

“Follow Me Busy” for external calls?

PG

2

“Follow Me Busy” for internal calls?

PG

2

“Follow Me No Answer” for external calls?

PG

2

“Follow Me No Answer” for internal calls?

PG

2

Automatic Hold Time

PG

12

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide 2

Call Park Duration

PG

3

Automatic Night Mode (ANM)

PG

3

ANM Timing

AG

3

Weekly ANM

PG

4

Relay 1 Timeout

PG

4

Relay 2 Timeout

PG

4

System Messages Gain Level

PG

4

ACD Messages Gain Level

PG

4

PBX Ring Count

PG

4

Autocall Try Count

PG

4

External Caller Via ACD Hears

PG

4

Call Record Filter

PG

4

Pager-Base Station Connected to

PG

4

Serial Printer Language

PG

4

Dial tone After End Of Call

PG

4

LCR Active

PG

5

Tone Detection

PG

5

Connect Tone While In Filter

PG

5

Group PBX Mode

PG

5

Call Record Generated After

PG

5

External ACD Access Code

PG

No modification can be made on the parameter KTS mentioned above. That parameter indicates whether the serial data line, which is employed by the exchange for feature phone sets, works or not. On the other hand, the “Program” button is activated upon any modification on other parameters and when it is clicked, the modifications are uploaded to the exchange.

III.5. SERVICES MENU

13

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

This menu is used for changing the service access codes of the features on the exchange used by extensions or the operator. Each service has an access code and a service code. The “service code” and “access code” list of the services contained in the software of the exchange can be retrieved by clicking the button “List”. The access code of a service code from that list can be changed by entering another code in the “New value” field and clicking the “Program” button. However, if the new value coincides with an existing code on the exchange, no programming can take place and the user receives an error message. In that case, another code that would not coincide should be entered. In order to view the list mentioned above properly, the file ADMIN200.EXE and the file SERVICES.TXT, which has come together with that file, must be in the same folder. If, somehow, they are not in the same folder, then the list is retrieved again, but the names of the services are displayed as “?”. Except this fact, no problem occurs in operations of either the program or the exchange.

III.6. TABLES MENU

14

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide The ACCESS TABLE option is one of the most comprehensive options of the ADMIN200 program. Upon selecting it, the entire extensions and lines of the exchange are listed according to the order they have been located on the exchange. There are two essential elements in the list: 1. The physical address, 2. The access code. The physical address is an address scheme, which the users are not aware of, used by the exchange in order to locate extensions and lines. Users can access a line by dialing access codes only and they never use the physical address. The list appears as below:

Apparently, the physical addresses starts from “0” at the first extension of the first analog extension card that is installed in the first slot of the first rack and they are incremented by one for all lines. If there are empty slots on the exchange, then physical addresses are assigned to those slots, too, but those empty slots do not appear in the list. By this way, display for occupied slots is provided only. Different types of lines that are present in that list have been indicated by a color scheme. Although this color scheme is the same as the one displayed in the window reached over the Configuration Menu, it can be viewed in that window as well, upon wish, in order to facilitate the interpretation of the view. The color scheme is displayed by placing the mouse cursor on

15

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide the button at the upper right corner of the window and keeping the left mouse button pressed. That list appears as below:

The main purpose of the list seen in this window is providing means to access the entire lines one by one and making necessary modifications, as well as informing the user about the overall configuration. For that purpose, the mouse cursor is placed on the physical address of the related line and the right mouse button is pressed. There are four options in the menu that appears afterwards: 1) Parameters, 2) ARS Access Authorization Level, 3) Program, 4) Delete.

Parameters: When this option is selected, different parameter groups are presented to the user according to the characteristics of the line for each line type. Those are inspected in detail below:

16

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide For analog, digital, ISDN and rural extensions:

Parameters related to that type of lines constitute 6 groups. The parameters in those groups and list of the guides, in which details about them can be found, have been given below: Group No

Parameter

Guide

1

State of the Telephone

UG

1

Do Not Disturb

UG

1

Executive Secretary Mode

UG

1

DISA

PG

1

PBX Distribution

PG

1

#, * Keys

PG

1

Hook Switch

PG

1

CRL Port Filter

PG

1

Hotel Room Access Permission

PG

1

Extension Type (Normal/Hotel Room)

PG

1

Personnel Telephone

PG

1

Tone On Busy

PG

1

Extension Type (Phone/Fax)

PG

1

Fax Server (only for ISDN and digital extensions)

PG

17

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide 2

Password

UG

2

Outgoing Call Timeout (sec)

PG

2

Intrusion Authority

PG

2

Hot Line

PG

2

Hot Line Mode

PG

2

Can Hold In Hot Line Mode

PG

2

Extension Type

PG

2

Pager

PG

2

Reminder

UG

2

Phone Lock Level

UG

3

Common Pool Use

AG

3

Line Access Permission

AG

3

Parallel Ringing

UG

3

External Call Authority Level

PG

3

Line Access Group No

PG

3

Follow Me

UG

3

PBX

PG

3

Follow Me No Answer

UG

3

Can Activate Follow Me

PG

3

Executive Secretary Group

PG

3

External ACD can be used

PG

3

External ACD connected

PG

4

Room Vacancy

UG

4

Room Tidiness

UG

5

Message Box

PG

5

Temporary Absent Message

UG

5

Permanent Absent Message

UG

5

Reminder with Message

UG

5

Permanent Reminder with Message

UG

5

System Messages Language

PG

5

Lock Message

UG

5

Access to Message Box

PG

5

Voice Message

PG

6

Call Pick-Up Permission

PG

6

Incoming Calls Can Be Picked-up

PG

6

Line Calls Can Be Dropped

PG

18

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide 6

Can Activate Call Back

PG

6

Can Be Signalled

PG

6

Can Access a Line via DISA

PG

The features with group numbers 3 and 6 may be programmed to take different parameters for the Day and the Night modes. Therefore, the mode of the programming should be selected at the top of the window and then the modifications should be done accordingly. When any parameter in any group is modified, the “Program” button becomes active and when it is clicked, the modifications are uploaded to the exchange. Notes: 1- The data related to the features Temporary Absent Message and Temporary/Permanent Audio Alarm cannot be modified; rather, only the data of the features activated through an extension phone can be viewed. 2- The Permanent Absent Message is not selectable unless there is already a recording. It can take place in that section in order to be activated or cancelled only after a message has been recorded. 3- There is no operation associated to the Message Box option. It is there only for displaying to the user whether there is any new message.

For Analog and LB Lines:

Parameters related to that type of lines constitute 5 groups. The parameters in those groups and list of the guides, in which details about them can be found, have been given below: Group No

Parameter

Guide

1

Authorization Check

PG

19

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide 1

By 9

PG

1

Dial

PG

1

State

PG

1

TX Gain

PG

1

RX Gain

PG

1

Metering Pulse Price

PG

1

Guest Charge Pulse Price

PG

1

Error

AG

1

Application

PG

1

Line-Line Connection Time-out

PG

1

Usage

PG

2

In Service for Extension Groups

PG

2

Ringing Extension No

PG

2

PBX

PG

3

Remote Line Access Time-out

PG

4

Greeting Menu Number

PG

4

Busy Menu Number

PG

4

No Answer Menu Number

PG

4

Night Greeting Menu Number

PG

4

DISA Remote Line

PG

4

After Error DISA Line

PG

4

No Answer Menu (Nt)

AG

4

Busy Menu (Nt)

AG

5

Check Dialtone

PG

5

Before Sending Numbers

PG

5

Special line

PG

5

Dial Type After Connection

PG

The features with group numbers 2 may be programmed to take different parameters for the Day and the Night modes. Therefore, the mode of the programming should be selected at the top of the window and then the modifications should be done accordingly. When any parameter in any group is modified, the “Program” button becomes active and when it is clicked, the modifications are uploaded to the exchange.

20

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide For the PRI ISDN, R2, BRI ISDN, TWT and VoIP lines:

Parameters related to that type of lines constitute three groups. The parameters in those groups and list of the guides, in which details about them can be found, have been given below: Group No

Parameter

Guide

1

Authorization Check

PG

1

By 9

PG

1

State

PG

1

Metering Pulse Price

PG

1

Guest Charge Pulse Price

PG

1

Error

AG

1

Line-Line Connection Time-out

PG

1

TX Gain (1)

PG

1

RX Gain (1)

PG

1

Usage (2)

PG

1

EAC Table (3)

PG

2

In Service for Extension Groups

PG

2

PBX

PG

3

Remote Line Access Time-out

PG

21

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide The features with group numbers 2 may be programmed to take different parameters for the Day and the Night modes. Therefore, the mode of the programming should be selected at the top of the window and then the modifications should be done accordingly. When any parameter in any group is modified, the “Program” button becomes active and when it is clicked, the modifications are uploaded to the exchange. (1)

These fields are available only for TWT lines.

(2)

This field is not selectable for VoIP and TWT lines.

(3)

EAC Table is a quite important table for PRI ISDN, BRI ISDN and R2 lines. (This field does not appear on the screen for TWT and VoIP lines.) In that table, according to the numbering plan obtained from CO, specific numbers ring at specific extensions through corresponding programming upon wish. Besides, it can also be determined through programming, provided that there is EVM200 card on the exchange, whether a line will be answered by ACD and if it that is the case, the menus to be activated will be determined, too. That table can be viewed in two ways on the screen. The first of them is as can be seen below:

EAC Table for PRI ISDN and R2 Lines

22

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

EAC Table for BRI ISDN Lines The permanent part (the part excluding the last three digits) of the number obtained from CO is entered in the “Prefix” field that is located at the top of that screen. The term “EMPTY”, which appears in the fields next to the DDI digits, which vary in the range 000..999, demonstrates that those lines have not been allocated to any extension. The field “Block No”, on the other hand, allows the user to browse through the DDI number table automatically. For instance, if “9” is entered as the “Block No”, then the DDI numbers starting from 900 are displayed in the table. Alternatively, the scroll bars at the right side of the table can also be used for browsing the table. Two options are presented to the user when the right mouse button is clicked on a DDI number: 1) Delete 2) Edit The Delete option is employed for deleting an extension number – if there is any – defined for the related DDI number. The Edit option, on the other hand, is employed for changing an extension number that has been defined for the related DDI number, or if there is no such extension number, then the option is employed for defining one. The window below appears upon selecting the Edit option:

23

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

The complete number is entered in the field “Tel No”, for BRI ISDN lines and only the DDI digits (last 3 digits of the number) for the PRI ISDN or R2 lines. Then the forwarding for the entered number is done to the extension whose number has been entered in the Access code field. The Access code displays the extension at which the line with the number in the “Tel No” field will ring. The access codes of the related extensions should be entered in that field. The “Type” field is employed for determining the line with the defined Tel No as normal, DISA or a line to be answered by ACD. The other fields are employed for determining the DID line and ACD features. The window displaying the main list can be extended to display the ACD menu parameters as well, upon wish. The sign “Æ”, which is at the upper right side of the window, should be clicked for that. When any modification in that table is made, the “Program” button becomes active and when it is clicked, the modifications are uploaded to the exchange. Moreover, there is a “File” button in that window, too. The current table can be saved in a file or a saved table can be loaded from a file by making use of that button. When one of those options is selected, a file name with the extension AET is prompted and the desired operation is accomplished through the selected file name. Another button that takes place in that window is the button “?”. The “Access Code” is prompted upon clicking that button. An extension number entered in that field is searched in the table, and if that number has previously been recorded to the table, then the related table line is displayed.

24

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide For E&M lines:

Parameters related to that type of lines constitute 5 groups. The parameters in those groups and list of the guides, in which details about them can be found, have been given below: Group No

Parameter

Guide

1

Dial

PG

1

Status

PG

1

TX Gain

PG

1

RX Gain

PG

1

Line-Line Connection Time-out

PG

2

PBX

PG

3

Remote Line Access Time-out

PG

3

E&M Tone Reception

PG

3

E&M Tone

PG

3

Connect to E&M operator

PG

The features with group numbers 2 may be programmed to take different parameters for the Day and the Night modes. Therefore, the mode of the programming should be selected at the top of the window and then the modifications should be done accordingly. When any parameter in any group is modified, the “Program” button becomes active and when it is clicked, the modifications are uploaded to the exchange. The ARS Access Authorization Level option presents different parameters for extensions and lines. For the extensions, The ARS system utilization authorization levels for the Day and

25

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide the Night Services for the related extensions are displayed and modified, upon wish. For the lines, on the other hand, Access Authorization Levels are displayed and modified, upon wish. The ARS parameters cannot be programmed through phone. Therefore, the details about that topic have been presented at the final chapter of this guide.

The Program option is employed for changing the access code of the line. The window below appears upon selecting this option. Here, the new access code for that line should be entered in the field “Starting” and then the “Program” button should be clicked. No modification can be done in the Range (As Port No) field in this window. The Delete button deletes the access code of the line. If the “Program” button is clicked, while the access code of a line has already been deleted, then that line appears to be vacant in the access table and it cannot be accessed. On the other hand, if the number of the line is changed and then the “Program” button is clicked, then the new value is uploaded to the exchange. However, if the new code coincides with an already existing code, then the program will warn the user by an error message and require another code that would not cause a conflict. The Delete option deletes the access code of the related line. There are general-purpose buttons in the Access Tables window. They are located at the bottom of the screen. The Close button closes the window. The data related to the table can be retrieved from the exchange by making use of the Update button. By this way, if there are problems that have already occurred in the table, then they will automatically be eliminated.

26

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

The access codes of lines that are in a specific physical address range of the exchange can be change altogether by making use of the “Program” button. The physical address of the first line to be programmed is entered in the “Starting” field in the Range section, and the physical address of the last line is entered in the “Ending” field. The access code that will be assigned to the first physical address is entered as the Starting value and the increment value to be used for increasing the access codes is entered in the Increment field. Increments of 1, 5 or 10 can be chosen in that field. The changes made in the Access Table are cleared and the table is reset to factory default access code values upon clicking the Reset button. That button does not change the settings for extensions and lines; it rather resets the access codes to their factory default values only. Lines, which are normally listed according to their physical addresses, are displayed with respect to their access codes in the Access Table by pressing the “ν” button. However, no operation can be done on the lines displayed in that view. The “Access Code” is prompted upon clicking the “?” button. If the entered access code exists in the system, then it is located in the list and the line is directly displayed on the screen. The TOLL RESTRICTION TABLE option displays and allows modifications of the fields of the Line Restricted Prefix Table (see PG), which consists of the line numbers that the extensions are not allowed to dial according to their authorization levels, and the Line Permitted Prefix Table (see PG), which consists of the numbers that are allowed to be dialed by the extensions beyond their authorization levels.

27

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

Two tables appear on the screen when that option is selected. Table 1 corresponds to the Line Restricted Prefix Table and the prefixes entered in this table are applied as restrictions to extensions. Table 2 corresponds to the Line Permitted Prefix Table and extensions can call the numbers with the prefixes entered in this table, against their authorization restrictions. The

MEMORIES option presents two sub-selections to the user:

The Common selection lists 1000 common pool numbers of the exchange and changes can be done on each entry, upon wish. In order to make changes on a record, click the right mouse button on a number in the “No” column and then select the “Change” option. If a delay period is required between two digits, then entering a comma between the related digits in the “Number” field allows the exchange to wait during the processing of those digits.

28

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

The “Program” button should be clicked for the modifications or additions to take effect. The changes can be saved to a file or an existing file can be loaded by clicking the “File” button. A file name will be prompted in either case. The necessary operation will be accomplished according to the entered file name.

The Private option lists 10 private pool numbers of the exchange, which are specific to the related extension and changes can be made on each entry, upon wish. In order to list the private pool numbers of a specific extension, the corresponding number of the related

29

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide extension is selected in the Access Code field. Later, in order to make changes on one of the listed records, click the right mouse button on a number in the “No” column and then select the “Change” option. If a delay period is required between two digits, then entering a comma between the related digits in the “Number” field allows the exchange to wait during the processing of those digits. The “Program” button should be clicked for the modifications or additions to take effect. The changes can be saved to a file or an existing file can be loaded by clicking the “File” button. A file name will be prompted in either case. The necessary operation will be accomplished according to the entered file name. The PBX GROUPS option is used for forming PBX groups for extensions and lines. The windows for extensions and lines sub-options and the process of forming groups are the same. Therefore forming PBX groups of extension is explained in the following sections. Line PBX groups can be formed using the similar methods. When extension option is selected, the following window appears:

After Day or Night mode is selected in the field on the top of the window, the desired extensions should be selected by the mouse from the list at the right side of the window. When an empty row is selected and « is pressed, the PBX group is formed. The position of an extension can be changed by the arrow keys and the extension can be removed from the PBX group by the “x” key. Another point that should be considered is that an extension cannot be a member in more than one PBX group. Through the ACCOUNT CODE TABLE option, settings done by the Forced Account Code User and the related programs are displayed and accomplished. The table below is reached through that option:

30

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

In this table, those can be entered: guest codes in the range 0..999, parameters determining the activation statuses for password, line authorization level and pulse price check for the related guest, as well as the amount of customer charge pulse price. The table below is reached after clicking on the related line with the right mouse button: After adjusting the necessary parameters for the related guest code in this window, the record entry is completed by clicking the “OK” button. The R button next to the password field in this window can be used for allowing the computer to assign a random password automatically. The data is uploaded to the exchange by clicking the “Program” button that is in the lower section of the main table, after the settings for the related guest code are done.

31

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide Another button located in the Guest Codes Table is the “Close” button. The window is closed by this button. The “Update” button is used for making sure that the most current form of the table is being displayed. The “File” button, on the other hand, is used for saving the changes to a file or retrieving a table previously saved in a file. A file name will be prompted in either case and the necessary operation will be accomplished according to the entered file name. The user is prompted to enter a guest number when the “?” button is clicked. The corresponding line in which the information about the related guest is displayed when the number has been entered. Through the FIRST DIGITS TABLE option, the number of digits for the dialed numbers on external lines can be determined. The following window appears after selecting this option.

If the number of digits for numbers starting with a specific digits is to be changed, the box under the desired digits is left clicked and the desired value is entered.

PHONE LOCK LEVELS option is used for defining levels for extensions so that they can use these levels to lock their telephones for different types of calls.

After right clicking on a box and entering a value, a locked number for that row can be defined. When a box is right clicked, two options “Delete” and “Delete All” appear. “Delete” button clears the value in that box whereas “Delete All” clears all of the boxes on that row. The GPBX ACCOUNTS option is used for defining metering pulse accounts for extensions and lines to be used in GPBX Mode. The windows for extensions and lines suboptions and the process of forming groups are the same. Therefore forming accounts for extensions is explained in the following sections. Line accounts can be formed using the similar methods. When extension option is selected, the following window appears:

32

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

The values can be changed by left clicking on the boxes. Using “Sort type”, the list on the window can be sorted with respect to extension numbers or to their physical addresses. “Report” forms a file to be used as reference, this file cannot be used to download any data to the system.

III.7. ACD MENU

This menu is employed only when there is EVM200 Auto-Attendant and Voice Message module installed on the exchange, for checking the parameters related to that module. The window below appears when the

GENERAL PARAMETERS option is selected:

33

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

Details about the entire parameters seen in the windows with the group titles “Parameter” and “Message Types” can be found in PG. When any of these parameters is modified, the “Program” button becomes active and when it is clicked, the modifications are uploaded to the exchange.

34

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide The window below with 16 groups, for 16 menus that are all the same, appears when the MENU option is selected: There are windows above containing the same parameters under the group headings extending from Menu 0 to Menu 15 for 16 Auto-Attendant Menus. Details about the entire parameters in those windows can be found in PG.

III.8. LCR-ARS MENU

None of the parameters in this menu can be entered in the exchange through programming by phone. Hence, details about the LCR-ARS menu have been presented in the final chapter of this guide.

The window below opens when the CALL

FILTERS option is selected:

In this window, the filters that will be applied to the number dialed through the LCR are defined for every ARS (Automatic Route Selection) line. Those filters defined here will be used for the Routing Table entries. In order to enter data in any line in this window, the filter section of the related line is double clicked with the left mouse button and then the necessary filter value is typed. The elements that can be used for defining filters have been explained in detail in the next chapter. The “File” button is used for saving the changes to a file or retrieving values that has previously been saved in a file. A file name will be prompted when this button is clicked and the necessary operation will be accomplished according to the entered file name.

35

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide The LCR-ARS definitions are very comprehensive and all settings must be flawless in order to make use of the LCR-ARS feature. Therefore, one can proceed through the “^” button to the other tables related to the other settings. The window below opens when the ROUTE TABLE option is selected:

This window explains how checks and operations are done according to the numbers dialed by the extensions for making external calls. When extensions access lines and dial numbers, the exchange checks those numbers one by one. If those numbers coincide with the ones that are in the Routing Table, then the exchange takes the actions in the related line of the table. The extensions are unaware of those operations. Therefore, that feature is called the Automatic Route Selection. There are different definitions for the 3 routes mentioned in the table above. Details of the parameters in that table have been explained in the final chapter of this guide. The “Close” button in the “Routing Table” window is used for closing the window. The “Update” button is used for loading the current form of the table that is in the memory of the exchange. The “Program” button becomes active when modifications with any parameter have been done and those modifications are uploaded to the exchange when the button is clicked. The “File” button is used for saving the modifications in a file or retrieving data that have previously been saved in a file and loading it to the table. A file name is prompted when this button is clicked. The necessary operation is accomplished according to the entered file name. The “^” button is used for proceeding directly to the other tables related with LCR-ARS.

36

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

The window below opens when the ROUTING PLAN

TABLE option is selected:

The day and time of usage of the routes defined in the Routing Table are determined by the parameters that are entered in the Routing Plan Table. In order to enter a value, one should double click the related field and enter the value. Moreover, it is possible to define 16 different Routing Plan Table through this table. Details about those parameters are in the final chapter of this guide. The “Close” button is used for closing the window. The “Update” button provides displays the current form of the table that is in the memory of the exchange. The “Program All” button is used for uploading the entire modifications in different Routing Plan Tables to the exchange. The modifications can be saved in a file or data in a file that has previously been created can be retrieved through the “File” button. A file name will be prompted when this button is clicked. The necessary operation is accomplished according to the entered file name. The “^” button is used for proceeding directly to the other tables related with LCR-ARS. The window below appears when the LEADING

DIGITS TABLE option is selected:

37

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

The routes that the exchange will apply according to the numbers dialed by the extension is defined in this table. In order to enter a value, one should double click the related field and enter the value. Details about those parameters in this table are in the final chapter of this guide. The “Close” button is used for closing the window. The “Update” button provides displays the current form of the table that is in the memory of the exchange. The “Program” button is used for uploading the entire changes to the exchange. The modifications can be saved in a file or data in a file that has previously been created can be retrieved through the “File” button. A file name will be prompted when this button is clicked. The necessary operation is accomplished according to the entered file name. The “^” button is used for proceeding directly to the other tables related with LCR-ARS.

38

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

III.9. REPORTS MENU This menu is used for having statistics of the calls made through external lines that are defined in ROUTES.TXT file.

SETTINGS option can be used for the scheduling of automatic statistics for external lines. With this option, the following window appears:

Provided that Collect Trunk Data option is marked, statistical information for external lines is received periodically with intervals specified in Collect period. Next data collection shows the time that the next statistics will be received automatically. (The clock of the PC on which ADMIN200 is running is used for this timing.) The report for automatic statistics can be reached through TRUNKLOG folder in the directory where ADMIN200 is running. This folder is formed automatically after automatic statistics of external lines is obtained. The following files are formed under TRUNKLOG folder: -

ddmmyyyy.txt: This file shows the report for the latest statistics. Its name is the date of the Monday of the current week. (e.g.0812003.txt)

-

details.txt: This file also shows the latest statistics. In addition to ddmmyyyy.TXT, the detailed information is given per access codes of lines.

-

backup.txt: The report for previously taken statistics are archived in this file.

TRUNKS option opens a new window with the following two items: Collect data: Collects the statistical information about the external calls depending on call status (busy, answered, ect.). Create report: Obtains the report for the statistics received by “Collect data” option. With this option, the following window appears:

39

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

In this window, the range for the desired statistics must be specified. The name of the system (local name) and the name of the reporter (reporter) can be entered if desired. If “Cancel” button is pressed, the window is closed without any operations. When “Continue” is pressed, the following window is opened:

In this window, the report file in HTML format is received through “Open file” in the following window:

40

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

If desired, this report can also be reached through REPORT folder in the directory where ADMIN200 is running. This folder is formed after statistics of external lines are obtained manually. It contains the following files: - logo.jpg: The image file of the logo that appears on the top right corner of the report. - trunk.htm: The report file.

41

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

III.10. SECURITY MENU

This menu has no sub-selections. When it is selected, the window below opens: The Security Menu includes password check feature to the ADMIN200 program, according to the needs of the user. There is no default password for ADMIN200. The user can define two different passwords for two different functions by this window, upon wish. The first of them is the password that is defined for Startup. That password can be defined by entering it twice in the “Password” and “Password Again” fields and then clicking the “OK” button. If “Ask for password at startup.” box is marked, in addition to defining that password, then the user is prompted for a password at startup each time the program runs. The other password is the one that can be defined for programming. That password can be defined by entering it twice in the “Password” and “Password Again” fields and then clicking the “OK” button. If “Ask for password at programming.” box is marked, in addition to defining that password, then the user is prompted for a password each time a parameter is modified and the “Program” button is clicked. In fact, that password is prompted only for the first programming request and if the correct password is entered, there will be no other password request until the program is exited. Another function of the Security feature is represented in the main window of ADMIN200 with the icon depicted by a group of keys (see the figure below). If the program will not be used for a while even though it still runs, or it should keep running for some queries while the user is away, then this function can be employed in order to prevent unauthorized usage and modifications. When this icon is clicked, the program is minimized to the Windows taskbar. The startup password is prompted in order to maximize the program again and if the entered password is incorrect, then accessing the program will be impossible.

42

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

III.11. SPECIAL OPERATION OF ADMIN200 The ADMIN200 program has been designed in a way that will enable programming of lower level parameters as well. All the facts mentioned so far are related to the settings that can be done through normal usage of the ADMIN200 program. In addition to those, it is possible to view the contents and setting the memory elements that are on the entire extension and line cards. However, since such settings would affect the overall performance of the exchange, one must consider the results of the actions related to such parameters very carefully. If one is not absolutely sure about the settings, then no setting on the parameters must be done. Besides, the parameters to be modified may be ones that will be affected by external variables (such as some clocking parameters). Hence, the sufficiency of the modifications must be checked afterwards and the convenient values must be set by varying the parameter value. In order to run this special operation of ADMIN200, an addition to the shortcut file for running the program is required, very similar to adding serial output number. That addition is performed as shown below.

When the program runs after that addition, one can observe that the entire main window structure and the structures of the menus, except the “Tables” menu, have remained absolutely the same. The “EEPROM Tables” option is added to the “Tables” menu. For the modifications made through that option to take effect, the exchange or the entire cards of the same type as the one, whose parameters have been changed, must be turned off and on again.

43

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

When the EEPROM TABLES option is selected, a menu containing options for different extension and line types appears:

When the Extension option is selected, the contents of the memory element, which is on the extension cards, are presented as a table in hexadecimal. This table is rather for R&D purposes; hence making modifications in that table might disrupt operation of the exchange. In addition to that, a button has been included at the bottom of the window, in order to interpret and set the parameters more easily in a visual way.

44

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

Two options are presented to the user when the “Other” button is clicked. The Cadence Settings option changes the timings of the tones that extensions hear during the calls they make and the ringing tones of their phones during incoming call requests.

45

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide The first four parameters seen in this window show the valid time intervals of the tones heard in various cases during calls by handset, and the last five parameters show the valid time intervals of the ring cadence of phones for various types of incoming calls. Modifications can be made on those time intervals, upon wish. The boxes in dark colors are used for determining the time periods in which tones or rings will be heard (ON), and the boxes in light colors are used for determining the time periods in which tones or rings will not be heard (OFF). Since the values that can be entered in each box varies in the range 0.02 and 2.25 seconds, in cases when durations longer than 2.52 seconds are required, two consecutive boxes can be selected as ON or OFF. Once the necessary changes are completed, the “OK” button is clicked and the new timing parameters become effective from then on for the next extension operations. Some low level settings related to extensions are done by the Other Settings option. The window below opens through this option:

Explanations of the parameters in this window are below: Minimum disconnect duration for on-hook (as flash enabled): This parameter sets the duration of the period in which an extension must keep the handset on hook in order to terminate a call (while the extension has hook-flash authorization). The value of the parameter can be entered as in the range 5-1250 msec. That value also determines the upper limit of the hook flash period, i.e., on hook durations that are shorter than the determined period are considered as hook flash, and the ones longer than that period are considered as hanging up. Minimum flash duration: This parameter sets the minimum duration of period in which an extension should keep the flash switch off in order to put a call on hold. The value of the parameter can be entered as in the range 5-1250 msec.

46

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide Maximum DP Break duration: If an extension is employing the flash switch of her/his phone to make hook flash, then the duration of that hook flash must not be short as to be confused with the DP break signal. Through this parameter, the maximum signal length that the exchange will detect as the DP break signal is determined. The value of the parameter can be entered as in the range 5-1250 msec. Minimum DP Break duration: The minimum duration of the DP break signal is determined through this parameter to prevent detection of some very short disconnections, which might occur on the line while an extension is dialing a number, as a DP digit. The value of the parameter can be entered as in the range 5-1250 msec. Maximum DP Make duration: This parameter determines the duration of the maximum make signal that will be created on the line while an extension is dialing DP numbers. The value of the parameter can be entered as in the range 5-1250 msec. Minimum DP Break duration: This parameter determines the duration of the minimum make signal that will be created on the line while an extension is dialing DP numbers. The value of the parameter can be entered as in the range 5-1250 msec. If DP phones of extensions are generating out-of-standard signals, then the parameters related to DP dialing can also be set to detect those signals. Minimum Inter-digit time-out for DP dialing: This parameter sets the length of the delay period between two digits dialed consecutively in order to make sure those digits are detected correctly by the exchange. The value of the parameter can be entered as in the range 5-1250 msec. Minimum disconnect duration for on-hook (as flash disabled): This parameter sets the duration of the period in which an extension must keep the handset on hook in order to terminate a call (while the extension does not have hook-flash authorization). The value of the parameter can be entered as in the range 5-1250 msec. That value also determines the upper limit of the hook flash period, i.e., on hook durations that are shorter than the determined period are considered as hook flash, and the ones longer than that period are considered as hanging up. Tone connection time after going off-hook: This parameter sets the length of the minimum period in which an extension has to keep the handset off hook for the handset to be detected by the system as lifted. The value of the parameter can be entered as in the range 5-1250 msec. This parameter can be employed especially to avoid such cases when the hook switch is turned on and off for very short time intervals unintentionally due to the very own characteristics of a phone while the extension is lifting the handset, the system may interpret such intervals as dialed DP digits and disconnect the dial tone. Minimum off hook duration during ringing to connect the call: In case of a coming call request, this parameter sets the length of the period in which an extension has to keep the handset off hook, in order to be detected by the system as answering the call. The value of the parameter can be entered as in the range 5-1250 msec. This parameter can be employed especially to avoid the misinterpretation by the system of the cases, when the hook switch is turned on and off for very short time intervals unintentionally while the extension is lifting the handset, due to the very own characteristics of a phone, as the call is being answered and to avoid dropping of the line. The entire parameters, except the last one, in this window are valid for all extensions, whereas the last parameter may be extension-specific. However, changes made through this window will exactly be reflected to the entire analog and rural extension cards. On the main table in hexadecimal format, the charging method can be programmed only for Rural Extension cards. The value on 9th column of the 22nd row of this table is used fro this adjustment (this value is 01 be default). The values and operations of them for this entry are:

47

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide -

01: Rural extension card produces metering pulses of 12 KHz.

-

02: Rural extension card produces metering pulses of 16 KHz.

-

03: Rural extension card activates soft polarity reversal.

-

04: Rural extension card activates hard polarity reversal.

Rural extension card can use these charging methods in the following cases: -

In internal calls, when the called extension answers, activates soft/hard polarity reversal.

-

In internal calls, when the called extensions ends the calls, activates soft/hard polarity reversal. (The system must be producing error tone at the end of conversation so that this application can work. For this program, refer Programming Manual-Line Connection After A Call program.)

-

In external calls through analog external lines, when metering pulse of 12 KHz or 16 KHz is received, produces metering pulse of 12 KHz or 16 KHz; or activates soft/hard polarity reversal.

-

In external calls through PRI/BRI external lines, when AOC information is received, produces metering pulse of 12 KHz or 16 KHz; or activates soft/hard polarity reversal

When the Trunk option is selected, the contents of the memory element, which is on the analog line cards, are presented as a table in hexadecimal. This table is rather for R&D purposes; hence making modifications in that table might disrupt operation of the exchange. In addition to that, a button has been included at the bottom of the window, in order to interpret and set the parameters more easily in a visual way. Two options are presented to the user when the “Other” button is clicked. The Cadence Settings option changes the timings of the signals of the tones heard during line access. The first four parameters seen in this window show the valid time intervals of the tones heard in various cases during line access, and the last five parameters show the valid time intervals of the ring cadence of phones for various types of incoming calls. Modifications can be made on those time intervals, upon wish. The boxes in dark colors are used for determining the time periods in which tones or rings will be heard (ON), and the boxes in light colors are used for determining the time periods in which tones or rings will not be heard (OFF). Since the values that can be entered in each box varies in the range 0.02 and 2.25 seconds, in cases when durations longer than 2.52 seconds are required, two consecutive boxes can be selected as ON or OFF. Once the necessary changes are completed, the “OK” button is clicked and the new timing parameters become effective from then on for the next extension operations. Some low level settings related to lines are done by the Other Settings option. The window below opens through this option:

48

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

Explanations of the parameters in this window are below: Minimum ring on duration to detect: This parameter sets the length of the ring signal that can be detected by the system in case of an incoming call request. The value of the parameter can be entered as in the range 40-1000 msec. If the ringing lasts shorter than the entered value, then the system will not detect that as a valid ring signal. Minimum ring off duration to release the line: When an incoming call request is detected by the exchange, this is the minimum time interval for the exchange to detect that the call is over after the remote party hangs up. The value of the parameter can be entered as in the range 40-1000 msec. DP Break duration: This parameter sets the length of the DP break signal that will be transmitted to the remote system when the line is in DP signaling mode. The value of the parameter can be entered as in the range 1-250 msec. That value is 66 msec for Turkey. DP Make duration: This parameter sets the length of the DP make signal that will be transmitted to the remote system when the line is in DP signaling mode. The value of the parameter can be entered as in the range 1-250 msec. That value is 33 msec for Turkey. Line Flash duration: Making hook flash over line may be required in order to exploit some CO services or for some exchange-exchange connections. This parameter sets the period in which the line is disconnected. The value of the parameter can be entered as in the range 4010000 msec. Interdigit time-out for DP lines: This parameter sets the length of the period in which the exchange has to wait between two consecutive DP digits, for the network, to which the exchange is connected, to detect the DP signals correctly, which are generated from lines. The value of the parameter can be entered as in the range 5-1250 msec.

49

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide Metering pulse frequency upper limit: This parameter sets the upper limit of the frequency range in order to detect the pulse price signal transmitted from the network to which the exchange is connected. The value of the parameter can be entered as in the range 100-25000 Hz. The pulse price signal frequency is 12000 Hz for Turkey. Metering pulse frequency lower limit: This parameter sets the lower limit of the frequency range in order to detect the pulse price signal transmitted from the network to which the exchange is connected. The value of the parameter can be entered as in the range 100-25000 Hz. The pulse price signal frequency is 12000 Hz for Turkey. Minimum metering pulse on duration: This parameter sets the minimum duration of the pulse price signals to be detected correctly, which are transmitted from the network to which the exchange is connected. The value of the parameter can be entered as in the range 10-2500 msec. Minimum metering pulse off duration: This parameter sets the minimum wait time between two consecutive pulse price signals, which are transmitted from the network to which the exchange is connected, for the signals to be detected correctly. The value of the parameter can be entered as in the range 10-2500 msec. Current detection on line: This parameter controls whether current check will be done on an analog line. If current check is performed on a line and if the exchange does not detect current on that line, then the line is taken out of service, so that extensions are prevented to access such malfunctioning lines. The entire parameters in that window will be valid for all analog lines. When one of the E&M and LB Lines options is selected, the contents of the memory element, which is on the cards of those lines, is presented as a table in hexadecimal. This table is rather for R&D purposes; hence making modifications in that table might disrupt operation of the exchange. In addition to that, a button has been included at the bottom of the window, in order to interpret and set the parameters more easily in a visual way. The Cadence Settings option is presented to the user when the “Other” button is clicked. That option changes the timings of the signals of the tones heard during line access. The first four parameters seen in this window show the valid time intervals of the tones heard in various cases during line access, and the last five parameters show the valid time intervals of the ring cadence of phones for various types of incoming calls. Modifications can be made on those time intervals, upon wish. The boxes in dark colors are used for determining the time periods in which tones or rings will be heard (ON), and the boxes in light colors are used for determining the time periods in which tones or rings will not be heard (OFF). Since the values that can be entered in each box varies in the range 0.02 and 2.25 seconds, in cases when durations longer than 2.52 seconds are required, two consecutive boxes can be selected as ON or OFF. Once the necessary changes are completed, the “OK” button is clicked and the new timing parameters become effective from then on for the next extension operations. When the PRI ISDN option is selected, the contents of the memory element, which is on the PRI ISDN cards, are presented as a table in hexadecimal. This table is rather for R&D purposes; hence making modifications in that table might disrupt operation of the exchange. In addition to that, a button has been included at the bottom of the window, in order to interpret and set the parameters more easily in a visual way. Two options are presented to the user when the “Other” button is clicked. The Cadence Settings option changes the timings of the signals of the tones heard during line access.

50

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide The first four parameters seen in this window show the valid time intervals of the tones heard in various cases during line access, and the last five parameters show the valid time intervals of the ring cadence of phones for various types of incoming calls. Modifications can be made on those time intervals, upon wish. The boxes in dark colors are used for determining the time periods in which tones or rings will be heard (ON), and the boxes in light colors are used for determining the time periods in which tones or rings will not be heard (OFF). Since the values that can be entered in each box varies in the range 0.02 and 2.25 seconds, in cases when durations longer than 2.52 seconds are required, two consecutive boxes can be selected as ON or OFF. Once the necessary changes are completed, the “OK” button is clicked and the new timing parameters become effective from then on for the next extension operations.

51

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide The window below opens if the Other Settings option is selected:

Explanations of the parameters in this window are below: Master/Slave Mode: If the PRI card is to be employed for videoconferencing or other similar type of data communication application, then the card must receive the clock signal from the line it is connected to, or problems with the applications might occur. For such cases when the PRI card is to receive an external clock signal, the card must be in Slave mode. If, on the other hand, the card does not need to receive the clock signal externally, i.e., if it is to be employed only for voice communication, then it may be set to Master mode. Relay Position: In order to use the PRI ISDN module for connection of two exchanges, line on one side must be in NT (extension) mode, whereas the line on the other side must be in TE (line) mode. When the relay is on, the line will be in NT mode, and when it is off, on the other hand, the line will be in TE mode. Dialed digit control: The exchange can check the dialed numbers in two ways for the calls through PRI ISDN lines: 1) The time-out check (wait for 4 sec.): In that case, if there happens a delay of 4 seconds between two consecutive digits of the dialed number, then the digits dialed so far are transmitted as in block structure (N-Block) in ISDN format and the rest of the digits dialed afterwards are transmitted in DTMF format. 2) Digit count check for a dialed number (Count digits): In that case, the quantity of digits to be dialed through the PRI ISDN lines is determined according to the first dialed number. Unless the determined number of digits have been dialed, the number is not transmitted to the line: a) If the first digit to be dialed is 0, then a number is expected to be dialed with digits whose quantity has been determined as in the field “Long distance number digit count“.

52

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide b) If the first digit to be dialed is 1, then a number with 3 digits is expected to be dialed. c) If the first digit to be dialed is neither 0 nor 1, then a number is expected to be dialed with digits whose quantity has been determined as in the field “Local number digit count“. Local number digit number: If “Dialed number check” has been selected as “Count digits”, then, for the cases when numbers do not start with 0 or 1, the quantity of digits for a number expected by the exchange to be considered as a local number is determined. Long distance number digit number: If “Dialed number check” has been selected as “Count digits”, then, for the cases when numbers start with 0, the quantity of digits for a number expected by the exchange to be considered as a long distance number is determined. Error monitoring: This is used for monitoring a PRI line against possible problems and transferring the necessary data to the DS_DATA.BIN file. For the case when the value is “0”, no parameter is monitored. Various parameters of the line are monitored for different values. The values to be set should be selected by consulting Karel. Q.SIG Mode: If PRI is connected to a router or to another PABX and if Q.SIG features are required to be used on this line then the Q.SIG mode must be selected. Otherwise, PTT mode can be selected. Collect Digits: This parameter is used to define the number dialing mode of the PRI line. If “Yes” is selected then N-Block dialing is use, otherwise overlap dialing is used. For Q.SIG mode “No” must be selected. Router Mode: If the PRI line is to be connected to a router, to provide the full efficiency for the communication between the PRI line of the system and the router, router mode must be activated, otherwise must be deactivated. The parameters under this option will also be valid for TWT lines. When the BRI ISDN Extension option is selected, the contents of the memory element, which is on the BRI ISDN and digital extension cards, are presented as a table in hexadecimal. This table is rather for R&D purposes; hence making modifications in that table might disrupt operation of the exchange. In addition to that, a button has been included at the bottom of the window, in order to interpret and set the parameters more easily in a visual way. Two options are presented to the user when the “Other” button is clicked. The Cadence Settings option changes the timings of the signals of the tones heard during line access. The first four parameters seen in this window show the valid time intervals of the tones heard in various cases during line access, and the last five parameters show the valid time intervals of the ring cadence of phones for various types of incoming calls. Modifications can be made on those time intervals, upon wish. The boxes in dark colors are used for determining the time periods in which tones or rings will be heard (ON), and the boxes in light colors are used for determining the time periods in which tones or rings will not be heard (OFF). Since the values that can be entered in each box varies in the range 0.02 and 2.25 seconds, in cases when durations longer than 2.52 seconds are required, two consecutive boxes can be selected as ON or OFF. Once the necessary changes are completed, the “OK” button is clicked and the new timing parameters become effective from then on for the next extension operations. The window below opens if the Other Settings option is selected:

53

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

Through the Language option in this window, the language of some messages that will be transmitted to ISDN or digital phones is selected between Turkish and English.

54

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

IV.

LCR-ARS

LCR (Lease Cost Routing) – ARS (Automatic Route Selection) feature is one of the most superior features of the DS200, DS200S and DS200M exchanges. Thanks to that feature, the exchange automatically figures out the least costly route according to the call type the extension wishes to make and establishes the connection through that route. Hence, that feature provides means to reduce telephone expenses to a minimum. Meanwhile, the extension makes a normal line call, being unaware of such automatic routing operations. The exchanges must be programmed accordingly first, in order to fulfill such automatic operations. That programming can be realized only by ADMIN200. Some of the tables used during that programming and parameters used in those tables are below:

IV.1.

THE CALL FILTERS TABLE

LINE: This is the number of the filter to be defined. It may take a value in the range 1-32. FILTER: It determines the sort of modifications to be made with the number dialed by the extension, according to the starting digit number. The number of the filter that is to be defined will be entered in the Routing Table.

Filter definitions are done by establishing several sequences consisting of characters and figures. Each character has specific functions as a filter element. There are characters and sample digits following them in the table below. Sequence

Meaning

R3

The first 3 digits of the dialed number are discarded. Here, the number to be entered should be in the range 1..9.

[440]

If the starting digits of the dialed number are 440, then they are discarded. Otherwise, no action is taken.

%2

Two digits from the dialed number are added to the number to be transmitted to the line. Here, the number to be entered should be in the range 1..9.

D2

Adds 2 wait periods to the number to be transmitted to the line (1). Here, the number to be entered should be in the range 1..9.

C

Adds a single wait period to the number to be transmitted to the line (2).

A

Exactly transfers the remaining digits of the dialed number to the number to be transmitted to the line.

X

Deletes the entire remaining digits of the dialed number.

123

Adds 123 to the number to be transmitted to the line.

(1)

When the exchange detects a wait character while calling a number, it interprets the first wait character as ‘Wait until receiving “the connection has been established” signal from the other party’. In this case, if there are other digits to be dialed, then they are transmitted after the call has been established. (2)

The wait character is interpreted as ‘Wait until receiving “the connection has been established” signal from the other party’.

55

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide Filter groups can be formed from those sequences. For example: Filter

Dialed number

Number to be transmitted to the line

R2987D2

49123

987,,123

R2%2987D2

49123

12987,,3

R2987%2D2

49123

98712,,3

R2987AD2

49123

987123,,

R2987D2%1X

49123

987,,1

[55]A49

5412

541249

[55]A49

5512

1249

The filters in LCR-ARS work cumulatively, i.e., once the filters to be used have been determined (they are determined by referring to the Starting Digits Table, according to the dialed digits), the resulting digits from one portion of the filter group are used for the next portion of the filter. Such processing of the digits continues until the entire sequences in the filter are completely executed. That means a dialed number can be received either wholly or in parts, if that is the case, filter group processing will resume. In the example below, digits dialed by an extension are arriving in 3 separate groups until the filter is completely executed. The dialed digits, the numbers resulting from the filter and that are transmitted to the line, respectively, are below, from the top to the bottom. Filter

Dialed number

Number that is transmitted to the line

%1[55]X%2R149

123456

1 (Here, the digits after “1” are discarded by X, the filter pauses at %2 sequence and a number is awaited.)

5

5 (the first digit that will be processed by the %2 sequence)

6

6 (%2 completed its task, i.e., it transmitted two more digits to the line).

7

49 (“7” was discarded because of R1 and 49 was added.)

As the result, the number 15649 was transmitted to the line. The digits that will be dialed later will be exactly transmitted to the line.

IV.2.

THE ROUTING TABLE

ROUTE NUMBER: Three alternative routes can be created for various actions according to the number dialed by an extension. Those appear as 1st Route, 2nd Route and 3rd Route in the Routing Table window.

NO: It is the route number. It can take values in the range 1..32. FILTER NO: It is the filter number that will be used in the related route line. That filter

number is the parameter that appears as “Line” in the Call Filters Table.

56

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

TRUNK:

If the exchange is supposed to access a specific line according to the number dialed by an extension, then the access code of the related line is entered in this field.

A.L.: Not only the least costly route, but also the most reliable route can be selected by the

LCR-ARS feature sometimes. That route may be more costly than the other routes; hence, not all the extensions may be allowed to make use of that route. The ARS access authorization levels for the extensions are defined for that purpose (Access Tables – ARS Access Authorization Level). The value in the A.M. field displays the minimum necessary ARS Authorization Access Level for the extensions that can use the route in the indicated direction. For instance, if there is 7 in this field, the extensions with the ARS access authorization level 7 or higher can use that route, whereas the level six or lower levels are not sufficient to use the route.

WT:

It determines whether an extension will hear a warning tone from handset in case somehow there is necessity for the 2nd or 3rd routes to be used. By this way, the extension knows the line access is not through the most convenient route according to the criteria set by her/him, but through an alternative route instead.

ROUTE: If the number of the route is also defined in ROUTES.TXT file, this field shows the

route name corresponding to this route line. If the route number is not defined in ROUTES.TXT, then this field is empty.

IV.3.

THE ROUTING PLAN TABLE

ROUTING PLAN NUMBER: It is the highest-level parameter. It can take values in the

range 1..16. That means 16 different routing plan tables can be created to employ for different intervals of time.

STARTING TIME: If the routes to be applied have been determined to differ according to day and time, then the related time is specified here. There are check boxes next to this parameter field for the 7 days of the week. ROUTING NUMBERS FOR DAYS: Route numbers (The “No” field in the Routing Table), which are to be used starting from the specified day and time, are entered in the check boxes for days next to the Starting Time parameter field.

IV.4.

THE LEADING DIGITS TABLE

LINE: The line number LEADING DIGITS: The group of digits that are to be considered by the exchange during the checking of numbers dialed by the extension. That group of digits is not necessarily the same as the leading digits of the dialed number. Numbers with structures mentioned below can be entered in this field: Starting: If the number dialed by an extension starts with those digits, then the route for that number is applied. If even a single digit fails to match the definition, then the route does not apply. Range: A lower and an upper limit are defined. If the dialed number is within this range, then the corresponding route is applied. The entire digits must be dialed for that application. For instance, suppose that the defined value is in the range 1200-1500. In that case, that route is selected if the extension dials, say, 1300, but not 13. Else: The entered values must not match the values in the other lines except this line and must start with the number specified in this line, for the corresponding route to be applied.

57

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

ROUTE: The route (Routing Table) or the routing plan to be applied is selected when the

defined numbers are dialed.

Before starting with LCR-ARS programming, planning is required considering the entire parameters in the tables mentioned above. For example: Suppose a GT20 GSM Gateway device has been connected to the lines 7200 and 7201 of the DS200 exchange. The line 7200 is connected to the GSM operator with the code 0542 (That operator supports calls with the codes 0543 and 0546 as well) and the line 7201 is connected to the GSM operator with the code 0532 (That operator supports calls with the codes 0533 and 0535 as well.) One does not need to dial the prefix 0542 to call a number beginning with the code 0542 on the operator “0542”. Likewise, One does not need to dial the prefix 0532 to call a number beginning with the code 0532 on the operator “0532”. The extensions are required to make their GSM calls over the GT02 device. However, if the entire lines of GT20 are busy during a GSM call, then certain extensions will be enabled to call through the normal CO line with number 701. The ARS Access Authorization level of the extensions that will be allowed to make use of the normal line is required to be at least 10. In that case, the extensions will receive the warning tone. In the meantime, it is required that other GSM calls starting with 05xx shall be made through the operator with the code 0542. In that case, the following should be considered for the planning: 1) Starting digit numbers: 90542, 90543, 90546, 90532, 90533, 90535, 905 else 2) The lines to be used: For 90542, 90543, 90546, 905 else: 7200, For 90532, 90533 and 90535: 7201. 3) Ranges in time and day base: None 4) Filters: R5 for 90542 and 90532 (In order to discard the entire prefix) R1 for the others (In order to discard 9 only, which is the line access code) 5) A.L. 0 for the 1st route, 10 for the 2nd route. 6) WT Let the extensions receive the warning tone for the cases when 2nd route is selected: Present. The programming can start after determining all those. First of all, the “ARS filters” table is opened and the filters are defined:

58

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

Then the Routing Table is created:

There is no need for a Routing Plan Table, since there is no setting related to date and time. Finally, the Leading Digit Table is created:

59

DS200 ADMIN200 User’s Guide

Therefore, all the programming necessary at startup has been completed.

60

KNEE PROGRAMMING GUIDE

The products may have some differences from the functionality written in this guide according to the hardware revision or software version.

TABLE OF CONTENTS I.

INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................... 3

II. INSTALLING AND RUNNING KNEE PROGRAM................................................... 4 III. MAIN WINDOW..................................................................................................... 5 IV. EX200 (4VOIP) APPLICATIONS............................................................................. 6 IV.1. EX200 (4VOIP) APPLICATION................................................................................................. 7

V. LAN ADAPTOR APPLICATIONS ..........................................................................13 V.1.

LAN ADAPTOR APPLICATION ............................................................................................. 14

V.2.

DS200 PROGRAMMING THROUGH LAN ADAPTOR............................................................ 15

DS200 KNEE Programming Guide

I.

INTRODUCTION

KNEE program is the software used for programming LAN Adaptor and EX200 (4VoIP) modules of DS200 system. This software is included in the CD which is shipped with each DS200 main-rack and can be used with all EX200 (4VoIP) and LAN Adaptor modules.

3

DS200 KNEE Programming Guide

II. INSTALLING AND RUNNING KNEE PROGRAM Installation of KNEE program is just simply copying KNEE.EXE program in the CD in an appropriate folder of the PC. Since KNEE is a program that uses TCP/IP protocol and works on local area network (LAN), the PC where the program will be copied, must be connected to a computer network. After the program is copied, the shortcut file for running the program is required. The characters “ /R” should be typed at the end of “Target” line as shown in the figure below:

After these setting, KNEE program is ready for use. When the program is run through its shortcut, the following window that asks the IP address of the target card appears:

Once the IP address, which had been previously defined by programming, is entered; KNEE program searches for this card on LAN. If the card with this IP is found, the main program window opens.

4

DS200 KNEE Programming Guide

III. MAIN WINDOW The following window appears when KNEE program is run as explained in the previous section:

The following options of this window are the same for VoIP and LAN Adaptor cards: Refresh button refreshes the information about the card on the screen. Settings button opens the following window with the setting of KNEE program:

Under normal conditions, there is no need to make any adjustments on this window. Security button can be used to define a password and this password can be used each time KNEE program is run.

5

DS200 KNEE Programming Guide

IV. EX200 (4VOIP) APPLICATIONS Companies with more than one DS series system can use EX200 (4VoIP) card to connect these system through lines using IP network and thus form a structure where telephone calls can be made though IP lines. These companies generally hire “Leased Line” or “Frame Relay” lines from their central office. Making calls through these lines reduces telecommunication expenses of the company by getting rid of the cost of the calls established through regular lines. VoIP card works as a “gateway” that connects the system and IP network. Voice communication can be established with VoIP card without the necessity of router interfaces like FXO, FXS on IP networks. This means cheaper and more effective solutions for organisations. The IP settings of the card must first be defined from system supervisor’s telephone by the 800480 coded program so that KNEE program can recognise EX200 (4 VoIP) card. Because, KNEE program searches the VoIP card by its IP address. (Please see programming manual for the details of the 800480 coded program.) After the LAN connection of the VoIP card is made by a standard network cable, the card can be reached by KNEE program.

6

DS200 KNEE Programming Guide

IV.1. EX200 (4VOIP) APPLICATION For the setting of VoIP card, the shortcut of KNEE program is used. After the target card is found, the following window appears:

When right-clicked by the mouse on the VoIP card seen on the main window, five options appear:

7

DS200 KNEE Programming Guide

Network Settings Window

In addition to the values defined by the 800480 coded program, this window shows the following information: •

DS200 No: Used for monitoring purposes. It does not have any functionality in normal operation.

•

Gatekeeper: This box should be marked if a Gatekeeper is available on VoIP card’s LAN or WAN.

•

Gatekeeper discover: This box is used only for design phase and must be unmarked during normal operation.

•

Gatekeeper 1 IP-Gatekeeper 2 IP: Gatekeeper’s IP address should be entered as “Gatekeeper 1 IP”, and alternative Gatekeeper’s IP address should be entered as “Gatekeeper 2 IP”. If only one Gatekeeper is available, the same IP address should be entered for these fields.

8

DS200 KNEE Programming Guide

Address Table

The values should be entered after double-clicking on a row. On this table the telephone numbers are matched with the corresponding IP addresses, and therefore the network properties and numbering plan must be clearly determined before filling out this table. Example: Suppose there are two DS200 systems, each with one VoIP card with the following numbering and IP plans: System A: Extension access codes :1000 – 1999 VoIP card’s IP address : 192.168.2.35 Access codes of VoIP card’s lines :1678, 1679, 1680, 1681 System B: Extension access codes: 2000 – 2999 VoIP card’s IP address: 192.168.4.24 Access codes of VoIP card’s lines: 2346, 2347, 2348, 2349

9

DS200 KNEE Programming Guide In this case, there two alternatives for filling out address table on system A: a) When Gatekeeper is used: No

Numbers

IP No Range

Destination

1

1

192.168.2.35

Gatekeeper

2

2000-2999

192.168.4.24

Gateway

As seen here, the destination is selected as “Gatekeeper” for one of the rows and “Gateway” for the other row. Once VoIP card is put into operation, it should tell the Gatekeeper that the system it belongs has extension numbers starting with “1” (registration). For this reason, VoIP card reaches the Gatekeeper through the specified IP address and informs Gatekeeper both about itself and the incoming calls for the system through VoIP card start with “1”. Once such an address table is used, the call is established in the following way: -

Gateway tries to send the number by first communicating with 1st Gatekeeper.

-

If communication with 1st Gatekeeper is not established, then communicate with 2nd Gatekeeper is tried.

-

If communication with any Gatekeeper is not established in a certain period, then the address row with destination “Gateway” is taken into account and the call is established as per this row.

As seen from the table, the numbers are entered in different format for Gatekeeper and Gateway. Although number of digits of the called number should be specified for Gateway, it is not necessary to indicate the number of digits for Gatekeeper. The number of digits is determined by “Parameters” options for Gatekeeper. b) When Gatekeeper is not used: No

Numbers

IP No Range

Destination

1

2000-2999

192.168.4.24

Gateway

The address rows should be filled out by considering the number of dialled digits with “Destination” specified as Gateway. In both conditions, the address table and LCR table must be in match. The following rows should be available on LCR table of system A: System A Leading Digits Table: Line

Leading Digits

Route

1

2000-2999

Route 1

10

DS200 KNEE Programming Guide Route Table: Route 1 No

Filter No

External line

ARS level

1

1

1678

0

There should not be any filtering option for Filter 1. Furthermore a PBX group including the external lines 1678, 1679, 1680 and 1681 should be formed.

Capability Table

The values on this table should not be change without consulting the technical service.

Parameters

11

DS200 KNEE Programming Guide -

Gain adjustments: These settings can be done for input and output with ranges of 6 dB and can be improved by fine tuning.

-

Media transmit rate: This value determines the packet duration. When a small value is entered, the necessity a bigger bandwidth arises. However, a big value can result with loss of bigger packets in case of a problem. The ideal value is 4. For uses with Cisco, it should be entered as 2. The entered value determines the packet duration in terms of 10 milliseconds.

-

Call establish wait time: Determines the maximum duration for waiting for Gateway’s answer for the calls established through Gateway.

-

TCP close time: TCP is closed after the specified time when the conversation is over.

-

TCP abort time: TCP is closed after the specified time in case of an error.

-

TCP retransmit time: For the case when there is a risk of packet loss, the same packet is sent after the specified time.

-

ECO canceller: It should always be set as “Yes”.

-

Monitor: When set as “1”, DS200 Log Listener program can be used for monitoring purposes.

-

faststart: This value should be set as “1” in order to eliminate H245 and to establish communication with H225 in a faster way. If the system which has connection to DS20 over VoIP does not support “faststart”, then the value of this parameter must be “0”.

-

maximum digits (gatekeeper): When the calls are established through Gatekeeper, VoIP card send the call to the Gatekeeper after the specified number of digits are dialled.

-

Gatekeeper ACF timer: Before the call starts, Gateway asks Gatekeeper about the IP address of the number that is going to be routed (Admission Request-ARQ). If the answer to this questions (Admission Confirmation-ACF) is not received within the specified time, the calls is established though Gateway, instead of Gatekeeper.

Write to EEPROM This option should be used to write all of the parameters in the volatile memory after the programming finished (this option should never be activated when there are ongoing conversations).

12

DS200 KNEE Programming Guide

V. LAN ADAPTOR APPLICATIONS LAN Adaptor card is an interface used to program the system remotely through an IP network such as LAN, WAN or Internet. The IP settings of the card must first be defined from system supervisor’s telephone by the 800470 coded program so that KNEE program can recognise LAN Adaptor. Because, KNEE program searches the LAN Adaptor by its IP address. (Please see programming manual for the details of the 800470 coded program.) After the LAN connection of the LAN Adaptor is made by a standard network cable, the card can be reached by KNEE program.

13

DS200 KNEE Programming Guide

V.1. LAN ADAPTOR APPLICATION When KNEE program is run, the information of LAN Adaptor cards on the same LAN are shown as below:

Note: As in VoIP card’s application, when shortcut of KNEE is used, LAN Adaptor card with the desired IP address can be reached. When right-clicked by the mouse on the LAN Adaptor seen on the main window, two options appear:

14

DS200 KNEE Programming Guide

Settings

In addition to the values defined by the 800480 coded program, this window shows the following information: •

AdmPort: TCP/IP communication port number.

•

DS200 No: Used for monitoring purposes. It does not have any functionality in normal operation.

Write to EEPROM This option should be used to write all of the parameters in the volatile memory after the programming finished (this option should never be activated when there are ongoing connections).

V.2. DS200 PROGRAMMING THROUGH LAN ADAPTOR After LAN Adaptor card’s IP address definitions are made and connection to network is established, DS200 system can be reached through a computer on the same LAN and then be programmed. ADMIN200 program is used for this purpose and the shortcut of the program is required. The folowing characters should be typed at the end of “Target” line: “/lan:IP address of LAN Adaptor:15000”

15

DS200 KNEE Programming Guide

After this setting, ADMIN200 program searches for this IP on its LAN and once this IP is found, the program works normally just like communicating via RS232.

16